2026
CIVIC
Sedan
Owner’s Manual
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is
uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
NOTICE
System Updates Terms & Conditions
*
General
Your vehicle has an application that allows your 9-in. Color
Touchscreen to automatically search for Honda software updates
that are specific to your 9-in. Color Touchscreen and its connected
devices (initially every one (1) week via Wi-Fi or every four (4) weeks
via Telematics Control Unit (TCU)
*
, queries may occur more or less
frequently due to internet outages, retries, direct user action, WAP
push from the server or a change in query policy on the Honda
servers). This application periodically transmits to our servers a
limited amount of vehicle and device information (Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), the Model Type (MT) Identification
Number, Hardware and Software Part Number, Serial Number,
Software Version, preferred language, Internet Protocol (IP)
address, Transaction Log (alert or update viewing, update
download and installation, software status), etc.). When the
application finds an update from the server, the application initially
asks permission to download and install the update. Where
available, in your settings menu you may elect to automatically
download and install these updates or you may elect to manually
update the system.
When your 9-in. Color Touchscreen searches our servers for
updates or alerts, we will automatically provide you with the
opportunity to update your devices or transmit the update or alert
directly to your 9-in. Color Touchscreen. We will also maintain on
our servers a log of the updates or alerts that are installed.
Your Personal Data
Should the aforementioned information transmitted to Honda
constitute personal information in your region, please note that this
information will be treated in strict accordance with the rules and
regulations outlined in this notice as well as applicable data
protection law.
The terms of our privacy notice are incorporated into these terms by
reference and your use of system updates will be subject to the
privacy notice. Our privacy notice sets out information about how we
and any named third-parties will process any personal data we
collect from you or that you provide to us, via the application.
For further details, see Honda's vehicle data privacy notice at:
U.S.: https://www.honda.com/privacy/connected-product-privacy-
notice
Canada: https://www.honda.ca/privacy/vehicledata (English)
https://www.honda.ca/fr/confidentialite/politiquedeconfidentialité
(French)
Honda collects, uses and stores your personal data for the reasons
set out below:
●
to deliver the system updates and related services to you;
●
to allow us to improve and optimize the system updates
products and services;
●
to respond to user questions and complaints; and for internal
record keeping.
●
where necessary for Honda's legitimate interests, as listed
below, and where our interests are not overridden by your data
protection rights.
●
as otherwise described in Honda's Privacy Notice and Vehicle
Data Privacy Notice.
Protecting our legitimate business interests and legal rights
includes, but is not limited to, use in connection with compliance,
regulatory, auditing, legal claims (including disclosure of such
information in connection with legal process or litigation) and other
ethics and compliance reporting requirements.
Honda will also convert personal data into anonymous data and
use it (normally on an aggregated statistical basis) for uses such as
market research and analysis, to improve the system updates, to
analyze trends, and to assess the success of software update
releases. Aggregated personal information does not personally
identify you or any other use of the system updates.
* Not available on all models
Honda may share this data with Honda's worldwide support
organization or affiliated Honda companies or other third-parties
engaged by Honda for the purposes of rendering support services
in connection with system support.
Software End User License Agreement
Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by
the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which
contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User
License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your
use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services,
functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of
the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and
conditions of the End User License Agreement.
You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software
by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda
Motor Co., Inc., Honda Automobile Customer Service, Mail Stop
CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd., Torrance, CA 90501-2746.
Privacy Notice
This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage
this setting, visit at:
U.S.: https://mygarage.honda.com/s/vehicle-data-privacy-
settings?page=question
Canada: https://www.honda.ca/privacy/vehicledata (English)
https://www.honda.ca/fr/confidentialite/politiquedeconfidentialité
(French)
To learn more about how we collect and use Personal
Information, including precise geolocation data, please read
our Privacy Notice and Vehicle Data Privacy Notice, accessible
at:
U.S.: https://www.honda.com/privacy/connected-product-
privacy-notice
Canada: https://www.honda.ca/privacy/vehicledata
(English)
https://www.honda.ca/fr/confidentialite/
politiquedeconfidentialité
(French)
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
●
Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
●
Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
●
Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
●
Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
●
Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
The images throughout this owner's manual (including the front
cover) that depict features, equipment, Audio/Information screen
details, and meter screens are only examples and may not be
representative of your particular model.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
2 Safe Driving P. 39
For Safe Driving P. 40 Seat Belts P. 44 Airbags P. 53
2 Instrument Panel P. 89
Indicators P. 90 Gauges and Driver Information Interface P. 110
2 Controls P. 159
Clock P. 160 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 162
Moonroof
*
P. 187 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 188
Interior Convenience Items P. 215
2 Features P. 237
Audio System P. 238 7-in. Color Touchscreen P. 245
General Information on the Audio System P. 330
2 Driving P. 411
Before Driving P. 412 Towing a Trailer P. 417
Multi-View Rear Camera P. 594 Refueling P. 596
2 Maintenance P. 601
Before Performing Maintenance P. 602 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 605
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 635
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 650
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 659
Tools P. 660 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 661
Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 686 Overheating P. 687
If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 702
2 Information P. 709
Specifications P. 710 Identification Numbers P. 714
Emissions Testing P. 717 Warranty Coverages P. 719
Contents
Child Safety P. 73 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 87 Safety Labels P. 88
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 178 Security System P. 181 Windows P. 184
Mirrors P. 205 Seats P. 207
Climate Control System P. 231
9-in. Color Touchscreen P. 267 Audio Error Messages P. 328
Customized Features P. 349, 354 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 375, 394
When Driving P. 418 Honda Sensing® P. 471 Braking P. 571 Parking Your Vehicle P. 583
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions P. 599 Turbo Engine Vehicle
*
P. 600
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 615 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 630
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 637 Battery P. 647 Remote Transmitter Care P. 649
Cleaning P. 651 Accessories and Modifications P. 656
Handling of the Jack P. 678 Engine Does Not Start P. 679 If the Battery Is Dead P. 683
Indicator Coming On/Blinking P. 689 Fuses P. 695 Emergency Towing P. 701
If You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 703 Refueling P. 704 Emergency Call (eCall)
*
P. 705
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 715 Reporting Safety Defects P. 716
Authorized Manuals P. 722 Customer Service Information P. 723 Open Source License P. 724
Quick Reference Guide
P. 8
Safe Driving
P. 39
Instrument Panel
P. 89
Controls
P. 159
Features
P. 237
Driving
P. 411
Maintenance
P. 601
Handling the Unexpected
P. 659
Information
P. 709
Index
P. 725
8
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
❚
Climate Control System (P 231)
❚
Rear Defogger Button
*
(P 201)
❚
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button
*
(P 201)
❚
Hazard Warning Button
❚
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(P 70)
❚
Audio System (P 238)
❚
Front Seat Heater Buttons
*
(P 229)
❚
(Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) System OFF) Button (P 458)
❚
Brightness Control (P 202, 203)
❚
System Indicators (P 90)
❚
Gauges (P 110)
❚
Driver Information Interface (P 115, 138, 143)
❚
ENGINE START/STOP Button (P 188)
9
Quick Reference Guide
❚
Headlights/ Turn Signals
(P 192, 191)
❚
Paddle Shifter (Shift down)
*
(P 431)
❚
Left Selector Wheel (P115 )
❚
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow Buttons
*
(P 472, 500)
❚
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Button
(P 472, 544)
❚
Interval Button (P 472, 513, 533)
❚
Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 204)
❚
Heated Steering Wheel
*
(P 228)
Canadian models
❚
Right Selector Wheel
*
(P 144)
❚
(Talk) Button
*
(P 257, 258, 312, 317)
❚
Audio Remote Controls (P 241)
❚
(Home) Button
*
(P 115)
❚
Horn (Press an area around .)
❚
Paddle Shifter (Shift up)
*
(P 431)
❚
Wipers/Washers (P 199)
❚
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons
*
(P 472, 521)
* Not available on all models
Visual Index
10
Quick Reference Guide
❚
Power Window Switches (P 184)
❚
Master Door Lock Switch (P 176)
❚
Door Mirror Controls (P 206)
❚
Trunk Opener (P 178)
❚
Interior Fuse Box (P 697)
❚
Hood Release Handle (P 617)
❚
Driver’s Front Airbag (P 56)
❚
Rearview Mirror (P 205)
❚
Passenger’s Front Airbag (P 56)
❚
Wireless Charger
*
(P 224)
❚
USB Port(s) (P 239)
❚
ECON Button
*
(P 437)
❚
Electric Parking Brake Switch (P 571)
❚
Drive Mode Switch
*
(P449, 452)
❚
Accessory Power Socket (P 223)
❚
Glove Box (P 217)
❚
Shift Lever
Continuously Variable
Transmission
*
(P 427, 429)
Manual Transmission
*
(P 433)
❚
Auto Idle Stop OFF Button (P 439, 445)
❚
Automatic Brake Hold Button (P 576)
11
Quick Reference Guide
❚
Side Curtain Airbags (P 67)
❚
Ceiling Light (P 215)
❚
Grab Handle
❚
Coat Hook (P 221)
❚
Seat Belts (P 44)
❚
Map Lights (P 216)
❚
Moonroof Switch
*
(P 187)
❚
Sunglasses Holder
*
(P 222)
❚
Sun Visors
❚
Vanity Mirrors
❚
Front Side Airbags (P 64)
❚
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 81)
❚
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 83)
❚
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 78)
❚
Rear Seats (P 209)
❚
USB Ports
*
(P 239)
❚
Rear Side Airbags (P 64)
❚
Knee Airbags (P 61)
❚
Front Seat (P 207)
* Not available on all models
Visual Index
12
Quick Reference Guide
❚
Maintenance Under the Hood (P615)
❚
Windshield Wipers (P199, 635)
❚
Tires (P637, 661)
❚
Power Door Mirrors (P206)
❚
How to Refuel (P597)
❚
High-Mount Brake Light (P634)
❚
Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P180)
❚
Opening/Closing the Trunk (P178)
❚
Door Lock/Unlock Control (P165)
❚
Side Turn Signal Lights
*
(P191, 630)
❚
Headlights (P192, 630)
❚
Front Turn Signal Lights (P191, 630)
❚
Front Side Marker Lights (P192, 630)
❚
Taillights (P633)
❚
Brake Lights (P631)
❚
Rear Turn Signal Lights (P631)
❚
Rear Side Marker Lights (P631)
❚
Taillights (P631)
❚
Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P195, 630)
❚
Multi-View Rear Camera (P594)
❚
Trunk Release Button
*
(P179)
❚
Rear License Plate Light (P633)
❚
Back-Up Lights (P633)
13
Quick Reference Guide
Auto Idle Stop Function
To improve fuel economy, the engine stops and then restarts as detailed below. When Auto Idle Stop is on, the Auto Idle Stop indicator
(green) comes on. (P438, 444)
*1:U.S. models
*2:Canada models
At Continuously variable transmission Engine status
Deceleration
Stop
Start-up
Continuously variable transmission models
Automatic Brake Hold Off
(P580)
Automatic Brake Hold On
(P576)
Depress the brake pedal.
On
Keep the brake pedal depressed.
With the automatic brake hold system
activated, you can release the brake pedal
when the indicator (green) comes on.
*1
*2
Off
Release the brake pedal.
With the automatic brake hold system
activated, depress the accelerator pedal.
Restarting
* Not available on all models
14
Quick Reference Guide
At Manual transmission Engine status
Deceleration
Stop
Start-up
Manual transmission models
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
On
●
Continue to depress the brake
pedal.
●
Move the shift lever to (N.
●
Release the clutch pedal.
Off
1. Depress the clutch pedal fully
again.
2. Move the shift lever to
(1.
3. Depress the accelerator pedal to
resume driving.
Restarting
15
Quick Reference Guide
Eco Assist® System
*
(P 437, 449)
*1:Models without drive mode switch
*2:Models with drive mode switch
Ambient Meter
●
With SPORT mode
*
off, the color of the ambient meter
changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being
driven in a fuel-efficient manner.
ECON Button
*1
(P 437)
Helps maximize fuel
economy.
DRIVE MODE Switch
*2
(P 449, 452)
Select the ECON mode to
help maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator (P 101)
Comes on when the ECON mode is
on or selected.
*1
*2
*1 *2
Ambient Meter
* Not available on all models
16
Quick Reference Guide
Safe Driving (P 39)
Airbags (P 53)
●
Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your
passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 73)
●
All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
●
Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
●
Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 87)
●
Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist (P 43)
●
Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts (P 44)
●
Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
●
Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
17
Quick Reference Guide
Instrument Panel (P 89)
Indicators (P 90)/Gauges (P 110)/Driver Information Interface (P 115, 138, 143)
M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/
Shift Indicator (P94)
Models with A-type meter
Shift Position Indicator (P94)/
Transmission System Indicator (P95)
Fuel Gauge (P111)
Driver Information Interface
(P115)
Tachometer (P111)
Speedometer (P110)
Traffic Sign Recognition System
(P113)
Odometer (P112)
Outside Temperature (P112)
18
Quick Reference Guide
●
You can change the gauge design.
Change gauge design (P158)
Models with B-type meter
Fuel Gauge (P111)
Driver Information
Interface (Right
Side Area)
(P143)
Tachometer (P111)
Speedometer (P110)
Traffic Sign Recognition System (P113)
Odometer (P112)
Temperature Gauge
(P112)
Outside Temperature
(P112)
Rev Indicators (P114)
Shift Up/Down Indicators
(P95)
Driver Information
Interface (Left
Side Area)
(P138)
19
Quick Reference Guide
Controls (P 159)
Clock (P 160)
a Press the MENU button.
b Select Clock Settings.
c Select Automatic Time, then select OFF.
d Select Set Time.
e Select 12H/24H to change 12 or 24 hour
clock.
f Select or .
g Select Set to set the time.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
MENU Button
3
4
To adjust date
To adjust time
a Press the button.
b Select General Settings.
c Select System.
d Select Date & Time.
e Select Set Date & Time.
f Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select Off.
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
g Select Set Date or Set Time.
h Select or .
i Press the button to set the date or
time.
The audio system receives signals from GPS
satellites, updating the clock automatically.
3
4
20
Quick Reference Guide
ENGINE START/STOP
Button
(P 188)
Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.
Turn Signals (P 191)
Lights (P 192)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing
Wipers and Washers
(P 199)
*1:Models with automatic intermittent
wipers
*2:Models with manual intermittent
operation
AUTO should always be turned OFF before
the following situations in order to prevent
severe damage to the wiper system:
●
Cleaning the windshield
●
Driving through a car wash
●
No rain present
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
*
(-: Low sensitivity
*1
: Lower speed, fewer sweeps
*2
(+: High sensitivity
*1
: Higher speed, more sweeps
*2
MIST
OFF
AUTO
*1
: Wiper speed varies automatically
INT
*2
: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
21
Quick Reference Guide
Steering Wheel (P 204)
●
To adjust, push the adjustment lever
down, adjust to the desired position, then
lock the lever back in place.
Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside
(P 175)
●
Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it at the same time.
To adjust
To lock
Trunk (P 178)
●
Press and hold the trunk opener on the
driver’s door to unlock and open the trunk.
●
Press the trunk release button on the
remote to unlock and open the trunk.
●
Press the trunk release button
*
on the
trunk lid to unlock and open the trunk.
Power Door Mirrors
(P 206)
●
With the power mode in ON, move the
selector switch to L or R.
●
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Trunk Opener
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Power Windows (P 184)
●
With the power mode in ON, open and
close the power windows.
●
If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger’s window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
●
If the power window lock button is in the
ON position (indicator on), each
passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button
Window
Switch
Indicator
* Not available on all models
22
Quick Reference Guide
Climate Control System (P231)
●
Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
●
Press the button to turn the system on or off.
●
Press the button to defrost the windshield.
Fan Control Dial
(Windshield Defroster) Button
Driver’s Side Temperature
Control Dial
(Recirculation) Button
(ON/OFF) Button
AUTO Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Dashboard
vent
s
Dashboard
and floor
vents
Floor vents Floor and
defroster
vents
Passenger’s Side Temperature
Control D
ial
SYNC Button
Models with SYNC button
23
Quick Reference Guide
(Windshield Defroster) Button
(Recirculation) Button
Fan Control DialTemperature Control Dial
(ON/OFF) Button
AUTO Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Dashboard
vent
s
Dashboard
and floor
vents
Floor vents Floor and
defroster
vents
Models without SYNC button
24
Quick Reference Guide
Features (P 237)
Audio Remote Controls
(P 241)
●
SOURCE Button
Press to cycle through the audio modes as
follows:
FM AM USB/iPod/Apple CarPlay/
Android Auto Bluetooth® Audio
●
VOL(+ / VOL(- (Volume) Switch
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
●
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Radio:
Press / to change the preset
radio station. Press and hold /
to change the strong station.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
SOURCE
Button
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch
When listening to the wired connection,
USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or
Smartphone Connection:
Press / to skip to the
beginning of the next song or return to
the beginning of the current song.
USB flash drive or Bluetooth® Audio:
Press and hold / to change a
folder/group.
●
VOL(+ / VOL(- (Volume) Switch
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
●
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Radio:
Press / to change the preset
radio station. Press and hold /
to change the strong station.
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Left Selector Wheel
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
VOL(+/VOL(-
(Volume) Switch
When listening to the wired connection,
USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or
Smartphone Connection:
Press / to skip to the
beginning of the next song or return to
the beginning of the current song.
USB flash drive:
Press and hold / to change a
folder.
●
Left Selector Wheel
Roll up or down:
To cycle through the audio modes, roll up
or down and then press the left selector
wheel:
Back/Phone/FM/AM/USB/Bluetooth/Apple
CarPlay/Android Auto/Alexa/Customize
display
u Depending on a connected device, the
displayed modes may be changed.
27
Quick Reference Guide
About System Updates
*
When a software update is available for your vehicle, a notification will be displayed on the audio/information screen.
Instructions for performing updates via the audio/information screen are included in this manual.
For details on other methods of performing an update, please refer to the HondaLink manual, or ask a dealer.
System updates that change specifications may result in some discrepancies with the information in this owner’s manual.
■
Instructions
2 System Updates (P279)
* Not available on all models
28
Quick Reference Guide
Driving (P 411)
Manual Transmission
*
(P 433)
Continuously Variable Transmission
*
(P 426, 427, 429)
●
Shift to
(P
and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
●
Shifting
M Indicator
Park
Used when parking or starting
the engine.
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive (S)
*
Used:
●
For better acceleration.
●
To increase engine
braking.
●
When going up or down
hills.
Models without
paddle shifters
Models with
paddle shifters
Depress the brake pedal and press
the shift lever release button to shift.
Press the shift lever release
button and shift.
Shift without pressing the
shift lever release button.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Drive
Used:
●
For normal driving.
●
When temporarily driving in
the 7-speed manual shift
mode.
●
When driving in the 7-speed
manual shift mode (when
driving in SPORT mode).
Models with paddle shifters
Low
*
●
Used to further increase
engine braking.
●
Used when going up or
down hills.
Shift Down
(-
Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter
7-Speed Manual Shift
Mode
*
(P431)
●
Allows you to manually
shift the transmission up or
down without removing
your hands from the
steering wheel.
When the transmission is in
(D with SPORT mode
●
Pulling a paddle shifter
changes the mode from
continuously variable
transmission to 7-speed
manual shift mode.
●
The M indicator and the
selected speed number are
displayed in the shift
indicator.
When the transmission is in
(D
●
Pulling a paddle shifter
temporarily changes the mode
from continuously variable
transmission to 7-speed
manual shift mode. The
selected speed number is
displayed in the shift
indicator.
Release
Button
Shift Lever
Shift Position Indicator
Shift Indicator
29
Quick Reference Guide
CMBS
TM
On and Off
(P 478)
●
When a possible frontal collision is likely
unavoidable, the Collision Mitigation
Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) can reduce
the vehicle speed and the severity of the
collision.
●
The CMBS
TM
is turned on every time you
start the engine.
●
To turn the CMBS
TM
on or off, use the
safety support of the driver information
interface.
VSA® On and Off (P 458)
●
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®)
system helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
●
VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
●
To partially disable or fully restore VSA®
function, press and hold the (VSA® OFF)
button until you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
(P 460)
●
Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
●
The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you start the engine.
●
A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.
U.S. models
* Not available on all models
30
Quick Reference Guide
Refueling (P 596)
Fuel recommendation:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane number 91 or higher
Fuel tank capacity:
12.39 US gal (46.9 L)
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
a Unlock the driver’s door.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Inside (P174)
b Press and release the area indicated
by the arrow to release the fuel fill
door. You will hear a click and the
lid will open slightly.
c After filling, wait about five seconds
before removing the filler nozzle.
Wait for five seconds
31
Quick Reference Guide
Honda Sensing® (P 471)
Assists with functions such as acceleration,
braking, and steering in order to reduce the
burden on the driver, as well as help avoid
or reduce the severity of collisions.
Honda Sensing® has the following functions:
Collision Mitigation
Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) (P 474)
The system can assist you when it
determines there is a possibility of your
vehicle colliding with a vehicle (including
motorcycles) ahead from behind, an
oncoming vehicle in front, a vehicle
approaching from the side, a pedestrian, or
someone riding a bicycle (moving bicycle).
The CMBS
TM
is designed to alert you when
the potential for a collision is determined, as
well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding
collisions, and reducing collision severity.
Low Speed Braking
Control
*
(P487)
Using sonar sensors located on the front and
rear bumpers, and the front grille, this
system can detect if there is danger of a
potential collision with a wall or other
obstacle during normal driving. The system
then assists in avoiding collisions and
reducing damage from impact through
assistive braking.
Road Departure
Mitigation System
(P 492)
Alerts and helps assist you when the system
detects a possibility of your vehicle crossing
over detected lane markings, or
approaching the outer edge of the
pavement (into grass or gravel road
shoulder) or a detected oncoming vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed
Follow
*
(P500)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and
a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected
vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and
stop your vehicle, without you having to
keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)
*
(P521)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and
a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours, without you
having to keep your foot on the brake or
the accelerator.
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS)
(P 541)
Provides steering input to help keep the
vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the
vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
* Not available on all models
32
Quick Reference Guide
Traffic Jam Assist
*
(P553)
The Traffic Jam Assist system uses a camera
mounted to the upper portion of the
windshield to detect and monitor left and
right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines.
Based on inputs from the camera, the
system can apply steering torque to keep
your vehicle in the center of the detected
lane.
Traffic Sign Recognition
System
(P562 )
Reminds you of road sign information, such
as the current speed limit your vehicle has
just passed through, showing it on the
gauge.
Blind Spot Information
System
*
(P467 )
When the system detects vehicles
approaching from behind in adjacent lanes,
the appropriate indicator comes on,
providing assistance when you change lanes.
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
(P590 )
Monitors the rear corner areas using the
radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you
if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner
is detected.
The system is convenient when you are
backing out of a parking space.
Parking Sensor System
*
(P585 )
The corner and center sensors monitor
obstacles around your vehicle, and the
beeper, driver information interface and
audio/information screen let you know the
approximate distance between your vehicle
and the obstacle.
Auto High-Beam (P196 )
The front wide view camera detects the
light sources ahead of the vehicle such as
the lights of a preceding or oncoming
vehicle, or street lights. When you are
driving at night, the system automatically
switches the headlights between low beam
and high beam depending on the situation.
Driver Attention Monitor
(P121, 149)
The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes
steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is
being driven in a manner consistent with
drowsy or inattentive driving. If it
determines that the vehicle is being driven
in such a manner, it will display the degree
of the driver’s attention on the driver
information interface.
33
Quick Reference Guide
Maintenance (P 601)
Under the Hood (P 615)
●
Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add
when necessary.
●
Check brake/clutch
*
fluid.
●
Check the battery condition monthly.
a Pull the hood release handle under the driver's side lower corner
of the dashboard.
b Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then raise the
hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the
lever.
c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in
place.
Lights (P 630)
●
Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades (P 635)
●
When lifting the wiper arms, move
them into the maintenance position
before lifting them.
●
Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield or become
noisy.
Tires (P 637)
●
Inspect tires and wheels
regularly.
●
Check tire pressures regularly.
●
Install snow tires for winter
driving.
* Not available on all models
34
Quick Reference Guide
Handling the Unexpected (P 659)
Flat Tire (P 661, 668)
●
Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire
with the compact spare tire in the trunk.
●
Park in a safe location and repair the flat tire
using the tire repair kit in the trunk.
Indicators Come On
(P 689)
●
Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.
Models with compact spare tire
Models with tire repair kit
Engine Won’t Start
(P 679)
●
If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
Blown Fuse (P 695)
●
Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
Overheating (P 687)
●
Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing
(P 701)
●
Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
35
Quick Reference Guide
What to Do If
The power mode does not
change from VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) to ACCESSORY.
Why?
●
The steering wheel may be locked.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right
after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
The power mode does not
change from ACCESSORY
to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Why?
The shift lever should be moved to (P.
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P 581)
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission
models
36
Quick Reference Guide
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in
the lock position. If so, open the
rear door with the outside door
handle.
To cancel this function, slide the
lever up to the unlock position.
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver's door?
The beeper sounds when:
●
The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
●
The exterior lights are left on.
●
The Auto Idle Stop is in operation.
Why does a beeper sound
when I walk away from the
vehicle after I close the
door?
The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock
operating range before the door completely closes.
2 Locking the doors and trunk (Walk away auto lock®) (P 167)
Models with keyless access system
37
Quick Reference Guide
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when the driver, the front passenger, and/or
the rear passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
Pressing the electric
parking brake switch does
not release the parking
brake. Why?
Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
I’m seeing an amber
indicator of a tire with an
exclamation point. What is
that?
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If
you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate
the system.
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P 460)
Depressing the accelerator
pedal does not release the
parking brake
automatically. Why?
●
Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
●
Check if the transmission is in (P
*
or (N. If so, select any other
position.
U.S. models
* Not available on all models
38
Quick Reference Guide
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Unleaded gasoline with a
Pump Octane Number
(PON) of 91 or higher is
recommended.
Is it possible to use
unleaded gasoline with a
Pump Octane Number
(PON) of 87 or lower on
this vehicle?
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic
knocking noise in the engine and will result in decreased engine
performance.
Use of a gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to
engine damage.
Manual transmission models
39
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions.............. 40
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 42
Safety Checklist ................................. 43
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 44
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 49
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 52
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 53
Types of Airbags ................................ 56
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 56
Knee Airbags ..................................... 61
Side Airbags....................................... 64
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 67
Airbag System Indicators.................... 69
Airbag Care ....................................... 72
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 73
Safety of Infants and Small Children .... 75
Safety of Larger Children ................... 85
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 87
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 88
40
Safe Driving
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Important Safety Precautions
■
Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■
Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■
Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■
Don't drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces, and territories prohibit the
use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by
the driver while driving.
41
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Safe Driving
■
Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■
Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
■
Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
■
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
Children, pets, and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be
injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the
vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be
injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of
the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the
climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the
climate control system can shut off at any time.
42
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
Safe Driving
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front and
rear outer seat belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Side Airbags
Seat Belt Tensioners
7
7
9
9
8
10
6
11
Outer Lap Pretensioners
Knee Airbags
12
13
10
12
13
9
11
12
8
9
43
uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist
Safe Driving
Safety Checklist
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 174
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Seats P. 207
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions P. 212
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 49
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age,
height, and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 73
1Safety Checklist
If the door and/or trunk open message appears on
the driver information interface, a door and/or the
trunk is not completely closed. Close all doors and
the trunk tightly until the message disappears.
2 Warnings P. 127, 156
Continuously variable transmission models
44
Safe Driving
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers
■
Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor locks to
restrain your body.
The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 81
1About Your Seat Belts
If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in
place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt,
then extend it slowly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
3
WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Continued
45
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
■
Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
1About Your Seat Belts
If a front or rear seat passenger moves around and
extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may
activate. If this happens, release the retractor by
unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract
completely. Then, refasten the belt.
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
46
Safe Driving
■
Front seats
The seat belt system includes an indicator on
the instrument panel to remind the driver or a
front passenger or both to fasten their seat
belts.
If you set the power mode to ON and a seat
belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and
the indicator will blink. After a few seconds,
the beeper will stop and the indicator will
come on and remain illuminated until the seat
belt is fastened.
The beeper will periodically sound and the
indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving
until the seat belt is fastened.
■
Seat Belt Reminder
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the power mode is set to ON.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound.
The indicator also may not come on and the beeper
may not sound when the occupant is not heavy
enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants
(e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved
to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will
injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 73
The driver information interface uses colors to aid the
driver in checking the status of the passengers.
For the front seating positions:
• Green indicates the seat belt is fastened.
• An unfastened gray graphic indicates the seat belt
is not fastened and an occupant has not been
detected.
• An unfastened red graphic indicates the seat belt is
unfastened and an occupant has been detected.
Continued
47
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
■
Rear seats
Your vehicle monitors rear seat belt use.
The driver information interface notifies you
about the status of the rear seat belts' use.
In order to encourage the driver to evaluate
rear seat belt usage, the display appears
when:
• Any of the rear passenger seat belts are
unfastened when the power mode is set to
ON.
• A rear door is opened and then closed.
• Any of the rear passengers fasten or
unfasten their seat belt.
The seat belt reminder indicator blinks and the
beeper sounds if any rear passenger seat belts
have been unfastened while driving.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The system will not detect a passenger in the rear
seats who has not fastened the seat belt.
The driver should check the status of the rear
passengers’ seat belts at the start of each trip and
each time a passenger is seated in the rear seats,
using the driver information interface as an aid.
An alert will sound if a passenger in the rear seats
unfastens the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
or if motion resumes while the graphic is red.
The driver information interface uses colors to aid the
driver in checking the status of the passengers.
For the rear seating positions:
• Green indicates the seat belt is fastened.
• An unfastened gray graphic indicates the seat belt
has not been fastened recently.
• An unfastened red graphic indicates the seat belt
was unfastened recently.
The system does not monitor harnesses that are part
of a child seat, nor the anchors of the LATCH system.
While the system can inform you that a seat belt is
fastened, it cannot determine whether a child seat is
properly installed or used.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 73
: Fastened
: Unfastened
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
48
Safe Driving
The front seats and the outer rear seats are equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts and the outer rear seat belts
during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not
severe enough to inflate the front airbags or the front knee airbags.
■
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioners on both sides of the vehicle also activate.
Front seats
Outer rear seats
49
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Continued
Safe Driving
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Seats P. 207
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully
retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt
once, then push it back in.
Then, smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten.
If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully
retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the
seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.
2 About Your Seat Belts P. 44
2 Seat Belt Inspection P. 52
Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
50
Safe Driving
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and
then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly
stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
Lap belt
as low as
possible
■
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
Push
51
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
■
Advice for Pregnant Women
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
52
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract
easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3
WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
53
Continued
Safe Driving
Airbags
Airbag System Components
6
7
8
9
1011
12
6
9
6
9
6
9
9 9
54
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
The front, driver's knee, front passenger's
knee, side, and side curtain airbags are
deployed according to the direction and
severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags
are deployed in a rollover. The airbag
system includes:
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
b Two knee airbags. The driver's knee
airbag is stored under the steering
column; the front passenger's knee
airbag is stored under the glove box.
Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
c Four side airbags. One for the driver, one
for the front passenger, and two for the
rear outboard occupants. The front
airbags are stored in the outer edges of
the seat-backs and the rear airbags are
stored next to the outer rear seating
positions. All are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
d Two side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
e An electronic control unit that, when the
power mode is in ON, continually
monitors information about the various
impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors,
rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat
belt tensioners, and other vehicle
information. During a crash event, the
unit can record such information.
f Automatic seat belt tensioners for the
front seats and outer rear seats. In
addition, the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate
sensors that detect whether or not the
belts are fastened.
g Driver’s seat position sensor. This sensor
detects the driver’s seat slide position to
help determine the optimal deployment
of the driver’s airbag.
h Weight sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The sensors are used for occupant
classification to activate or deactivate the
front passenger’s airbag.
i Impact sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
j An indicator on the center console that
alerts you that the passenger’s airbag has
been turned off.
k An indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
l A rollover sensor that can detect if your
vehicle is about to roll over and signal the
control unit to deploy both side curtain
airbags.
55
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front, driver's knee, and front
passenger's knee airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG
could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the
vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
■
Important Facts About Your Airbags
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
56
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe Driving
Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with four types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
• Knee airbags: Airbags under the steering column and under the glove box.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's outer seat-backs and
next to the outer rear seating positions.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belt not replace them. Seat belt is the occupant primary restraint
system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
■
Housing Locations
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is
in ON.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
Continued
57
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
■
Operation
■
How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
58
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
■
When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle
is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front
airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide
little, if any, protection.
■
When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■
When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
Continued
59
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related
injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a
seat position sensor.
Based on information from this sensor and the
severity of the impact, the advanced airbag
system determines the optimal deployment of
the driver’s airbag.
The front passenger’s advanced airbag system
has weight sensors. The sensors are used for
occupant classification to activate or
deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.
For adult size occupants, the system will
automatically activate the front passenger’s
airbag. If a small adult sits in the front
passenger seat and the system does not
recognize him/her as an adult, see
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 70
■
Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position
sensor or the passenger’s seat weight sensors, the
SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a
crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver’s
seating position or passenger’s occupant
classification) with a force corresponding to the
severity of the impact.
2 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Indicator P. 69
For the advanced front airbags to work properly,
confirm that:
• The occupant is sitting in an upright position
wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is
not excessively reclined.
• The occupant is not leaning against the door or
center console.
• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front
of them.
• There are no objects hanging from the front
passenger’s seat.
• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back
pocket.
• The steering wheel and passenger’s side dashboard
are not obstructed by any object.
• No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
60
Safe Driving
We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s
seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger’s
seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.
Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passenger’s seat if the airbag does
not automatically deactivate.
1Advanced Airbags
• There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat or seat-back.
• There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger’s seat.
• There are no objects placed under or beside the
front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned
objects can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
• The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 70
• The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is
set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An
improperly placed mat can interfere with the
advanced airbag sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 652
61
uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
Knee Airbags
The knee SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help keep
the driver and/or front passenger in the proper position and to help maximize the
benefit provided by the vehicle’s other safety features.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belt not replace them. Seat belt is the occupant primary restraint
system.
The knee airbag for the driver and the one for
the front passenger are housed under the
steering column and the glove box
respectively.
Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
■
Housing Locations
1Knee Airbags
Do not attach accessories on or near a knee airbag as
they can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbag, or even hurt someone if the airbag inflates.
The driver and front passenger should not store any
items under the seat or behind their feet. The items
can interfere with proper airbag deployment in the
event of a moderate to severe frontal collision and
may result in inadequate protection.
Housing
Location
Housing
Location
62
uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags
Safe Driving
The driver’s and front passenger’s knee airbag
deploy at the same time as the driver’s and
front passenger’s airbag respectively.
■
Operation
When
inflated
Knee
Airbag
When
inflated
Knee Airbag
63
uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags
Safe Driving
■
When knee airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed objects
that cause a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■
When knee airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
64
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver, front passenger, or
an outer rear seat occupant during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-
backs and next to the outer rear seating
positions.
Each is marked SIDE AIRBAG.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat and rear outboard
passengers always sit upright. Leaning into the path
of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from
deploying properly and increases the risk of serious
injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
Do not cover or replace the seat-back covers without
consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering seat-back covers can
prevent your side airbags from properly deploying
during a side impact.
Housing
Location
Housing
Location
65
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
■
Operation
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
66
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
■
When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
■
When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the
far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed
most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been
needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
67
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the
outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain
airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of
partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes,
particularly rollover crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
■
Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there
are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates the seat belt tensioners
for the front seats and outer rear seats.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■
Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
68
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe Driving
■
When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled
frontal collision.
69
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Continued
Safe Driving
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the driver information interface.
■
When the power mode is set to ON
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
■
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3
WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
70
Safe Driving
■
When the passenger airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger’s airbag has been turned off.
This occurs if the seat is empty or when the
weight sensors determine that a small child or
infant is on the passenger seat.
Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 73
If the indicator is on, in the event of a crash the passenger’s airbag will not deploy.
The passenger’s knee airbag will not deploy, either.
When you set the power mode to ON, the indicator comes on and goes off a few
seconds later to indicate that system checks are being performed. After that, the
indicator comes on or off depending on the passenger’s occupant classification.
■
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm
that:
• The occupant is sitting in an upright position
wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is
not excessively reclined.
• The occupant is not leaning against the door or
center console.
• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front
of them.
• There are no objects hanging from the front
passenger’s seat.
• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back
pocket.
• No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
• There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat or seat-back.
• There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger’s seat.
• There are no objects placed under or beside the
front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned
objects can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
• The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is
set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An
improperly placed mat can interfere with the
advanced airbag sensors.
• The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
U.S. Canada
71
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult,
depending on physique and posture, the system may
not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate
the passenger’s airbag.
If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set
forth in the above bullet points on the previous page
are met.
If the above conditions are met and the indicator is
still on, then with the transmission is in
(P
(continuously variable transmission) or
(N (manual
transmission), set the power mode to OFF and back
to ON.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as
possible if:
• All of the above conditions are met, and the
indicator comes on with an adult seated in the
front passenger seat.
• The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
• The indicator does not come on and go off after
setting the power mode to ON as described.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front
seat when the indicator is on.
72
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Safe Driving
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
■
When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
■
When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, seat belt tensioners for
the front seats and outer rear seats, and each seat belt that was worn during the
crash.
■
Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position
sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or
modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda
dealer. For U.S. vehicles, contact American Honda Automobile Customer Service at
1-800-999-1009. For Canadian vehicles, contact Honda Canada Customer Relations
at 1-888-9-HONDA-9.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
73
Continued
Safe Driving
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state and Canadian
province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when
they ride in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front airbag can injure or kill a
child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver’s ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.
3
WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
74
Safe Driving
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat
belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows, or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 88
3
WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
75
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Continued
Safe Driving
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant
reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat.
■
Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat
and the seat in front of it.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 53
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
■
Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a
child so long as the child’s height and weight are
appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
Infants should never be seated in a forward-facing
position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat
installed in a rear seating position:
The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly
detect the actual weight of the occupant.
3
WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
76
Safe Driving
If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rear-facing child seat,
the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat
until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.
■
Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
■
Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
3
WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
Continued
77
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children).
Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates
as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing
your child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■
Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
■
Selecting a Child Seat
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
78
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child
seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
1. Locate the anchor marks affixed to the
base of the seat cushion.
2. Pull out the anchor covers under the
marks to expose the lower anchors.
3. Place the child seat so that the probes are
on the cover.
■
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child
seat that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
3
WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same
anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not
be strong enough to hold two child seat
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
Marks
Probes
Continued
79
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
4. Attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make
sure that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
Flexible Type
Lower Anchors
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the
rear center seat
Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower
anchors which are used to secure a LATCH-compatible
child seat. The rear center seat, however, is not
equipped with anchors of any kind. The inner and
outer anchors are spaced apart at a standard distance
of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance between the two
inner anchors is 15 inches (380 mm).
LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted
with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the
rear center seat. However, a system fitted with
flexible-type attachments can be installed in the
center seat, provided that the manufacturer’s
instructions for that system permit the use of the
inner anchors with the stated spacing.
Before seating a child, make sure that the system is
properly attached to both the lower anchors and
tether anchors.
3
WARNING
Using the outer rear seats' inner anchors to
secure a LATCH compatible child seat in the
center seating position may result in failure
of the child seat, causing injury or death.
Only use the outer rear seats' inner anchors
to install a child seat in the center seating
position if the manufacturer's instructions
expressly permit.
80
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
5. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
6. Route the tether strap over the top of the
head restraint. Make sure the strap is not
twisted.
7. Secure the tether strap hook to the
anchor.
8. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by
the child seat manufacturer.
9. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured
by rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
10. Make sure any unused seat belt that a
child can reach is buckled, the lockable
retractor is activated, and the belt is fully
retracted and locked.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 73
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
Straight Top Tether Type
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
Other Top Tether Type
Continued
81
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely
necessary, the front passenger seat.
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and
check that the retractor has switched
modes by pulling on the webbing. It should
not pull out again until it is reset by
removing the latch plate from the buckle.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the
way out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.
■
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
82
Safe Driving
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; less than one inch of movement
should occur near the seat belt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
Continued
83
uuChild Safety uSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
A tether anchor point is provided behind each
rear seating position. If you have a child seat
that comes with a tether but can be installed
with a seat belt, the tether may be used for
additional security.
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchor point
and lift the cover.
2. Route the tether strap over the head
restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
■
Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether
Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats
whether using the seat belt or lower anchors.
Tether Anchor Points
Cover
Anchor
Straight Top Tether Type in Outer
Position
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
Other Top Tether Type in Outer
Position
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
84
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
3. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
Straight Top Tether Type in Center
Position
Other Top Tether Type in Center
Position
Tether Strap
Hook
Anchor
85
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Continued
Safe Driving
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■
Checklist
• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child’s neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
■
Protecting Larger Children
■
Checking Seat Belt Fit
1Safety of Larger Children
3
WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, and use a booster seat if
needed.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
86
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
the rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that
the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■
Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
■
Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state,
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■
Protecting Larger Children - Final Checks
87
Safe Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
■
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
88
Safe Driving
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label, which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
Sun Visor
U.S. models
Canadian models
Radiator Cap
U.S. models only
Dashboard
Canadian models
Air Conditioner System
2.0 L engine models for U.S.
1.5 L engine models for U.S.
89
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 90
Gauges and Driver Information Interface
Gauges............................................ 110
Driver Information Interface (A-type
Meter) ........................................115
Driver Information Interface Left Side Area
(B-type Meter)................................ 138
Driver Information Interface Right Side
Area (B-type Meter) ....................... 143
90
Instrument Panel
Indicators
Indicators come on/blink depending on the condition of the vehicle. Messages may display on the driver information interface at the same
time. Please take the appropriate action outlined in the message, such as contacting a dealer.
M (7-speed manual
shift mode) Indicator/
Shift Indicator
*
P. 94
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
Automatic Brake
Hold System
Indicator
Automatic Brake
Hold Indicator
U.S.
Canada
*1: When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the engine
has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in the
owner's manual.
P. 92
*1
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Charging System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
P. 93
P. 93
P. 93
P. 94
P. 94
*1
*1
*1
Shift Position Indicator
*
P. 94
Transmission System
Indicator
*
P. 95
P. 95
P. 96
*1
*1
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) System Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF Indicator
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) System Indicator
*1
P. 96
P. 96
P. 97
*1
*1
*1
P. 97
*1
P. 97
Shift Up Indicator
*
P. 95
Shift Down Indicator
*
P. 95
*1
*1
*1
* Not available on all models
91
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1: When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the engine
has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in the
owner's manual.
*2: Models without drive mode switch
*3: Models with drive mode switch
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
*
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Lights On
Indicator
High Beam
Indicator
System Message
Indicator
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed
Follow
*
Indicator (Amber)
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS) Indicator
(Amber)
Safety Support
Indicator (Green/Gray)
P. 98
Aut
o Idle Stop System
Indi
cator (Amber)
P. 103
P. 99
P. 105
*1
P. 99
P. 99
P. 99
Immobilizer System
Indicato
r
P. 102
S
ecurity System Alarm
Indicator
P. 102
P. 100
P. 106
P. 109
*1
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed
Follow
*
Indicator
(White/Green)
P. 105
*1
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS) Indicator
(White/Green)
P. 106
*1
*1
Safety Support
Indicator (Amber)
P. 107
*1
NORMAL Mode
Indicator
*
P. 101
Auto Idle Stop OFF
Indicator
P. 103
Auto Idle Stop
Suspend Indicator
P. 104
ECON Mode
Indicator
*
P. 101
*3
SPORT Mode
Indicator
*
P. 101
Low Temperature
Indicator
*
P. 101
Cruise Mode Indicator
(White/Green)
P. 106
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
Interval Indicator
*
P. 106
*2
*1
Auto Idle Stop
Indicator (Green)
P. 103
INDIVIDUAL Mode
Indicator
*
P. 101
* Not available on all models
92
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
●
Comes on when the parking brake is
applied, and goes off when it is released.
●
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if
you drive with the parking brake applied.
●
Comes on for about 30 seconds when you apply
the electric parking brake while the power mode is
in ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then goes off.
●
Stays on for about 30 seconds when you set the
power mode to VEHICLE OFF while the electric
parking brake is applied, then goes off.
• Comes on when the brake fluid level is
low.
• Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking
brake is released. Stop in a safe place and check
the brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes on
while driving P. 691
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
brake system.
●
Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
or Blinks P. 691
●
Blinks and the Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator (amber) comes on at the same time -
There is a problem with the electric parking brake
system. The parking brake may not be set.
Avoid using the parking brake and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake
System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 692
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
93
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)
●
Comes on if there is a problem with a
system related to braking other than the
conventional brake system.
●
Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●
With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal
braking ability.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
electric parking brake system and/or the
automatic brake hold system.
●
Stays on constantly - Avoid using the parking
brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
Automatic Brake
Hold System
Indicator
●
Comes on when the automatic brake hold
system is on.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 576
Automatic Brake
Hold Indicator
●
Comes on when the automatic brake hold
is activated.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 576
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
U.S.
Canada
94
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
●
After you have set the power mode to ON,
the vehicle performs system checks.
However, if the readiness codes have not
been set by that time, this indicator will
blink five times and then go off.
●
Readiness codes are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions control systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 717
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
emissions control systems.
●
Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s
cylinders is detected.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On
or Blinks P. 690
Charging System
Indicator
●
Comes on when there is a problem with
the charging system.
●
Stop in a safe place and contact a dealer
immediately.
2 Checking the Battery P. 647
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
P. 690
Shift Position
Indicator
*
●
Indicates the current shift position.
2 Shifting P. 427, 429
M (7-speed
manual shift mode)
Indicator/Shift
Indicator
*
●
Comes on when the 7-speed manual shift
mode is applied.
2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 431
* Not available on all models
95
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Transmission
System Indicator
*
●
Blinks if the transmission system has a
problem.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Shift Up Indicator
*
●
Comes on when shifting up is
recommended.
2 Shift Up/Down Indicators P. 435
Shift Down
Indicator
*
●
Comes on when shifting down is
recommended.
2 Shift Up/Down Indicators P. 435
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
●
Blinks and the beeper sounds for a few
seconds if you are not wearing a seat belt
when you set the power mode to ON, then
the indicator comes on.
●
If the front passenger is not wearing a seat
belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds
later.
●
Comes on for a while when the rear seat
belt is unfastened while the power mode in
ON.
●
Blinks while driving if you and/or any
passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The
beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.
●
The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when
you and the passengers fasten their seat belts.
●
Stays on after you and/or the passengers have
fastened the seat belt(s) - A detection error may
have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 46
* Not available on all models
96
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Low Fuel Indicator
●
Comes on when the fuel reserve is running
low (approximately 1.8 U.S. gal/7.0 Liters
left).
●
Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
●
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel
gauge.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
ABS.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no anti-lock
function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 581
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
●
Comes on if a problem with any of the
following is detected:
- Supplemental Restraint System
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
97
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator
• Comes on if there is a problem with the
EPS system.
• Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
• Do not drive displays on the driver
information interface - Immediately stop in a
safe place and contact a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On P. 693
Vehicle Stability
Assist
TM
(VSA®)
System Indicator
●
Blinks when VSA® is active. —
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
VSA® system, brake assist system, agile
handling assist, starting assist brake
function
*
or hill start assist system.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
P. 457
2 Brake Assist System P. 582
2 Agile Handling Assist P. 459
2 Starting Assist Brake Function P. 443
2 Hill start assist system P. 423
●
Comes on if the VSA® system is deactivated
temporarily after the battery has been
disconnected, then reconnected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Vehicle Stability
Assist
TM
(VSA®)
OFF Indicator
●
Comes on when you partially disable VSA®.
2 VSA® On and Off P. 458
●
Comes on if the VSA® system is deactivated
temporarily after the battery has been
disconnected, then reconnected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Models with A-type meter
* Not available on all models
98
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
*
●
May come on briefly if the power mode is
set to ON and the vehicle is not moved
within 45 seconds, to indicate the
calibration process is not yet complete.
●
Comes on and stays on when:
- One or more tires’ pressures are
determined to be significantly low.
- The system has not been calibrated.
●
Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place,
check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if
necessary.
●
Stays on after the tires are inflated to the
recommended pressures - The system needs to
be calibrated.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 461
●
Blinks for about one minute, and then stays
on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or
when a compact spare tire
*
is temporarily
installed.
●
Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a
compact spare tire
*
, get your regular tire repaired
or replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as
you can.
●
Comes on if the TPMS is deactivated
temporarily after the battery has been
disconnected, then reconnected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
99
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
• Blinks when you operate the turn signal
lever.
• Blinks along with all turn signals when you
press the hazard warning button.
• Does not blink or blinks rapidly
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 630, 631
Lights On Indicator
• Comes on when the parking, tail, and
other external lights are on.
2 Lights P. 192
High Beam
Indicator
• Comes on when the high beam headlights
are on.
—
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
• Comes on when all the operating
conditions of the auto high-beam are met.
2 Auto High-Beam P. 196
100
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
System Message
Indicator
• Comes on along with a beep when a
problem is detected. A system message on
the driver information interface appears at
the same time.
●
Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter
when a system message appears on the driver
information interface. Take the appropriate action
for the message.
●
While the indicator is on, press the (home)
button, and select Warnings to see the message
again.
2 Switching the Display P. 115
●
The driver information interface will not return to
the normal screen unless the warning is canceled,
or the (home) button is pressed.
●
While the indicator is on, roll the right selector
wheel to see the message again.
2 Switching the Display P. 143
●
The driver information interface will not return to
the normal screen unless the warning is canceled,
or the right selector wheel is rolled.
Models with A-type meter
Models with B-type meter
101
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models without drive mode switch
*2:Models with drive mode switch
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
INDIVIDUAL
Mode Indicator
*
●
Comes on when you set the drive mode to
INDIVIDUAL.
2 Drive Mode System P. 452
SPORT Mode
Indicator
*
●
Comes on when you set the drive mode to
SPORT.
●
The ambient meter remains lit up in red as long as
SPORT mode is selected.
2 Drive Mode System
*
P. 449
●
Gauges in the instrument panel light up in red as
long as SPORT mode is selected.
2 Drive Mode System P. 452
NORMAL Mode
Indicator
*
●
Comes on when you set the drive mode to
NORMAL.
2 Drive Mode System
*
P. 449, 452
ECON Mode
Indicator
*
●
Comes on when the ECON mode is on.
●
Comes on when you set the drive mode to
ECON.
2 ECON Button
*
P. 437
2 Drive Mode System
*
P. 449
Low Temperature
Indicator
*
●
Comes on when the engine coolant
temperature is low.
●
If the indicator stays on after the engine has
reached normal operating temperature, there may
be a problem with the temperature sensors. Have
your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Models with A-type meter
Models with B-type meter
*1
*2
Models without drive mode switch
Models with drive mode switch
Models without drive mode switch
Models with drive mode switch
* Not available on all models
102
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Immobilizer System
Indicator
• Blinks if the immobilizer system cannot
recognize the key information.
• Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set the
power mode to VEHICLE OFF, then select the ON
mode again.
Depress and hold the brake pedal before setting
the power mode to ON.
• Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
• Do not attempt to alter this system or add other
devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.
Security System
Alarm Indicator
• Blinks when the security system alarm has
been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 181
Indicator
Models with
A-type meter
Indicator
Models with
B-type meter
Canadian models
Indicator
Models with
A-type meter
Indicator
Models with
B-type meter
103
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Auto Idle Stop
Indicator (Green)
●
Comes on when Auto Idle Stop is in
operation. The engine automatically shuts
off.
2 Auto Idle Stop P. 438, 444
Auto Idle Stop OFF
Indicator
●
Comes on when the Auto Idle Stop system
has been turned off by the Auto Idle Stop
OFF button.
2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 439, 445
Auto Idle Stop
System Indicator
(Amber)
●
Blinks if there is a problem with the Auto
Idle Stop system.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
104
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Auto Idle Stop
Suspend Indicator
●
Comes on while Auto Idle Stop is
temporarily suspended in the following
situations.
—
- Brake pedal is not fully pressed
●
Depress the brake pedal firmly.
- The transmission is in a position other than
(D
2 Auto Idle Stop P. 438, 444
- System charging is prioritized
- Climate control system is prioritized
- is ON (indicator on).
- Engine coolant temperature is not in
operating range
- SPORT mode
*
is selected.
2 Auto Idle Stop P. 438, 444
2 Drive Mode System
*
P. 449, 452
- The battery temperature is too low.
2 Auto Idle Stop P. 438, 444
- Auto Idle Stop does not activate for some
reason.
Continuously variable transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
* Not available on all models
105
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow
*
Indicator (Amber)
●
Comes on if there is a problem with ACC
with Low Speed Follow
*
.
●
Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●
Comes on if the ACC with Low Speed
Follow
*
is deactivated temporarily after the
battery has been disconnected, then
reconnected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Indicator may come on temporarily when
the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
●
ACC with Low Speed Follow
*
has been
automatically canceled.
●
Make sure the total load is within the Maximum
Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow
*
Indicator
(White/Green)
●
Lights up in white when you press the
button.
●
Lights up in green while the system is in
operation.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow
*
P. 500
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 521
* Not available on all models
106
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Cruise Mode
Indicator
(White/Green)
●
Lights up in white when you change to
cruise mode.
●
Lights up in green when you have set a
speed for cruise control.
2 To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to
Cruise Control P. 517
2 To Switch ACC to Cruise Control P. 537
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
Interval Indicator
*
●
Comes on when Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) indicator comes on.
2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 533
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Amber)
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
LKAS.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
●
Indicator may come on temporarily when
the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
●
Make sure the total load is within the Maximum
Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(White/Green)
●
Lights up in white when you press the LKAS
button.
●
Lights up in green when the LKAS is in
operation.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 541
2 Traffic Jam Assist
*
P. 553
* Not available on all models
107
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Safety Support
Indicator (Amber)
●
Comes on if there is a problem with Road
Departure Mitigation system, CMBS
TM
, Low
Speed Braking Control
*
or blind spot
information system
*
.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with the
parking sensor.
●
Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered
with mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator stays on
even after you clean the area, have the system
checked by a dealer.
●
Indicator may come on temporarily when
the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
●
Make sure the total load is within the Maximum
Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
●
Comes on if the Road Departure Mitigation
system, CMBS
TM
and Low Speed Braking
Control
*
are deactivated temporarily after
the battery has been disconnected and
then reconnected.
●
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20
km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Models with parking sensor system
* Not available on all models
108
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Safety Support
Indicator (Amber)
●
Comes on when the Road Departure
Mitigation system and/or CMBS
TM
shuts
itself off.
●
Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is
too high.
Use the climate control system to cool down the
camera.
The system activates when the temperature inside
the camera cools down.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
●
Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked
by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place
and wipe the debris off with a soft cloth.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message are still displayed even after
you have cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
●
It may come on when the ambient conditions are
dark, such as when driving in a tunnel, or at night,
dawn, or dusk.
109
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Safety Support
Indicator (Amber)
●
Comes on when mud, snow, or ice
accumulates in the vicinity of the sonar
sensor.
●
Remove the obstacle in the vicinity of the sonar
sensor.
2 Low Speed Braking Control
*
P. 487
●
Comes on when mud, snow, or ice
accumulates in the vicinity of the blind spot
information system sensor.
●
Comes on when the temperature of the
blind spot information system sensor is
high.
●
Comes on while driving - Something may be
interfering with the blind spot information system
sensor. Check the vicinity of the blind spot
information system sensor and remove any
obstacles.
●
The system will return to normal when the
temperature cools down.
2 Blind Spot Information System
*
P. 467
Safety Support
Indicator (Green/
Gray)
●
Lights up in green when Road Departure
Mitigation system, CMBS
TM
, Low Speed
Braking Control
*
, blind spot information
system
*
, and parking sensor system are on.
●
Lights up in green and gray when one or
more of the systems above are off.
●
Lights up in gray when all systems above
are off.
2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 492
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 474
2 Blind Spot Information System
*
P. 467
2 Low Speed Braking Control
*
P. 487
2 Parking Sensor System
*
P. 585
Models with Low Speed Braking Control
Models with blind spot information system
* Not available on all models
110
Instrument Panel
Gauges and Driver Information Interface
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, and other related indicators.
They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.
■
Speedometer
1Speedometer
You can change the Speed/Distance units.
2 No Content P. 126
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Speed/Distance Units P. 156
2 Customized Features P. 354
If you change the unit from miles and mph to km and
km/h, the current vehicle speed in mph appears next
to the digital speedometer.
U.S. models with B-type meter
Vehicle Speed in mph
Continued
111
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
Instrument Panel
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
■
Tachometer
■
Fuel Gauge
1Tachometer
You can turn the tachometer display on or off.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
The shift up alarm sounds when the tachometer
reading approaches the red zone.
You can turn the shift up alarm feature on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 354
Models with A-type meter
Manual transmission models
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
After lightly refueling, or depending on your vehicle’s
condition, the actual amount of remaining fuel may
differ from the fuel gauge reading.
E
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
112
Instrument Panel
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■
Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading by up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
■
Temperature Gauge
■
Odometer
■
Outside Temperature
Models with B-type meter
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
Driving with the temperature gauge reading in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 687
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
You can adjust the temperature reading.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
Continued
113
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
Instrument Panel
Shows certain detected traffic signs while driving.
If speed limit warning is activated, the sign icon blinks when the maximum speed of
the traffic sign detected is exceeded by a threshold, when compared with the vehicle
speed.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 562
■
Traffic Sign Recognition System
1Traffic Sign Recognition System
The default speed limit warning threshold is the
maximum speed of the traffic sign detected.
You can adjust the threshold for speed limit warning.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
Models with A-type meter
Models with B-type meter
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
114
Instrument Panel
Shows the current mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow
*
, LKAS, and Traffic Jam
Assist
*
.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
P. 500
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 521
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 541
2 Traffic Jam Assist
*
P. 553
Shows the clock.
Light up from outside to center according to engine speed.
■
Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow
*
, the LKAS, and
Traffic Jam Assist
*
■
Clock
■
Rev Indicators
1Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow
*
, the LKAS, and
Traffic Jam Assist
*
When you set speed for ACC or cruise control, a set
speed mark will be displayed on the speedometer.
Models with B-type meter
Set
Speed
Models with A-type meter
1Clock
You can adjust the time manually and change the
clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour
clock.
2 Clock P. 160
Models with B-type meter
1Rev Indicators
You can turn the rev indicators on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 354
* Not available on all models
115
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Continued
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
The driver information interface shows information such as the estimated travelable
distance and fuel economy of the vehicle. It also displays messages such as warnings
and other helpful information.
When a warning message displays, please check the message and contact a dealer
to have the vehicle inspected if necessary. Please refer to the pages below if the
Engine oil pressure low or Engine temperature too hot message is displayed.
2 If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears P. 689
2 Overheating P. 687
Press the (home) button, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to the content
you want to see. Press the left selector wheel to see detailed information.
■
Switching the Display
1Switching the Display
You can add or delete the meter contents.
2 Customize Display P. 127
116
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
Customize
display
P. 127
Left Selector
Wheel
(home) Button
Roll the left
selector wheel.
No content
P. 126
Speed & time
P. 119
Warnings
P. 127
Range & fuel
P. 117
Vehicle settings
P. 128
Driver
attention
P. 121
Seat belts
P. 124
Safety
support
P. 124
Maintenance
P. 124
117
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Continued
Instrument Panel
Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.
■
Range/Fuel/Trip Meter
Average Fuel Economy
Range
Trip Meter B
Instant Fuel Economy
Trip Meter A
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
118
Instrument Panel
■
Trip meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Resetting a trip meter
To reset the trip meter, display it, press the left selector wheel, and then select
Reset.
u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.
■
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km.
The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel
economy is also reset.
■
Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.
■
Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated
distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
1Range
The driving range displayed is only an estimate and
may differ from the actual distance the vehicle can
travel.
119
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Continued
Instrument Panel
Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.
■
Speed/Time/Trip Meter
Trip Meter B
Average Speed
Trip Meter A
Elapsed Time
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
120
Instrument Panel
■
Trip meter
2 Trip meter P. 118
■
Elapsed time
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
■
Average speed
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
1Elapsed time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
1Average speed
You can change when to reset the average speed.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
Continued
121
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is
being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it
determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the
degree of the driver’s attention on the driver information interface.
When you select Driver attention on the
driver information interface, bars on it light up
in white to indicate the degree of the driver’s
attention.
2 Switching the Display P. 115
■
Driver Attention Monitor
1Driver Attention Monitor
The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if
the driver is tired or inattentive.
Regardless of the system’s feedback, if you are
feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as
long as needed.
Left Selector
Wheel
(home) Button
Driver Information Interface
Level
122
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
If two bars light up, the Driver attention
level low message will appear.
If one bar lights up, the Driver attention
level low. Time for a break. message will
appear, a beep will sound, and the steering
wheel will vibrate.
If this message appears, stop in a safe location
and rest for as long as needed.
The message will disappear when the
(home) button is pressed or when the system
has determined that the driver is driving
normally.
If the driver does not take a break and the
monitor continues to detect that the driver is
very tired, the message will appear again after
approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a
beep and steering wheel vibrations.
The message does not appear when the
traveling time is 30 minutes or less.
Continued
123
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
■
The Driver Attention Monitor resets when:
• The engine is turned off.
• The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.
■
For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
• The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.
■
Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention
Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:
• The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 541
• The condition of the road is poor; e.g., the surface is unpaved or bumpy.
• It is windy.
• The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner, such as
changing lanes or accelerating.
■
Customizing
You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile and audible
alert, Tactile alert, or OFF.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
The bars on the driver information interface remain
grayed-out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is
functioning.
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
124
Instrument Panel
Occurs, under specified conditions, when seat belts are latched or unlatched.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 46
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance Minder
TM
.
2 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 605
Indicates the status of the Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBS
TM
, and blind
spot information system
*
, such as On, Off, or Failure, by color and letters.
The following colors indicate the status of any of the above-mentioned systems:
• Green: The system is on.
• Gray: The system is off.
• Amber: There is a problem with the system.
■
Seat Belts
■
Maintenance
■
Safety Support
1Safety Support
If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
To turn each system on or off, first rotate the left
selector wheel to switch displays. From the next
display, you can select which system to turn on or off.
2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 492
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 474
2 Blind Spot Information System
*
P. 467
You can also confirm the status of each function by
the color of the safety support indicator.
2 Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 107
2 Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)
P. 109
* Not available on all models
125
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Continued
Instrument Panel
Area Info for
CMBS
TM
Area Info for
Road
Departure
Mitigation
System
Area Info for
Blind Spot
Information
System
*
Road
Departure
Mitigation
System Icon
and Status
Info
Blind Spot
Information
System Icon
and Status
Info
*
CMBS
TM
Icon
and Status
Info
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
126
Instrument Panel
2 Tachometer P. 111
■
Speed/Distance Units
Enables you to show another unit on the driver information interface and set the
displayed measurements to read in either miles and mph or km and km/h.
Press and hold the left selector wheel when you select the No content screen on the
driver information interface. Each time you do this, the unit will change from miles
and mph to km and km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation screen will appear
for a few seconds.
■
No Content
1No Content
The tachometer can be turned on and off using
Settings.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
Even if you have turned off the tachometer using
Settings, if No content is selected on the driver
information interface, it will change to a tachometer-
only display.
2 Switching the Display P. 115
Continued
127
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
You can choose which icons to display on the home screen.
1. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select
Customize display, then press the left
selector wheel.
2. Roll the left selector wheel.
3. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll
between icons, then press the left selector
wheel to check or uncheck them.
You can check if there are any active warning messages.
■
Customize Display
1Customize Display
Icons that are gray cannot be removed from the
home screen.
When you customize settings, shift to
(P.
■
Warnings
1Warnings
If there are multiple warnings, you can roll the left
selector wheel to see other warnings.
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
128
Instrument Panel
Use the driver information interface to customize certain features.
■
How to customize
Press the (home) button, then select the screen by rolling the left selector
wheel while the power mode is in ON, the vehicle is at a complete stop, and the shift
position is in
(P. Then, press the left selector wheel.
■
Vehicle Settings
1Vehicle Settings
To customize other features, roll the left selector
wheel.
2 List of customizable options P. 129
2 Example of customization settings P. 135
When you customize settings, shift to
(P.
Driver
Information
Interface
Left Selector Wheel
(home) Button
129
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Continued
Instrument Panel
■
List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
TPMS
calibration
*
— Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel/Calibrate
Driver assist
system setup
Forward collision
warning distance
Changes the distance at which CMBS
TM
alerts. Long/Normal
*1
/Short
ACC forward vehicle
detect beep
Causes the system to beep when a vehicle is detected or
when the vehicle is out of ACC with Low Speed Follow
range.
ON/OFF
*1
Road departure
mitigation setting
Changes the setting for the Road Departure Mitigation
system.
Narrow/Normal
*1
/Wide/
Warning only
Lane keeping assist
suspend beep
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended. ON/OFF
*1
Blind spot
information
*
Changes the setting for the blind spot information.
Audible and visual
alert
*1
/Visual alert
* Not available on all models
130
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Driver assist
system setup
Traffic sign
recognition system
display setting
Turns the traffic sign recognition system on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Traffic sign
recognition system
exceeding speed
warning
Turns the traffic sign recognition system over speed
warning on and off.
ON/OFF
*1
Speed limit warning
threshold setting
Changes the setting speed the traffic sign recognition
system over speed warning is activated.
Speed limit
*1
/
Speed limit+3mph/
Speed limit+5mph/
Speed limit+10mph
(When mph is selected)
Speed limit
*1
/
Speed limit+5km/h/
Speed limit+10km/h/
Speed limit+15km/h
(When km/h is selected)
Driver attention
monitor
Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.
Tactile and audible
alert
*1
/Tactile alert/OFF
131
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Meter setup
Language selection Changes the displayed language.
English
*1
/Français/
Español
Adjust outside temp.
display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” reset timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed
time A.
When fully refueled/
IGN OFF/Manually reset
*1
“Trip B” reset timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed
time B.
When fully refueled/
IGN OFF/Manually reset
*1
Adjust alarm volume
Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers, warnings,
turn signal sound, and so on.
High/Mid
*1
/Low
Fuel efficiency backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Rear seat reminder Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Speed/distance units Selects the speed/distance units.
km/h∙km/mph∙miles
*1
(U.S.)
km/h∙km
*1
/mph∙miles
(Canada)
Tachometer
Selects whether the tachometer is displayed on the
instrument panel.
ON
*1
/OFF
132
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Keyless access
setup
*
Door unlock mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s
door handle.
Driver door only
*1
/All
doors
Keyless access light
flash
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/
lock the doors.
ON
*1
/OFF
Keyless access beep
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the
doors.
ON
*1
/OFF
Remote start system
ON/OFF
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Lighting setup
Auto high-beam Turns the auto high-beam on and off. ON
*1
/OFF
Interior light dimming
time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors.
60sec/30sec
*1
/15sec
Headlight auto off
timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on
after you close the driver’s door.
60sec/30sec/15sec
*1
/0sec
Auto light sensitivity
*
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid
*1
/Low/Min
Auto headlight ON
with wiper ON
Changes the settings for the wiper operation when the
headlights automatically come on while the headlight
switch is in the AUTO position.
ON
*1
/OFF
* Not available on all models
133
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Door setup
Auto door lock
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically
lock.
With vehicle speed
*1
/
Shift from P/OFF
Auto door unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically
unlock.
All doors when driver’s
door opens
*1
/All doors
when shifted to Park/
All doors when ignition
switched OFF/OFF
Walk away auto lock
*
Changes the settings for automatically locking the doors
when you walk away from the vehicle while carrying the
keyless remote.
ON/OFF
*1
Keyless lock answer
back
LOCK/UNLOCK - The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push) - The beeper sounds.
ON
*1
/OFF
Keyless remote power
window control
Turns remote window control using the keyless remote
on and off.
ON
*1
/OFF
Lockout prevention
*
Changes the settings for the lockout protection
function.
ON
*1
/OFF
Lock presetting Changes the settings for the lock presetting function. ON
*1
/OFF
* Not available on all models
134
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Climate
control setup
*
Driver seat automatic
climate control
Turns the driver’s seat automatic climate control on and
off.
ON
*1
/OFF
Passenger seat
automatic climate
control
Turns the passenger’s seat automatic climate control on
and off.
ON
*1
/OFF
Maintenance
reset
—
Resets the Maintenance Minder
TM
display when you
have performed the maintenance service.
(Selects Reset Items)
Default all —
Cancels customized changes you have made or restores
them to their default setting.
Cancel/Set
* Not available on all models
135
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Continued
Instrument Panel
■
Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “Trip A” reset timing setting to When fully refueled
are shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” reset timing is Manually reset.
1. Press the (home) button and roll the left
selector wheel to select screen, then
press the left selector wheel.
136
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
2. Roll the left selector wheel until Meter
setup appears on the display.
3. Press the left selector wheel.
4. Roll the left selector wheel until “Trip A”
reset timing appears on the display, then
press the left selector wheel.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select When fully refueled, IGN
OFF, Manually reset, or Back.
5. Roll the left selector wheel and select
When fully refueled, then press the left
selector wheel.
u The display will return to the
customization menu screen.
137
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (A-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
6. Press the left selector wheel after Back
appears on the display.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the
normal screen.
138
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Left Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Interface Left Side Area
(B-type Meter)
Shows the current mode for audio and phone information, etc.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 241
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 394
Shows the clock.
■
Clock
1Clock
You can adjust the time manually and change the
clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour
clock.
2 Clock P. 160
You can choose whether the clock is displayed on the
driver information interface.
2 Customize Display P. 141
Continued
139
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Left Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
Measures the lap time, and displays the previously measured times and the fastest
lap time.
■
Measuring LAP Time
1. Change the display content on the left side
area to Stopwatch.
2 Select the display content on the left
side area P. 142
2. Press the left selector wheel to display the
stopwatch menu screen.
3. Select Start/Stop and press the left
selector wheel to display the lap time
measurement screen.
4. Press the left selector wheel to start
measurement.
5. Press the left selector wheel to stop
measurement.
u To measure the time per lap, roll the left
selector wheel at the end of each lap.
u To return to the stopwatch menu screen,
press and hold the left selector wheel.
■
Stopwatch
*
1Stopwatch
*
Be sure to use this measurement function only where
and when it is safe to do so.
Lap time is displayed from 00:00.00 to 99:59.99.
A maximum of 20 lap times can be stored at a time.
* Not available on all models
140
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Left Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
■
Checking/Clearing history
To check or clear the history, select History/
Reset on the stopwatch menu screen and
press the left selector wheel.
u To scroll through the lap times, roll the
left selector wheel.
u To clear the history, press the left selector
wheel on the stopwatch history screen
while the lap time is not being measured,
then select and press Reset.
u To return to the stopwatch menu screen,
press and hold the left selector wheel.
Continued
141
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Left Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
■
Arrange audio source on the left side area
You can choose which sources to display on the audio source screen.
1. Roll the left selector wheel until Customize
display is selected, then press the left
selector wheel.
2. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select
Hide/show, then press the left selector
wheel.
3. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll
between audio sources, then press the left
selector wheel to check or uncheck them.
■
Customize Display
1Customize Display
When you customize settings, set the parking brake.
142
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Left Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
■
Select the display content on the left side area
You can change the display content on the left side area. Select Audio & clock,
Stopwatch, or OFF.
1. Roll the left selector wheel until Customize
display is selected, then press the left
selector wheel.
2. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select
Display content, then press the left
selector wheel.
3. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select
your desired content, then press the left
selector wheel.
143
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
Continued
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Interface Right Side Area
(B-type Meter)
The driver information interface shows information such as the estimated travelable
distance and fuel economy of the vehicle. It also displays messages such as warnings
and other helpful information.
When a warning message displays, please check the message and contact a dealer
to have the vehicle inspected if necessary. Please refer to the pages below if the
Engine oil pressure low or Engine temperature too hot message is displayed.
2 If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears P. 689
2 Overheating P. 687
Roll the right selector wheel to view different types of content.
■
Switching the Display
1Switching the Display
You can add or delete the meter contents.
2 Customize Display P. 157
144
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
Right Selector Wheel
Warning Messages
P. 156
Range/Fuel/
Trip Meter
P. 145
No Content/
Unit Change
P. 156
Driver Attention
Monitor
P. 149
Navigation
P. 148
Speed/Time/
Trip Meter
P. 147
Customize Display
P. 157
Maintenance
P. 154
Safety Support
P. 155
Seat Belts
P. 154
G-Meter
P. 153
Accelerator
Position/Braking
Pressure Meter
P. 152
Turbo Gauge
P. 152
145
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
Continued
Instrument Panel
Press the right selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.
■
Range/Fuel/Trip Meter
Trip Meter A
Range
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel
Economy
Trip Meter B
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
146
Instrument Panel
■
Trip meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Resetting a trip meter
To reset the trip meter, display it, press and hold the right selector wheel, and then
select Reset.
u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.
■
Average fuel economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km.
The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel
economy is also reset.
■
Instant fuel economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.
■
Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated
distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.
1Average fuel economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Customized Features P. 354
1Range
The driving range displayed is only an estimate and
may differ from the actual distance the vehicle can
travel.
147
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
Continued
Instrument Panel
Press the right selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.
■
Speed/Time/Trip Meter
Trip Meter A
Elapsed Time
Trip Meter B
Average Speed
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
148
Instrument Panel
■
Trip meter
2 Trip meter P. 146
■
Elapsed time
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
■
Average speed
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
■
Compass
Shows the compass screen.
■
Turn-by-Turn Directions
When driving guidance is provided by Google Maps, Apple CarPlay, or Android
Auto, turn-by-turn directions to your destination appear.
2 Apple CarPlay P. 259
2 Android Auto
TM
P. 263
2 Google built-in P. 318
■
Navigation
1Elapsed time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2 Customized Features P. 354
1Average speed
You can change when to reset the average speed.
2 Customized Features P. 354
1Navigation
You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn
display come on or not during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 354
Turn-by-turn directions may not be available for all
apps.
Continued
149
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is
being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it
determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the
degree of the driver’s attention on the driver information interface.
When you select Driver Attention Monitor on
the driver information interface, bars on it
light up in white to indicate the degree of the
driver’s attention.
2 Switching the Display P. 143
■
Driver Attention Monitor
1Driver Attention Monitor
The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if
the driver is tired or inattentive.
Regardless of the system’s feedback, if you are
feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as
long as needed.
Right Selector
Wheel
Driver Information Interface
Level
150
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
If two bars light up, the Driver attention
level low message will appear.
If one bar lights up, the Driver attention
level low. Time for a break. message will
appear, a beep will sound, and the steering
wheel will vibrate.
If this message appears, stop in a safe location
and rest for as long as needed.
The message will disappear when the right
selector wheel is rolled or when the system
has determined that the driver is driving
normally.
If the driver does not take a break and the
monitor continues to detect that the driver is
very tired, the message will appear again after
approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a
beep and steering wheel vibrations.
The message does not appear when the
traveling time is 30 minutes or less.
Continued
151
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
■
The Driver Attention Monitor resets when:
• The engine is turned off.
• The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.
■
For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
• The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.
■
Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention
Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:
• The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 541
• The condition of the road is poor; e.g., the surface is unpaved or bumpy.
• It is windy.
• The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner, such as
changing lanes or accelerating.
■
Customizing
You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile And Audible
Alert, Tactile Alert, or OFF.
2 Customized Features P. 354
1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
The bars on the driver information interface remain
grayed-out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is
functioning.
152
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
When the turbo is producing boost, this gauge indicates a rise in boost pressure.
■
Accelerator Position Meter
Displays the accelerator position in degrees of
%.
■
Braking Pressure Meter
Displays the brake pressure in psi when the
brake is applied.
■
Turbo Gauge
■
Accelerator Position/Braking Pressure Meter
Accelerator Position Meter
Braking Pressure Meter
153
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
Continued
Instrument Panel
Displays the strength (G) and direction of the load that is applied to the vehicle
during driving.
■
G-Meter
Lateral forces of the
past three seconds
(white)
When steering to
the right
When accelerated while moving forward
When decelerated while reversing
When decelerated while moving forward
When accelerated while reversing
When steering to
the left
Real-time lateral
force (red)
154
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
Occurs, under specified conditions, when seat belts are latched or unlatched.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 46
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance Minder
TM
.
2 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 605
■
Seat Belts
■
Maintenance
Continued
155
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
Indicates the status of the Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBS
TM
, Low Speed
Braking Control
*
, blind spot information system
*
, and parking sensor system
*
, such
as On, Off, or Failure, by color and letters.
The following colors indicate the status of any of the above-mentioned systems:
• Green: The system is on.
• Gray: The system is off.
• Amber: There is a problem with the system.
■
Safety Support
1Safety Support
If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
To turn each system on or off, first press the right
selector wheel to switch displays. From the next
display, you can select which system to turn on or off.
2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 492
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 474
2 Blind Spot Information System
*
P. 467
2 Low Speed Braking Control
*
P. 487
2 Parking Sensor System
*
P. 585
You can also confirm the status of each function by
the color of the safety support indicator.
2 Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 107
2 Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)
P. 109
Even when the Low Speed Braking Control icon is
green, if the Rear Sensor Setting is turned off, the
brake assist will not operate when reversing.
2 Customized Features P. 354
Even when the parking sensor system icon is green, if
the Rear Sensor Setting is turned off, the rear
parking sensor will not operate when reversing.
2 Customized Features P. 354
Models with Low Speed Braking Control
Models with parking sensor system
Area Info for Road Departure
Mitigation System
Area Info for Blind Spot
Information System
*
Blind Spot
Information System
Icon and Status
Info
*
Road Departure
Mitigation System
Icon and Status Info
Area Info for
the Low Speed
Braking
Control
*
and
Parking Sensor
System
*
Low Speed Braking
Control Icon and
Status Info
*
CMBS
TM
Icon and
Status Info
Area Info for
CMBS
TM
Parking Sensor
System Icon and
Status Info
*
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
156
Instrument Panel
You can check if there are any active warning messages.
Enables you to show another unit on the driver information interface and audio/
information screen and set the displayed measurements to read in either miles and
mph or km and km/h.
Press and hold the right selector wheel when you select the Blank/Unit change
screen on the driver information interface. Each time you do this, the unit will
change from miles and mph to km and km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation
screen will appear for a few seconds.
■
Warnings
■
Speed/Distance Units
1Warnings
If there are multiple warnings, you can roll the right
selector wheel to see other warnings.
Continued
157
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
Instrument Panel
■
Arrange content on the right side area
You can choose which contents to display on the right side area.
1. Press the right selector wheel when you
select the Customize display on the driver
information interface.
2. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to
select Hide/show, then press the right
selector wheel.
3. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll
between contents, then press the right
selector wheel to check or uncheck them.
■
Customize Display
1Arrange content on the right side area
Contents that are gray cannot be removed from the
right side area.
When you customize settings, set the parking brake.
uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface Right Side Area (B-type Meter)
158
Instrument Panel
■
Change gauge design
You can change the gauge design.
1. Press the right selector wheel when you
select the Customize display on the driver
information interface.
2. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to
select Gauge design, then press the right
selector wheel.
3. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to
select your desired settings, then press the
right selector wheel.
1Change gauge design
When using the Round minimal or Bar minimal
gauge design, a simplified display is used when ACC
is in operation.
159
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................. 160
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key .................................................. 162
Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength .... 164
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 165
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 174
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 176
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 177
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 178
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 181
Security System Alarm...................... 181
Windows ........................................... 184
Moonroof
*
........................................ 187
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 188
Turn Signals..................................... 191
Lights............................................... 192
Auto High-Beam .............................. 196
Wipers and Washers ........................ 199
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button ........................................... 201
Brightness Control ........................... 202
Models with A-type meter
Brightness Control ........................... 203
Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 204
Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 205
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 206
Seats .................................................. 207
Interior Convenience Items.............. 215
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 231
Automatic Climate Control Sensors......236
Models with B-type meter
* Not available on all models
160
Controls
Clock
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the power mode in ON.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Clock Settings.
3. Select Automatic Time, then select OFF.
4. Select Set Time.
5. Select 12H/24H to change 12 or 24 hour
clock.
6. Select or .
7. Select Set to set the time.
■
Adjusting the Time
1Adjusting the Clock
The clock is automatically updated through the audio
system.
You can also select and enter with the LIST / SELECT
(List / Selector) knob instead of the touch panel.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
MENU Button
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
3
4
161
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock
Controls
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select Date & Time.
5. Select Set Date & Time.
6. Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select Off.
To adjust date:
7. Select Set Date.
8. Select or .
9. Press the button to set the date.
To adjust time:
7. Select Set Time.
8. Select or .
9. Press the button to set the time.
1Adjusting the Clock
You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock
displayed in the header area of the audio/information
screen, Clock displayed on the home screen, or
All Apps.
1. Touch the clock on the screen.
The clock screen of the face-type appears.
2. Select Menu.
3. Select Date & Time.
4. Select Set Date & Time.
5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select Off.
6. Select Set Date or Set Time.
7. Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by
selecting or .
8. Press the button to set the time.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 354
You can customize the date display.
2 Customized Features P. 354
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
3
4
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
3
4
3
4
162
Controls
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Use the keys to start and stop the engine, lock
and unlock all the doors and the fuel fill door,
and open the trunk.
1Key
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 181
Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the
keys:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids, dust, and sand.
• Do not take the keys apart except to replace the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
You can remotely start the engine using the remote
engine start.
2 Remote Engine Start
*
P. 420
Models with remote engine starter
Models without remote engine starter
Models with remote engine starter
* Not available on all models
163
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey
Controls
The built-in key can be used to unlock the
doors when the keyless remote battery
becomes weak and the power door unlock
operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, push the release
button and then pull out the key. To reinstall
the built-in key, push the built-in key into the
keyless remote until it clicks.
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
■
Built-in Key
Built-in Key
Release Button
■
Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
164
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Remote Signal Strength
Controls
Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless remote to start the engine;
lock and unlock
*
all the doors and the fuel fill door; and open
*
the trunk.
In the following cases, starting the engine, locking/unlocking
*
the doors/fuel fill
door, or opening
*
the trunk may be inhibited, or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the keyless remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless remote.
1Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength
Communication between the keyless remote and the
vehicle consumes the keyless remote's battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the keyless
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.
* Not available on all models
165
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Continued
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
When you carry the keyless remote, you can
lock/unlock the doors and fuel fill door, and
open the trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors and fuel fill door
within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) from
the outside door handle. You can open the
trunk within about 32 inches (80 cm) radius
from the trunk release button.
■
Locking the doors and trunk
Touch the door lock sensor on the front door.
u All the doors and trunk lock and the
security system sets.
u Some exterior lights flash once and the
beeper sounds once.
■
Using the Keyless Access System
*
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
If the interior light switch is in the door activated position,
the interior light comes on when you unlock the doors.
No doors opened: The light fades out after 30 seconds.
Doors relocked: The light goes off immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 215
1Using the Keyless Access System
*
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the keyless access system,
the doors and trunk will automatically relock.
You can lock or unlock doors using the keyless access
system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
• Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
• Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors while someone else with
the keyless remote is within range.
• The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the keyless remote is within range.
• If you grip a front door handle or touch the front
door lock sensor wearing gloves, the door sensor
may be slow to respond or may not respond by
locking/unlocking the doors.
Door Lock Sensor
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
166
Controls
■
Unlocking the doors and trunk
Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door and fuel fill door
unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
u All the doors and trunk unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the trunk release button:
u The trunk unlocks and opens.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds once.
2 Using the Trunk Release Button
*
P. 179
1Using the Keyless Access System
*
• After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds
during which you can pull the door handle to
confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to
unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait
at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle,
otherwise the door will not unlock.
• The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
• Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the keyless
remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
• The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close
to the door and door glass.
The light flash, beep, and door unlock mode settings
can be customized using the audio/information
screen or driver information interface.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
Please wipe off any residue such as car shampoo,
groundwater, or anti-freeze in the vicinity of the
outside door handle, as there is a risk that the keyless
access system may not work properly.
Trunk Release Button
* Not available on all models
Continued
167
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
■
Locking the doors and trunk (Walk
away auto lock®)
When you walk away from the vehicle with all
doors closed while carrying the keyless
remote, the doors and fuel fill door will
automatically lock.
The auto lock function activates when all
doors are closed, and the keyless remote is
within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the
outside door handle or trunk release button.
Exit the vehicle while carrying keyless remote
and close door(s).
1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of
the vehicle.
u The beeper sounds; the auto lock
function will be activated.
2. Carry the keyless remote beyond about 5
feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain
outside this range for 2 or more seconds.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors and fuel fill door will
then lock.
1Locking the doors and trunk (Walk away auto lock®)
The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory
default setting. The auto lock function can be set to
ON using the audio/information screen or driver
information interface.
If you set the auto lock function to ON using the
audio/information screen or driver information
interface, only the remote transmitter that was used
to unlock the driver’s door prior to the setting change
can activate auto lock.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
After the auto lock function has been activated,
when you stay within the locking/unlocking
operation range, the indicator on the keyless remote
will continue to flash until the doors are locked.
When you stay beside the vehicle within the
operation range, the doors will automatically lock
approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock
function activating beeper sounds.
When you open a door after the auto lock function
activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will
be canceled.
Under the following circumstances, the auto-lock
function will not activate:
• The keyless remote is inside the vehicle.
uThe beeper will not sound.
• The keyless remote is taken out of its operational
range before all the doors are closed.
uThe beeper will sound.
The activation range of
the auto lock function is
about 5 feet (1.5 m)
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
168
Controls
To temporarily deactivate the function:
1. Set the power mode to OFF.
2. Open the driver’s door.
3. Using the master door lock switch, operate
the lock as follows:
Lock Unlock Lock Unlock.
u The beeper sounds, and the function is
deactivated.
To restore the function:
• Set the power mode to ON.
• Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock
function.
• With the keyless remote on you, move out
of the auto lock function operation range.
• Open any door.
1Locking the doors and trunk (Walk away auto lock®)
The auto lock function does not operate when any of
the following conditions are met.
• The keyless remote is inside the vehicle.
• A door or the hood is not closed.
• The power mode is set to any mode other than
OFF.
• The keyless remote is not located within a radius of
about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get
out of the vehicle and close the doors.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper
After the auto lock function has been activated, the
auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for
approximately two seconds in the following cases.
• The keyless remote is put inside the vehicle through
a window.
• You are located too close to the vehicle.
• The keyless remote is put inside the trunk.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are
carrying the keyless remote. Then, open/close a door
and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds
once.
Continued
169
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
The vehicle will automatically lock after you
lock the doors in advance then close the
doors.
Activate lock presetting after closing the
driver’s door.
1. Touch the driver’s door lock sensor
*
or
press the lock button on the remote
transmitter.
u Alert sounds and lock presetting is
activated.
2. Close all the doors.
u Some exterior lights flash and a beeper
sounds when vehicle locks.
Make sure the doors are locked before
moving away from the vehicle.
■
Lock Presetting
1Lock Presetting
Lock presetting will be reset if a door is opened
before the vehicle has locked completely.
Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not
inside the vehicle.
You can turn this function on and off.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
Door Lock Sensor
*
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
170
Controls
■
Locking the doors
Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors
and fuel fill door lock, and the security
system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u Some exterior lights flash, the beeper
sounds, and verifies the security system is
set.
■
Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the
driver’s door and fuel fill door unlock.
Twice:
u The remaining doors unlock.
■
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE
OFF.
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 649
LED
Unlock Button
Lock Button
Continued
171
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
If the unlock button of the keyless remote does not work, use the built-in key
instead. The keyhole is behind the door handle.
Pull and hold the outer handle.
Insert the built-in key into the key cylinder
from below the handle and then turn it.
■
Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn
the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock
the remaining doors.
If the lock button of the keyless remote does not
work, refer to the following.
2 Locking a Door Without Using a Key P. 172
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
172
Controls
If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using
the key, you can lock the door without it.
■
Locking the front door
Push the lock tab forward
a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.
■
Locking the rear doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
and fuel fill door lock at the same time.
Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not
inside the vehicle.
You can change the lockout protection operation
setting.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
Models with keyless access system
173
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
■
Lockout protection function
If the vehicle cannot detect the keyless
remote, lockout protection activates.
u A beeper sounds, some exterior lights
flash, the doors unlock, and a message
appears on the driver information
interface.
u This allows you to open a door in case
the keyless remote is still inside the
vehicle.
If you do not open a door, all doors relock
after 15 seconds.
To avoid non-detection, make sure to keep
the keyless remote away from cell phones and
other devices that may cause signal
interference.
■
Lockout prevention system
The doors and the trunk cannot be locked
when the keyless remote is inside the vehicle.
Models with keyless access system
Models without keyless access system
174
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■
Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■
Unlocking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
■
Using the Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, all of the other doors and fuel fill door
lock at the same time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, only the driver’s door and fuel fill door
will unlock.
To unlock
Lock Tab
To lock
Continued
175
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Pull the front door inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.
To avoid all the doors unlocking, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only.
If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the
Auto Door Unlock
*1
/Auto door unlock
*2
setting to Off
*1
/OFF
*2
using the
driver information interface or audio/information screen.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
*1: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
*2: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
■
Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However, this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 176
Inner Handle
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
176
Controls
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors and fuel fill door.
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■
When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
■
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock either of the front doors using
the master door lock switch, all the other doors and
fuel fill door lock/unlock at the same time.
To unlock
Master Door
Lock Switch
To lock
■
Setting the Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Lock
Unlock
177
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Controls
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.
■
Drive lock mode
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■
Driver’s door open mode
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
■
Auto Door Locking
■
Auto Door Unlocking
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the driver
information interface or audio/information screen.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
178
Controls
Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■
Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
■
Closing the trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 87
Using the Trunk Opener
Press and hold the trunk opener on the
driver’s door to unlock and open the trunk.
2 If You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 703
Models without self opening trunk lid
All models
Trunk Opener
179
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button
*
Controls
Using the Trunk Release Button
*
Push up the release button on the trunk lid
after the doors are unlocked.
2 If You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 703
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the
trunk if you carry the keyless remote.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds once.
Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.
1Using the Trunk Release Button
*
• If you forget the keyless remote inside, the beeper
will sound and the trunk will not close.
• A person who is not carrying the keyless remote
can unlock the trunk if a person who is carrying it is
within range.
• If the beeper sounds after you close the trunk,
move the keyless remote away from the trunk and
close again.
• The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close
to the trunk.
Trunk Release Button
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the driver's door is locked, the trunk will
automatically lock when you close it. Otherwise, you
will have to lock it manually.
Trunk Release Button
* Not available on all models
180
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener
Controls
Emergency Trunk Opener
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.
Lever
181
Continued
Controls
Security System
Immobilizer System
This system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the
engine.
Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
• Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic devices, such as televisions
and audio systems, emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can
become magnetic.
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood, or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not activate if the trunk or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter, or keyless access system
*
.
However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the
transmission is taken out of
(P (continuously variable transmission models) or the
hood is opened before the power mode is in ON.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or
accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the key with you whenever you leave the
vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the
vehicle on the first time after the battery has been
disconnected.
Canadian models
1Security System Alarm
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
The security system alarm continues for a maximum
of two minutes until the security system alarm
deactivates.
* Not available on all models
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
182
Controls
■
When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently, and some exterior lights flash.
■
To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter, or keyless access system
*
, or
power mode is in ON. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is
deactivated.
■
Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
• The hood is closed.
• All doors and trunk are locked from outside with the remote transmitter or
keyless access system
*
.
■
When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking
interval changes after about 15 seconds.
■
To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter or keyless access system
*
, or when the power mode is set to ON. The
security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• Opening the trunk with the trunk opener on the
driver’s door or the emergency trunk opener.
• Opening the hood with the hood release.
• Taking the transmission out of (P.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may sound
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the remote transmitter or
keyless access system
*
.
Continuously variable transmission models
* Not available on all models
183
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■
The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
■
Canceling panic mode
• Press any button on the remote transmitter.
• Set the power mode to ON.
■
Panic Mode
Panic Button
184
Controls
Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON,
using the switches on the doors.
The driver’s side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power
window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off to open and close the
windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat.
When the power window lock button is pressed, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a
child is in the vehicle.
■
Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
■
Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■
Opening/Closing the Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3
WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
Power Window
Lock Button
Indicator
Driver’s
Window
Switch
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch
Continued
185
uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
Press the unlock button, and then within 10
seconds, press it again and hold it.
If the windows stop midway, repeat the
procedure.
■
Opening/Closing the Windows without Auto-Open/Close
Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
While driving with any of the windows open, you
may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type
noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is
a normal occurrence that can be minimized.
If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the
windows open, lower all of the other windows
slightly or open the moonroof
*
.
Close
Open
■
Opening the Windows with the Keyless Remote
1Opening the Windows with the Keyless Remote
If you open the windows with the keyless remote, the
moonroof will open automatically along with them.
You can turn off or on to open the windows with the
keyless remote setting using the driver information
interface or audio/information screen.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
Models with moonroof
Unlock Button
* Not available on all models
uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
186
Controls
Pull and hold the outer handle. Insert the key
into the key cylinder completely from below
the handle.
Unlock the driver’s door with the key. Within
10 seconds of returning the key to the central
position, turn the key in the unlock direction
and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows at the
desired position. If you want further
adjustment, repeat the same operation.
■
Opening the Windows with the Key
1Opening the Windows with the Key
If you open the windows with the key, the moonroof
will open automatically along with them.
Models with moonroof
Open
187
Controls
Moonroof
*
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in
the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■
Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof automatically opens or closes
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
pull or push the switch briefly.
■
Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■
Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly,
then release.
■
Using the Moonroof Switch
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes
after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
You can use the remote transmitter or the key to
operate the moonroof.
2 Opening the Windows with the Keyless
Remote P. 185
2 Opening the Windows with the Key P. 186
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Open
Close
Tilt
Models without SOS button
Open
Close
Tilt
Models with SOS button
* Not available on all models
188
Controls
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button
If you carry the keyless remote and press
ENGINE START/STOP button without
depressing the brake pedal, the power mode
will change in this order: VEHICLE
OFFACCESSORYON
VEHICLE OFF.
VEHICLE OFF:
Vehicle power is turned OFF.
ACCESSORY:
The audio system and some accessories can be
used.
ON:
All accessories can be used.
■
Changing the Power Mode
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
If the keyless remote is set in a storage box or another
place where its signal can be interrupted, the power
mode may not change.
If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE
OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while moving the steering wheel left and
right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the
mode to change.
When the power mode is set to ON, the power mode
will change to ACCESSORY if the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pressed while the transmission is in a
position other than
(P.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
189
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Continued
Controls
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P
(continuously variable transmission) and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the
vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid
draining the battery.
When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock. You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote
transmitter or the keyless access system. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
twice to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is in ACCESSORY, a warning
beep sounds.
■
Automatic Power Off
■
Power Mode Reminder
Manual transmission models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
190
Controls
When the power mode is set to any mode
other than OFF and you remove the keyless
remote from the vehicle and shut the door, an
alarm will sound. If the alarm continues to
sound, place the keyless remote in another
location.
■
When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
The alarm will sound from outside the vehicle.
■
When the power mode is in ON
An alarm will sound both inside and outside
the vehicle. In addition, a warning indicator
will appear on the instrument panel.
■
Keyless Remote Reminder
1Keyless Remote Reminder
When the keyless remote is within the system’s
operational range, and all the doors are closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the keyless remote is taken out of the vehicle after
the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure that the keyless
remote is in your vehicle when you operate the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
Removing the keyless remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the keyless remote on the dashboard or in
the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to
sound. Under some other conditions that can prevent
the vehicle from locating the keyless remote, the
warning buzzer may also sound even if the keyless
remote is within the system’s operational range.
191
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Controls
Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the power
mode is in ON.
■
: Turn signal
Push the lever up or down based on the
direction you want to turn, and the turn signal
will blink.
■
: One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push the lever up or down
and release it, the turn signal will blink 3
times.
u If you lightly push the lever in the
opposite direction while it is blinking, the
blinking will stop.
1Turn Signals
The turn signal indicator on the instrument panel will
blink when the external turn signal blinks.
2 Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
P. 99
192
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights
Controls
Lights
The lights will turn on automatically
depending on the ambient brightness. They
can also be switched on and off manually.
The exterior lights will switch on automatically
when the light switch is set to AUTO while
the power mode is in ON.
■
Manual operation
Headlights/parking lights:
Turn the light switch to .
Parking lights:
Turn the light switch to .
Headlight/parking lights off:
Turn the light switch to OFF and release it while the transmission is in
(P
(continuously variable transmission) or the parking brake is applied.
u The lights will come back on automatically when:
• The light switch is turned to OFF again and released.
• The transmission is changed out of
(P (continuously variable transmission) and
the parking brake is released.
■
Headlights/Parking Lights
1Lights
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 99
1Headlights/Parking Lights
When the parking lights are on, the side marker, tail,
and rear license plate lights will also switch on.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
When the light switch is turned to or and
the power is turned to OFF, a beeper sounds when
the driver’s door is opened.
When the light switch is turned to AUTO and the
ambient light levels are low, the headlights and
parking lights will switch on if you unlock a door.
They will switch off when the door is locked.
If you suspect that the headlights are not positioned
properly, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Continued
193
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights
Controls
When the headlights are on, push the lever forward. Pull the lever back to return to
low beams.
■
Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back to switch on the high
beams.
u Release the lever to return to low beams.
■
High Beams
1Headlights/Parking Lights
The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do
not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise,
the automatic lighting system may not work properly.
Models without automatic intermittent wipers
Light Sensor
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
Light Sensor
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights
194
Controls
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
1Headlights/Parking Lights
You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
Setting
The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is
Max
High
Mid
Low
Min
U.S. models
Bright
Dark
■
Headlight Integration with Wipers
1Headlight Integration with Wipers
This feature activates while the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.
You can turn the headlight integration with wipers
function on and off.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
195
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLights
Controls
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, take the keyless remote with
you, and close the driver’s door.
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF with the headlight switch on, but do not
open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the
AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver’s door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the lights are on.
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The headlight switch is AUTO or .
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when
the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.
■
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
■
Daytime Running Lights
1Automatic Lighting Off Feature
You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
196
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Controls
Auto High-Beam
The front wide view camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as
the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving
at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and
high beam depending on the situation.
■
Activating the system
When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator
comes on and automatically switches between the high beam and low beam,
depending on the situation.
• The power mode is in ON.
• The light switch is in AUTO.
• The lever is in the low beam position.
• The headlights have been automatically
activated.
• It is dark outside the vehicle.
If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have
been met, carry out either of the procedures below and the indicator will come on.
• Pull the lever towards you and release it.
• Turn the light switch to then turn the light switch to AUTO.
■
How to Use the Auto High-Beam
1Auto High-Beam
The auto high-beam system does not always operate
in every situation. This system is just for assisting the
driver. Always observe your surroundings and
manually switch the headlights between high beam
and low beam if necessary.
If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient
for driving, change the headlight beams manually.
The range and the distance at which the camera can
recognize light sources varies depending on
conditions surrounding your vehicle.
Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to
the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
For the auto high-beam to work properly:
• Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard.
• Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
• When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
• Do not attach an object, sticker, or film to the area
around the camera.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of
the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.
Light Switch
Auto High-Beam
Indicator
Continued
197
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Controls
■
Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam
When the auto high-beam indicator comes on, the headlights switch between high
beam and low beam based on the following conditions.
1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
In the following cases, the auto high-beam system
may not switch the headlights properly or the
switching timing may be changed. If the automatic
switching operation does not fit for your driving
habits, please switch the headlights manually.
• The brightness of the lights from a preceding or
oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
• Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
fog, windshield frost, etc.).
• Surrounding light sources like street lights, electric
billboards, and traffic lights are illuminating the
road ahead.
• The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
changes.
• The road is bumpy or has many curves.
• A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a
vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or
oncoming direction.
• Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear.
• A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object
ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle.
• The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under
roadside trees or behind median barriers.
• The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,
bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.
The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low
beam on when:
• Windshield wipers are operating at a high speed.
• The camera has detected a dense fog.
High beam
All of the following conditions must
be met before the high beams turn
on.
●
Your vehicle speed is 23 mph (37
km/h) or more.
●
There are no preceding or
oncoming vehicles with
headlights or taillights turned on.
●
There are few street lights on the
road ahead.
Low beam
One of the following conditions
must be met before the low beams
turn on.
●
Your vehicle speed is 15 mph (24
km/h) or less.
●
There is a preceding or oncoming
vehicle with headlights or
taillights turned on.
●
There are many street lights on
the road ahead.
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
198
Controls
■
Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam
If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam,
follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high-
beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.
Using the lever:
Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it.
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, follow either of the procedures below and
the auto high-beam indicator will come on.
• Pull the lever towards you and release it.
• Turn the light switch to and then to AUTO when the lever is in the low beam
position.
Using the light switch:
Turn the light switch to .
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the
lever is in the low beam position, and the auto high-beam indicator will come
on.
1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
How to turn off the Auto High-Beam System
You can turn the auto high-beam system on and off.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate:
Camera temperature too high message appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed toward the camera.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate:
Clean front windshield or poor viewing
condition. message appears:
• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and make sure the
windshield is clean.
Clean the windshield if it is dirty. If the message
does not disappear after driven for a while, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
199
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Continued
Controls
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the power mode is in ON.
■
MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
■
Wiper switch (OFF, INT
*1
/AUTO
*2
, LO,
HI)
Move the lever up or down to change the
wiper settings.
■
Adjusting wiper operation
*
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
operation.
■
Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever for more than one
second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two
or three more times to clear the windshield,
and then stop.
*1: Models with manual intermittent operation
*2: Models with automatic intermittent operation
■
Windshield Wiper/Washer
1Wipers and Washers
When lifting the wiper arms, move them into the
maintenance position before lifting them.
2 Lifting the Wiper Arms P. 635
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation
temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation
will return to normal within a few minutes.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
NOTICE
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defogger to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such as
the buildup of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then remove the obstacle.
Models with intermittent time adjustment ring
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring
*
MIST
INT
*1
/AUTO
*2
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull to
use
washer.
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Higher speed, more sweeps
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
200
Controls
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the
windshield wipers sweep once, and go into
the automatic mode.
The wipers operate intermittently, at low
speed, or at high speed and stop in
accordance with the amount of rainfall the
rainfall sensor detects.
■
Auto sensitivity adjustment
When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you
can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor
(using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will
operate in accordance with your preference.
Sensor sensitivity
■
Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
1Automatic Intermittent Wipers
*
The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
AUTO should always be turned OFF before the
following situations in order to prevent severe
damage to the wiper system:
• Cleaning the windshield
• Driving through a car wash
• No rain present
Rainfall Sensor
Adjustment Ring
Low sensitivity
High sensitivity
* Not available on all models
201
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
Controls
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror
*
button to defog the rear window
and mirrors
*
when the power mode is in ON.
The rear defogger and heated door mirror
*
automatically switches off after 10-30
minutes depending on the outside
temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, it does not automatically
switch off.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long time while the
engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making
it difficult to start the engine.
When the power mode is set to ON and the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the heated door
mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes.
Models with heated door mirror
* Not available on all models
202
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls
Brightness Control
When the power mode is in ON, you can use
the brightness control dial to adjust
instrument panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the dial up.
Dim: Turn the dial down.
You will hear a beep when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. Several
seconds after adjusting the brightness, you
will be returned to the previous screen.
■
Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the driver
information interface while you are adjusting
it.
Models with A-type meter
1Brightness Control
The brightness of the instrument panel will be
reduced when the following conditions:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The parking lights are turned on and it is dark
outside.
Control Dial
203
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls
Brightness Control
The brightness of the gauge is automatically
adjusted depending on the ambient
brightness.
• The brightness becomes darker when the
ambient light is dark.
• The brightness becomes brighter when the
ambient light is bright.
■
Adjusting the brightness manually
When the power mode is in ON, you can use
the brightness control dial to adjust
instrument panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the dial up.
Dim: Turn the dial down.
u You can change the setting even when
the ambient lighting is bright, but the
brightness of the gauge won't change.
■
Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the driver
information interface while you are adjusting
it.
Models with B-type meter
1Brightness Control
Several seconds after you have adjusted the
brightness, you will be returned to the previous
screen.
Control Dial
204
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Controls
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. While the vehicle is stopped, push the
steering wheel adjustment lever down.
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up
to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3
WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
To adjust
To lock
Lever
205
Controls
Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
When you are driving after dark, the
automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces
the glare from headlights behind you. Press
the AUTO button to turn this function on and
off. When activated, the AUTO indicator
comes on.
■
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions
*
1Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Front Seats P. 207
Tab
Daytime
Position
Night
Position
■
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
*
The auto dimming function cancels when the
transmission is in
(R.
Auto Button
Sensor
* Not available on all models
206
uuMirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Controls
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
power mode is in ON.
■
Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
Selector
Switch
Adjustment
Switch
207
Continued
Controls
Seats
Front Seats
Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
1Seats
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
1Front Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
3
WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Move back.
Allow sufficient
space.
■
Adjusting the Seat Positions
1Adjusting the Seat Positions
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.
Height Adjustment
(Driver’s side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.
Driver’s seat is shown.
uuSeatsuFront Seats
208
Controls
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
■
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
3
WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
209
uuSeatsuRear Seats
Controls
Rear Seats
1. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release
the lock.
2. Fold the seat-back down.
■
Folding Down the Rear Seats
1Folding Down the Rear Seats
The rear seat-back(s
*
) can be folded down to
accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the
trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 87
To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until
it locks.
When returning the seat-back to its original position,
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
belts are positioned in front of the seat-back.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 70
Make sure all items in the trunk or items
extending through the opening into the rear
seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.
Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and
floor before you fold down the rear seat.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they
do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold
down.
Release
Lever
*
Release Lever
* Not available on all models
210
uuSeatsuRear Seat Reminder
Controls
Rear Seat Reminder
This feature alerts you of the possible presence of passengers or items in the rear
seats before you exit the vehicle. It activates when the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF if the rear doors were opened shortly before or after the power mode was set
to ON.
A reminder appears on the driver information
interface and an alert will sound when the
power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
1Rear Seat Reminder
When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF, the
reminder comes on briefly, then the function is
deactivated.
The reminder will not work if the power mode has
not been set to ON within 10 minutes of operating
the rear doors.
The system does not detect passengers in the rear
seats. Instead, it can detect when a rear door is
opened and closed, indicating that there may be
something in the rear seats.
You can turn off the notification setting.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
211
uuSeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
Controls
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints
*1
, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
*1: Continuously variable transmission models
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
212
uuSeatsuHead Restraints
Controls
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rear-
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant’s ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
■
Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions
Continuously variable transmission models
1Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
• Do not place any objects between an occupant and
the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
Position head in the center of the
head restraint.
213
uuSeatsuHead Restraints
Controls
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then, push the release button and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
■
Removing and Reinstalling the Front Head Restraints
Continuously variable transmission models
1Removing and Reinstalling the Front Head Restraints
3
WARNING
Failure to reinstall or correctly reinstall the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
214
uuSeatsuArmrest
Controls
Armrest
The console compartment can be used as an
armrest.
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.
■
Using the Front Seat Armrest
■
Using the Rear Seat Armrest
*
* Not available on all models
215
Continued
Controls
Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■
ON
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■
Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any doors are opened.
• When the driver's door is unlocked.
• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF.
■
OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■
Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and turn off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights turn off after about 30 seconds in the
following situations:
• When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open
it.
• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF but
do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
The interior lights turn off immediately in the
following situations:
• When you lock the driver’s door.
• When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY
mode.
• When you set the power mode to ON.
To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the
interior light on for an extended length of time when
the engine is off.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF
mode, the interior lights turn off after about 15
minutes.
Door Activated
Position
Door Activated
Position
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Front
*
Rear
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
216
Controls
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the switches.
■
Map Light Switches
1Map Light Switches
When the front interior light switch is in the door
activated position and any door is open, the map
light will not turn off when you press the switches.
Models with moonroof
217
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Continued
Controls
Storage Items
Pull the handle to open the glove box.
■
Glove Box
1Glove Box
3
WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
218
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Controls
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.
■
Removable tray
The tray in the console compartment is
detachable. To remove the tray, simply pull it
up.
■
Console Compartment
Continuously variable transmission models
Continued
219
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Controls
■
Front seat beverage holders
Located in the console between the front
seats.
■
Rear seat beverage holders
*
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.
■
Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE
Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
Continuously variable
transmission models
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
220
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Controls
■
Door beverage holders
Located on both of the front and rear door
side pockets.
Front seat
Rear seat
Continued
221
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
Controls
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle.
Pull the strap on the floor lid and open the lid.
■
Coat Hook
1Coat Hook
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.
■
Cargo Floor Box
Models with tire repair kit
Floor Lid
Cargo
Floor Box
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items
222
Controls
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
■
Sunglasses Holder
*
1Sunglasses Holder
*
Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.
Push
* Not available on all models
223
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
Other Interior Convenience Items
The accessory power socket can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or
ON.
■
Console panel
Open the cover to use it.
■
Accessory Power Socket
1Accessory Power Socket
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element. This can overheat the accessory power
socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent battery drain, use the accessory power
socket only when the engine is running.
When the accessory power socket is not in use, close
the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from
getting into the accessory power socket.
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
224
Controls
To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Charge any devices compatible with Qi wireless charging on the area indicated by
the mark as follows:
1. To turn the system on and off, press and
hold the (power) button.
u When the system is activated, the green
indicator light comes on.
2. Place the device you want to charge on the
charging area.
u The system will automatically start
charging the device, and the amber
indicator light will come on.
u Make sure that the device is compatible
with the system and placed with the
chargeable side in the center of the
charging area.
3. When charging is completed, the green
indicator light will come on.
u Depending on the device, the amber
indicator light will stay on.
■
Wireless Charger
*
Canadian models
1Wireless Charger
*
RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with ISED RF Radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment.
This device and its antenna must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
In order to use safely:
• Remove any metal objects from the charge pad
before charging a device.
• Do not open the charger case.
• Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact
your dealer.
If the charger interferes with radio communications,
attempt to correct the interference:
• Press and hold the switch on the charger for a few
seconds to turn off the charger.
appears on the audio/information screen when
the device is being charged by the wireless charger.
Green Indicator
Charging Area
(Power) Button
Amber Indicator
* Not available on all models
Continued
225
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Controls
■
When charging does not start
Perform one of the solutions in the following table.
Indicator Cause Solution
Green
&
Amber
Blinking
simulta-
neously
There is an obstacle(s) between
the charging area and the
device.
Remove the
obstacle(s).
The device is not within the
charging area.
Pick up and reset the
device to the center of
the charging area
where is located.
The temperature of the wireless
charger pad increases.
Temporarily suspend
charging the device.
Wait for the
temperature to drop
and attempt to charge
the device again.
Amber Blinking The wireless charger is faulty.
Contact a dealer for
repairs.
1Wireless Charger
*
This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the
system for a long time when the engine is not
running. This may weaken the battery, making it
difficult to start the engine.
When using the wireless charger, check the user’s
manual that came with the compatible device you
want to charge.
3
CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad and
the device to be charged will get hot and
can burn you.
• Always remove foreign objects from the
charge pad before charging the device.
• Be sure the surface is clear of dust and
other debris before charging.
• Do not spill liquids (e.g., water, drinks,
etc.) on the charger and the device.
• Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine,
or thinner for cleaning the charge pad.
• Do not cover the system with towels,
clothing, or other objects while charging
etc.
• Avoid spraying aerosols which may come
in contact with the charge pad surface.
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
226
Controls
1Wireless Charger
*
The wireless charger can support up to 15 W, but the
charging rate varies based on the device and other
conditions.
NOTICE
Do not place any magnetic recording media or
precision machines within the charging area while
charging.
The data on your cards such as credit cards can be
lost because of the magnetic effect. Also, precision
machines such as watches can be affected.
“Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks
owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).
In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:
• The device is already fully charged.
• The temperature of the device is extremely high
while charging.
• You are at a place that emits strong
electromagnetic waves or noises, such as a TV
station, electric power plant, or gas station.
• The device has a cover, case, or accessories which
are not compatible with wireless charging.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its
chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the
charging area.
Not all devices are compatible with the system.
* Not available on all models
Continued
227
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Controls
1Wireless Charger
*
During the charging phase, it is normal for the
charging area and device to heat up.
Charging may be briefly interrupted when:
• All the doors and the trunk are closed
- to avoid interference with the proper functioning
of the keyless access system.
• The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a
charging area.
If the device becomes too hot and its battery
protection function activates, it may charge
extremely slowly or no longer charge.
The temperature at which the battery protection
function activates depends on the device.
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
228
Controls
The heated steering wheel can be used when
the power mode is in ON.
Press the button on the lower side of the
steering wheel.
When a comfortable temperature is reached,
press the button again to turn it off.
The heated steering wheel is turned off every
time you start the engine, even if you turned it
on the last time you drove the vehicle.
■
Heated Steering Wheel
*
Canadian models
1Heated Steering Wheel
*
Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously
when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the
battery may be weakened, making the engine
difficult to start.
* Not available on all models
Continued
229
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
Controls
The seat heaters can be used when the power
mode is in ON.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When the power mode is turned on after it is
turned off, the previous setting is maintained.
Press the AUTO button:
Both the air conditioner and seat temperature
will automatically change to the setting most
suitable to the ambient environment.
u When any seat heater button is pressed,
settings will switch to manual mode.
■
Front Seat Heaters
*
1Front Seat Heaters
*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for
the front seat heaters will automatically be reduced
by one level at a time until the front seat heaters shut
off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior
environment.
As time passes, the set temperature will fall, and
eventually the seat heater will shut off.
The seat heater may turn on if sensors detect weight
on the passenger seat due to luggage, etc.
To prevent automatic activation, you can turn off
automatic climate control for the front seat.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
AUTO Button
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items
230
Controls
The seat heaters can be used when the power
mode is in ON.
There is no heater in the rear center seating
position.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
The sun visor can be extended horizontally.
■
Rear Seat Heaters
*
Canadian models
1Rear Seat Heaters
*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for
the rear seat heaters will automatically be reduced by
one level at a time until the rear seat heaters shut off.
The elapsed time varies according to the interior
environment.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
■
Sun Visor
* Not available on all models
231
Continued
Controls
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side
temperature control dial.
3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The auto button indicator
*
/AUTO indicator
*
will go
off, but functions unrelated to the button that were
pressed will be controlled automatically.
During idle-stops, air-conditioning is suspended, and
only the blower remains active. If you do not want
air-conditioning suspended, press the Auto Idle Stop
OFF button to cancel idle-stop.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
For directions on the proper handling of the front
seat heaters
*
, refer to the following page.
2 Front Seat Heaters
*
P. 229
Models with SYNC button
Dashboard
vents
Dashboard
and floor
vents
Floor vents Floor and
defroster
vents
AUTO Button
SYNC Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
(Recirculation) Button
(ON/OFF) Button
Fan Control Dial
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Dial
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Dial
* Not available on all models
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
232
Controls
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.
■
Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
Pressing the button switches the climate control
system between on and off. When turned on, the
system returns to your last selection.
While ECON mode is active, the climate control
system may have reduced cooling performance.
Continuously variable transmission models
Models without SYNC button
AUTO Button
Temperature
Control Dial
(Recirculation) Button
(ON/OFF) Button
Fan Control Dial
Dashboard
vents
Dashboard
and floor
vents
Floor vents Floor and
defroster
vents
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Continued
233
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls
Pressing the (windshield defroster) button
turns the air conditioning system on and
automatically switches the system to fresh air
mode.
Press the button again to turn off, and the
system returns to the previous settings.
■
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If you press the button during Auto Idle Stop, the
engine restarts automatically.
Models with SYNC button
Models without SYNC button
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
234
Controls
■
To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the button.
2. Press the button.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.
Models with SYNC button
Models without SYNC button
235
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver’s side and the passenger’s
side in synchronization mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system switches to synchronization mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button or adjust the interior temperature using the passenger’s side
temperature control dial to return to dual mode.
■
Synchronization Mode
*
1Synchronization Mode
*
When the system is in dual mode, the driver’s side
temperature and the passenger’s side temperature
can be set separately.
When you press the button, the system changes
to synchronization mode.
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Dial
Passenger’s
Side
Temperature
Control Dial
SYNC Button
* Not available on all models
236
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Controls
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Sensor
Sensor
237
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System.................................... 238
7-in. Color Touchscreen.................... 245
9-in. Color Touchscreen.................... 267
Audio Error Messages ...................... 328
General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 330
Customized Features................ 349, 354
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 375, 394
238
Features
Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio. It can also play USB flash drives, iPod,
iPhone, and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the
remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface.
*1: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
*2: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
1About Your Audio System
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
Remote Controls
Device
USB Flash
Drive
*1
*2
239
uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports
Features
USB Ports
■
USB charging/connector port ( )
The USB port (3.0A) is for charging devices,
playing audio files, and connecting
compatible phones with Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto.
u To prevent any potential issues, be sure
to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning
Connector for Apple CarPlay. For
Android Auto, the USB cables should be
certified by USB-IF to be compliant with
USB 2.0 Standard.
■
USB charging port ( )
The USB port (3.0A) is only for charging
devices.
u You cannot play music even if you have
connected music players to it.
1USB Ports
• Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
• We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are
attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.
• Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
• Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
• We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
• Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
The USB port can supply up to 3.0A of power. It does
not output 3.0A unless requested by the device.
For amperage details, read the operating manual of
the device that needs to be charged.
Under certain conditions, a device connected to the
port may generate noise to the radio station you are
listening to.
USB charge
On the front panel
On the back of the console
compartment
*
* Not available on all models
240
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
Features
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
■
Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob for more than two
seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
241
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Continued
Features
Audio Remote Controls
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on
the driver information interface.
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FMAMUSB/iPod/Apple CarPlay/
Android AutoBluetooth
VOL
(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch
Press Up: To increase the volume.
Press Down: To decrease the volume.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to a wired connection, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or
Smartphone Connection
u Depending on a connected device, operations may be changed.
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a USB flash drive or Bluetooth® Audio
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder/group.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder/group.
1Audio Remote Controls
Some modes appear only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be available.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
SOURCE
Button
VOL(+/VOL(-
(Volume) Switch
242
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on
the driver information interface.
VOL
(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch
Press Up: To increase the volume.
Press Down: To decrease the volume.
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Left Selector
Wheel
VOL(+/VOL(-
(Volume) Switch
243
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Continued
Features
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to a wired connection, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or
Smartphone Connection
u Depending on a connected device, operations may be changed.
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
244
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Left Selector Wheel
Roll up or down:
To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector
wheel:
Back/Phone/FM/AM/USB/Bluetooth/Apple CarPlay/Android Auto/Alexa/Customize
display
u Depending on a connected device, the displayed modes may be changed.
245
Features
7-in. Color Touchscreen
To use the audio system, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the selector knob or MENU button to
access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
MENU button: Press to display the menu
screen.
(Back) button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
17-in. Color Touchscreen
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Menu Items
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 160
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 246
2 Display Setup P. 247
2 Customized Features P. 349
Press the buttons on the steering wheel to change
any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 241
Touchscreen operation
• Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
• Some items may be grayed-out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction.
• You can select them when the vehicle is stopped.
• Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.
2 Customized Features P. 349
(Back)
Button
Selector Knob
MENU Button
Menu Display
246
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Select an audio source.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Select Sound Settings.
Select an item from the following choices:
• Bass / Treble: Bass, Midrange, Treble
• Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader
• Speed Volume Compensation: Sets the amount of volume increase.
1Adjusting the Sound
The Speed Volume Compensation (SVC) adjusts the
volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go
faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down,
audio volume decreases.
247
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuDisplay Setup
Features
Display Setup
You can set the screen brightness separately for Day and Night modes.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Display Adjustment.
3. Select Day or Night.
4. Select the setting you want.
■
Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
You can adjust the settings by sliding or tapping on
the bar.
248
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
RADIO Button
Press to select a band.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Seek Buttons
Press or to search the
selected band up or down for a
station with a strong signal.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio
frequency.
Press, and then turn to select an
item. After that, press again to
make your selection.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency
for
preset memory.
Select and hold the preset icon to store that station.
Select to display beyond preset 5.
>
249
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■
To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the station.
■
Update List
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Refresh.
■
Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Select Text.
■
Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Select Scan.
To turn off scan, select Stop or press the button.
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
You can store 12 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the audio source selecting button on the
steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 241
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the station name is
displayed under the frequency. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the station
name disappears.
250
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via Wired Connection
Features
Music Playback via Wired Connection
Using your USB connector, connect the device to the USB port, then press the
MEDIA button.
2 USB Ports P. 239
USB Indicator
Appears when a device is connected.
MEDIA Button
Press to select the device (if connected).
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Track Buttons
Press or to change
songs. Press and hold to move
rapidly within a song.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Albu
m Art
Shuffle Icon
Select
to play all files in the current category in
random order.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to play/pause a song.
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat the current file.
251
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via Wired Connection
Features
1. Press to display the device music list.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists, Albums, etc.).
3. Continue making selections until you find the song of your choice.
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.
■
Shuffle/Repeat
Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your
preference.
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle
Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list in random order.
Repeat
Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.
Repeat all: Repeats all songs.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.
■
How to Select a Song from the Device Music List
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1Music Playback via Wired Connection
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
252
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via USB Flash Drive
Features
Music Playback via USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.
2 USB Ports P. 239
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.
MEDIA Button
Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Track Buttons
Press or to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selector Knob
Turn to change files.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Play Icon
Select to play a
file.
Random Icons
Select to play all files in the current category
in random order.
Pause Icon
Select to pause a file.
Repeat Icons
Select to repeat the current file.
253
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via USB Flash Drive
Features
1. Press to display a folder list.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists, Albums, etc.).
3. Continue making selections until you find the song of your choice.
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a song.
■
Random/Repeat
Select random or repeat icon.
Play Mode Menu Items
Random
Random All Tracks: Plays all songs in random order.
Random in Folder: Plays all songs in the current folder in random order.
Repeat
Repeat track: Repeats the current song.
Repeat folder: Repeats all songs in the current folder.
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1Music Playback via USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 330
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next song.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 328
254
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit https://mygarage.honda.com/s/honda-
handsfreelink-compatibility-check, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
• Canada: Call 1-855-490-7351.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there is more than one paired phone in the
vehicle, the system automatically connects to the
prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone
in the Bluetooth Settings menu.
2 HFL Menus P. 378
To change the searched phone manually, select Go
to Device List.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is
unavailable. However, a second previously paired
phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting
Audio from the Bluetooth® device list.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
MEDIA Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.
VOL/ AUDIO
(Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.
MENU Button
Press to display the
menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when
your phone
is connected to HFL.
Track Buttons
Press or to
change files.
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat
the current file.
Shuffle Icon
Select to play all
files in the current
category in
random order.
Selector Knob
Turn to change files.
Press and turn to
select an item, then
press to set your
selection.
(Back)
Button
Press to go back
to t
h
e previous
display.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to play/pause a file.
Continued
255
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.
2. Press the MEDIA button until the Bluetooth® Audio Source is selected.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not
compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.
■
To pause or resume a file
Select the play/pause icon.
1. Press to display the music search list.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
3. Select an item.
u Select an item repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen to is displayed.
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone manufacturer's
operating instructions.
If any audio device is connected to the USB port, you
may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to
select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
Check the volume setting of your phone if the audio
volume is too loud or soft.
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the categories may not be displayed.
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
256
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.
■
Shuffle/Repeat
Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your
preference.
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle
Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list in random order.
Repeat
Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.
Repeat all: Repeats all songs.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the functions may not be displayed.
257
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuSiri Eyes Free
Features
Siri Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your
iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
■
Using Siri Eyes Free
1Siri Eyes Free
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri
Eyes Free mode while operating a vehicle.
1Using Siri Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
(Talk) Button
Press until the display changes as shown.
Press and hold to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.
While in Siri Eyes Free:
The display remains the same.
No feedback or commands
appear.
Appears
when Siri is
activated in
Siri Eyes Free
258
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuSmartphone Voice Recognition
Features
Smartphone Voice Recognition
You can use Smartphone Voice Recognition using the (Talk) button on the
steering wheel when your Android phone is paired to the Bluetooth®
HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
■
Using Smartphone Voice Recognition
1Using Smartphone Voice Recognition
Depending on your Android phone, you may need to
operate your phone.
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
(Talk) Button
Press to activate Smartphone Voice Recognition.
Press and hold to deactivate Smartphone Voice
Recognition.
While in Smartphone Voice
Recognition:
The display remains the same.
No feedback or commands
appear.
Appears
when
Smartphone
Voice
Recognition
is activated
259
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay
Continued
Features
Apple CarPlay
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the front USB,
and the CONNECT button is pressed, you can use Apple CarPlay on the audio/
information screen.
2 USB Ports P. 239
For details on available applications, please refer to the Apple CarPlay homepage.
Apps displayed on your screen can be changed with your iPhone.
Select the Honda icon on the Apple CarPlay menu screen to go back to the home
screen.
■
Apple CarPlay Menu
1Apple CarPlay
Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later
are compatible with Apple CarPlay.
We recommend using the latest OS.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to
Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible
apps.
While connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible
to use the Bluetooth® Audio or HandsFreeLink®. Calls
or music playback are only made through Apple
CarPlay. If you want to make a call with the
HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlay OFF. Other
previously paired phones can use the Bluetooth®
Audio.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the
same time.
For details on countries and regions where Apple
CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining
to function, refer to the Apple homepage.
Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of
certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle
location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to
enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need
to consent to the sharing of this information on the
audio/information screen.
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay
260
Features
1Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an
active cellular connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Apple
CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use third-party apps if they are
compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple
homepage for information on compatible apps.
Continued
261
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay
Features
1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable.
2 USB Ports P. 239
u The confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Select Yes.
u If you do not want to connect Apple CarPlay, select No.
You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Settings menu.
■
Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable
1Apple CarPlay
Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely
parked.
When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you
will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the
instruction manual that came with your iPhone.
You can use the following procedure to disconnect or
delete the devices connecting Apple CarPlay:
Press the MENU button
Select Smartphone SettingsApple CarPlay
Select device
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is
governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and
Apple’s Privacy Policy.
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay
262
Features
Press the (talk) button to activate Siri.
Press again to deactivate Siri.
■
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Below are examples of questions and commands for
Siri.
• What movies are playing today?
• Call dad at work.
• What song is this?
• How’s the weather tomorrow?
• Read my latest email.
• Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit
www.apple.com/ios/siri.
263
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto
TM
Continued
Features
Android Auto
TM
When you connect an Android
TM
phone to the audio system via the USB port, and
the CONNECT button is pressed, you can use Android Auto on the audio/
information screen.
We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using
Android Auto.
2 USB Ports P. 239
1Android Auto
TM
We recommend that you update Android OS to the
latest version when using Android Auto.
Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is
connected to Android Auto.
To use Android Auto on a smartphone with Android
9.0 (Pie) or earlier, you need to download the
Android Auto app from Google Play to your
smartphone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android
phone to Android Auto and when launching any
compatible apps.
When your Android phone is connected to Android
Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.
However, other previously paired phones can stream
audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is
connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the
same time.
Android and Android Auto are trademarks of Google
LLC.
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto
TM
264
Features
For details on available applications, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Apps displayed on your screen can be changed with your smartphone.
Select the Honda icon on the Android Auto menu screen to go back to the home
screen.
■
Android Auto Menu
1Android Auto
TM
For details on countries and regions where Android
Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to
function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Screens may differ depending on the version of the
Android Auto app you are using.
Android Auto Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone
with an active mobile connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Android
Auto functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Android Auto functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Android Auto performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use third-party apps if they are
compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android
Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.
Continued
265
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port using the USB cable.
2 USB Ports P. 239
u The confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Select Yes.
u If you do not want to connect Android Auto, select No.
You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Settings menu.
■
Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable
1Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable
Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely
parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone,
you will need to set up your phone so that auto
pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual
that came with your phone.
You can use the following procedure to disconnect or
delete the devices connecting Android Auto after you
have completed the initial setup:
Press the MENU button
Select Smartphone Settings Android Auto
Select device
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is
governed by Google’s Privacy Policy.
uu7-in. Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto
TM
266
Features
Press the (talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.
Press again to deactivate voice recognition.
■
Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with
voice recognition:
• Reply to text.
• Call my wife.
• Navigate to Honda.
• Play my music.
• Send a text message to my wife.
• Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android
Auto homepage.
267
Features
9-in. Color Touchscreen
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
(Home) button: Press to go to the home
screen.
2 Audio/Information Screen P. 271
(Back) button: Press to go back to the
previous screen.
/ (Seek/Track) buttons: Press to
change songs.
(Home) Button
(Back) Button
/ (Seek/Track) Buttons
268
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuStart Up
Features
Start Up
The 9 inch Color Touchscreen starts automatically when you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or ON. At start-up, the following screen about the data upload will be
displayed. When adding a new user, entry of user information is required at start-up.
Select OK.
u If you want to change the settings for
data upload, select Data Sharing with
Honda, then select the ON/OFF settings
on the Data Sharing with Honda
screen.
u If you do not select OK, the system will
automatically be switched to the home
screen, or the top screen of the last
executed application, after a certain
period of time.
u If there is no registered device, select OK
and the Bluetooth® pairing screen will be
displayed.
u If you check the box with Do not show
this again, this screen will not be
displayed.
1Start Up
Data Sharing with Honda
ON: Data communication available.
OFF: Data communication unavailable.
269
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuStart Up
Features
■
Registering new user information
1. Read the disclaimer screen and select OK.
2. Select Set up profile.
u If you want to change the language,
select English (United States).
3. Name your profile and select Next.
4. You can view the terms and conditions of
the Google Services agreement.
5. On the System-wide permission Settings
screen, select the data you give permission
for the system to access, and select Accept.
6. Select Done for now.
u By selecting Profile lock, you can set
security settings for your profile.
u By selecting Set up Google Assistant
and apps, you can customize settings
related to Google.
An internet connection is required to
change settings.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 304
1Registering new user information
Refer to the Google Homepage for more information
on set up profile.
Additional information for Google Apps and Services
is available at mygarage.honda.com (US) or honda.ca
(Canada).
Specifications may be changed via system updates,
etc.
270
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuReboot Audio
Features
Reboot Audio
You can reboot the audio system.
1. Press and hold the button for a certain period of time.
2. Select Reboot.
u If Safe Mode is selected, the audio system will be rebooted with third-party
applications turned off.
After the power mode has been turned off once, third-party applications can
be used again.
271
uu9-in. Color Touchscreen uAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various
setup options.
Press the button to go to the home screen.
Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting All Apps.
1Audio/Information Screen
Touchscreen Operation
• Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping,
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
• Some items may be grayed-out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction.
• You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or
use voice commands.
• Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.
2 Customized Features P. 354
Mode Change Switch Bar
You can also select any application from the Mode
Change Switch bar. Shortcuts can be edited to open
other applications; however, Google Assistant or
Alexa cannot be edited.
2 To shortcut icons on the home screen
P. 277
You can change Google Assistant to Alexa.
2 Customized Features P. 354
• Phone
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 394
All Apps
Mode Change Switch Bar
Status Bar
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAudio/Information Screen
272
Features
■
Trip Computer
Displays the trip computer information.
• Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
• Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives.
The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B.
To reset the Trip A/B, select Menu, then select Delete Trip History.
To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Menu, then select “Trip A”
Reset Timing or “Trip B” Reset Timing.
■
Compass
Displays the compass screen.
1Audio/Information Screen
• Clock
2 Customized Features P. 354
• System Updates
2 System Updates P. 279
• FM/AM/USB/Bluetooth Audio
2 Playing AM/FM Radio P. 285
2 Music Playback via Wired Connection
P. 289
2 Music Playback via USB Flash Drive
P. 292
2 Playing Bluetooth® Audio P. 295
• Profile Settings
2 User Information P. 322
• Vehicle Settings
2 Customized Features P. 354
• General Settings
2 Customized Features P. 354
• Google Assistant / Google Maps / Google Play
2 Google built-in P. 318
• HondaLink
2 HondaLink® P. 298
• Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
2 Apple CarPlay P. 308
2 Android Auto
TM
P. 313
• Wi-Fi Hotspot
2 AT&T Hotspot P. 306
• Alexa
2 Alexa Built-In P. 284
Continued
273
uu9-in. Color Touchscreen uAudio/Information Screen
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■
Import wallpaper
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Ports P. 239
2. Select Clock.
3. Select Menu.
4. Select Clock Faces.
5. Select Add More.
6. Import a desired picture.
u Multiple pictures can be imported at the same time.
7. Select Select Files.
8. Select Add Files.
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.
■
Select wallpaper
1. Select Clock.
2. Select Menu.
3. Select Clock Faces.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
5. Select Save.
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.
■
Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be
displayed on the driver information interface.
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a
folder cannot be imported.
• The file name must be fewer than 64 bytes.
• The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
• Up to 21 pictures can be imported.
• The maximum image size is 4,096 × 2,304 pixels. If
the image size is less, the image is displayed in the
middle of the screen with the extra area appearing
in black.
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAudio/Information Screen
274
Features
■
Delete wallpaper
1. Select Clock.
2. Select Menu.
3. Select Clock Faces.
4. Select Delete Files.
5. Select Select Files to Delete.
u If you want to delete all wallpapers, select Delete All Files.
6. Select a desired wallpaper.
7. Select Select Files.
8. Select Delete Files.
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.
1Delete wallpaper
You cannot delete the initially imported wallpapers.
Continued
275
uu9-in. Color Touchscreen uAudio/Information Screen
Features
■
To move to the next screen
Swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.
■
Home Screen
1Home Screen
You can add up to six pages to the home screen.
Press the button to go directly back to the first
page of the home screen from any page.
Current page position
Swipe
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAudio/Information Screen
276
Features
■
To add/remove app icons on the home screen
App icons can be added or deleted on the home screen.
1. Press the button.
2. Select All Apps.
3. Select an app to check or uncheck it.
■
To move/remove icons on the home screen
You can change location on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
u Drag and drop the icon to Hide to
remove from the home screen.
3. Press the or button.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To add/remove app icons on the home screen
Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the
home screen.
1To move/remove icons on the home screen
Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the
home screen.
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
Hide
Continued
277
uu9-in. Color Touchscreen uAudio/Information Screen
Features
■
To shortcut icons on the home screen
You can store up to five icons on the mode change switch bar.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Select Edit Shortcuts.
3. Drag and drop the icon you want to store to
the left of the home screen.
u The icon is stored as a shortcut.
4. Press the or button.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
1To shortcut icons on the home screen
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
You can also store icons on the mode change switch
bar by the following procedure.
1. Select and hold an icon.
2. Select Edit Shortcuts.
3. Select an icon.
4. Select shortcut location.
5. Press the or button.
Drag and drop to
preset icon.
278
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAudio/Information Screen
Features
Shows the indicators of the information for the vehicle, connected phones, etc. in
the header area. You can confirm the detail information shown in the status area by
selecting the status bar.
■
Status Bar
Status Area
279
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuSystem Updates
Continued
Features
System Updates
System Updates uses the telematics control unit (TCU) or Wi-Fi communication
capability to operate.
When an update for your system becomes available, a screen prompting you to
update your system will be displayed on the audio/information screen.
1. Select System Updates.
2. Select Agree to Update while power
mode is OFF to give permission for the
update.
u The installation progress screen will be
displayed.
u While the power mode is set to OFF, an
update started notification appears for a
few seconds.
3. The next time the power mode is turned to
ON, the system update results screen will be
displayed.
u System update results can also be viewed
from SettingsUpdate History within
System Update.
■
Performing System Updates
1System Updates
If new software has been released, perform an
update as soon as possible.
If a system update fails, please consult a dealer.
System updates that change specifications may result
in some discrepancies with the information in this
owner’s manual. For the most up-to-date
information, please refer to the Honda homepage.
Certain features may not be available during system
updates.
1Performing System Updates
Make sure your vehicle is stopped in a safe location
before starting a system update.
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuSystem Updates
280
Features
You can change or confirm system update settings.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select the option you want to change or confirm.
The following settings can be set.
• Automatic Update
*
• Automatic Download
• Control Unit Versions
• Connection Setup
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 304
• Update History
■
System Updates Settings
1Performing System Updates
If you have pressed Agree to Update while power
mode is OFF on the agreement screen when an
update is being offered, or Automatic Update
*
is
set to ON, and the update started notification is not
displayed even though the power mode is set to OFF,
it may be due to one or more of the conditions listed
below. For more information, consult a dealer.
• The shift position is not in (P.
• The vehicle is providing one or more emergency
notifications.
• The battery is depleted.
If the system is being updated via Wi-Fi, you will not
be able to use this feature in some situations based
on Wi-Fi authentication methods.
For example:
• The connection requires you to log in.
• Agreement to terms of use is required.
If you are disconnected from the network, the
download will be stopped.
Download is resumed when a new network
connection is established.
1System Updates Settings
To perform a System Update via Wi-Fi, check the box
next to your desired network in
General Settings Connections Wi-Fi
Options Add Network or Saved Networks.
* Not available on all models
281
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Press the button.
2. Select an audio source icon.
3. Select Menu.
4. Select Sound Settings.
5. Select the setting you want.
3. Select Sound.
4. Select the setting you want.
Select an item from the following choices:
• Bass / Mid / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass
• Audio Zones & Balance / Fader: Driver Only, Front Only, Rear Only, Full
Vehicle, Balance, Fader
• Bose Centerpoint Surround: Turns the Bose Centerpoint ON and OFF.
• Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation: Sets the amount of volume increase.
1Adjusting the Sound
The Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation adjusts
the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you
go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down,
audio volume decreases.
You can also adjust the sound by the following
procedure.
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Sound.
To reset each setting for Bass / Mid / Treble, Audio
Zones & Balance / Fader select Reset to Default in
each setting item.
AM/FM Radio mode
USB Audio, Bluetooth Audio mode
282
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuDisplay Setup
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness of the audio/information screen.
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Display.
4. Select the setting you want.
■
Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
To reset the settings, select Reset to Default.
283
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuDisplay Setup
Features
You can select an audio source on the audio/information screen.
1. Select application icon of the audio/
information screen.
2. Select an icon on the source list to switch
the audio source.
■
Selecting an Audio Source
Application Icon
Source List
284
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAlexa Built-In
Features
Alexa Built-In
You can talk to Amazon Alexa through the audio system. With Alexa, you can:
• Stream music
• Check the weather
• Answer questions
• Control smart home devices
• And more with supported Alexa skills
Once you sign into Alexa in the vehicle, you can use Alexa without opening the app.
You can trigger Alexa by doing any of the following:
• Say the wake word “Alexa” from anywhere in the audio system.
• Press the (Talk) button on the steering wheel.
• Select the Alexa icon from inside the app.
■
Using Alexa
1Alexa Built-In
Support Resources
For more information or client support:
• Call Honda Customer Services at 1 (800) 999-1009.
• Go to https://www.amazon.com/alexasupport.
You can change the voice recognition from Alexa to
Google Assistant.
2 Customized Features P. 354
1Using Alexa
Troubleshooting Tips:
• Make sure you are connected to Alexa via Wi-Fi
network, AT&T Vehicle Data Plan, or HondaLink.
• If using an AT&T Vehicle Data Plan, confirm that
your subscription is active.
• Make sure you are logged into your Amazon
account.
Deleting Your Alexa Settings from the Vehicle
For your privacy and security, if you transfer the
vehicle to a third-party, reset all vehicle settings to
default and delete all personal data. Also, remove the
vehicle from the list of devices in your phone’s Alexa
app.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 374
285
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Seek Buttons
Press or to search the selected band up
or down for a station with a strong signal.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and
off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Menu Icon
Select whether to tune to HD
Radio
TM
automatically.
Tune Icon
Select to use the on-screen keyboard for entering
the radio frequency directly.
Audio/Information Screen
Favorite Station Icons
T
une the radio fr
equency for a favorite station.
Select and hold the icon to store the station. Swipe
left or right on the screen to move to the next or
previous favorite station list.
Scan Icon
Select to scan each station with a
strong signal.
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuPlaying AM/FM Radio
286
Features
To add a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select and hold Press & Hold to Add.
■
Editing a favorite station
Select and hold the desired favorite station icon.
The following items are available:
• Remove Favorite: Delete the favorite station icon from the favorite station list.
• Replace with (number): Replace the stored favorite station icon.
• Add to Home: Add the shortcut icon of the stored favorite station to the home
screen.
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.
1. Select Station List to display a list.
2. Select the station.
■
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select Station List to display a list.
2. Select Refresh.
■
Favorite Station
■
Station List
1Favorite Station
Switching the Audio Mode
Roll the left selector wheel or select the audio source
icon on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 241
You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset
memory.
HD Radio
TM
Technology manufactured under license
from iBiquity Digital Corporation, a subsidiary of
Xperi Inc., U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see
https://xperi.com/hd-radiopatents/. Xperi, HD Radio,
HD, and 'ARC' logos and their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Xperi Inc. and
its subsidiaries in the United States and other
countries.
Continued
287
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, select Stop or press the button.
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■
To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the station.
■
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Refresh.
■
Scan
■
Radio Data System (RDS)
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
288
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
Displays the subchannel list when an HD Radio
TM
station is selected while listening to
an FM station.
1. Select Station List.
2. Select the channel number.
Changes the AM/FM settings.
1. Select Menu.
2. Select HD Radio.
3. Select Auto or Analog Only.
■
HD Subchannel
■
AM/FM Settings
289
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via Wired Connection
Continued
Features
Music Playback via Wired Connection
Using your USB connector, connect the device to the USB port, then select the USB
icon.
2 USB Ports P. 239
Track Icons
Select or to change
songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
Shuffle Icon
Select to play all songs in the
current category in random order.
Cover Art Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
(Back)
Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat the current song.
Track Buttons
Press or to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.
Music Library Icon
Select to display the music search
screen.
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via Wired Connection
290
Features
1. Select Music Library.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists, Albums, etc.).
3. Continue making selections until you find the song of your choice.
■
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1Music Playback via Wired Connection
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the USB
source will be unavailable and audio files on the
phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay.
291
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via Wired Connection
Features
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.
■
Shuffle/Repeat
Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your
preference.
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle
Shuffle off: Shuffle mode turns off.
Shuffle all songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list in random order.
Repeat
Repeat off: Repeat mode turns off.
Repeat song: Repeats the current song.
Repeat all: Repeats all available songs in a selected list.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
292
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via USB Flash Drive
Features
Music Playback via USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays audio files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, AAC
*1
, FLAC or WAV format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB icon.
2 USB Ports P. 239
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Track Buttons
Press or to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.
Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
(Back) Button
Press t
o
go back to the previous display.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Track Icons
Select or to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
Random Icon
Select to play all files in the current
category in random order.
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat the current file.
Music Library Icon
Select to display the music search
screen.
Continued
293
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via USB Flash Drive
Features
1. Select Music Library.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists, Albums, etc.).
3. Continue making selections until you find the song of your choice.
■
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Music Playback via USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 330
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays The selected file cannot
be played on this system, then skips to the next
file.
294
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuMusic Playback via USB Flash Drive
Features
You can select random and repeat modes when playing a file.
■
Random/Repeat
Repeatedly select the random or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of
your preference.
Play Mode Menu Items
Random
Random off: Random mode turns off.
Random all tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Random in folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.
Repeat
Repeat off: Repeat mode turns off.
Repeat track: Repeats the current playing file.
Repeat in folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
295
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Continued
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For
a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit https://mygarage.honda.com/s/honda-
handsfreelink-compatibility-check, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
• Canada: Call 1-855-490-7351.
It may be illegal to perform some data device
functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there is more than one paired phone in the
vehicle, the system automatically connects to the
prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone
in the Bluetooth® device list.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be
different.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there may be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone
will be unavailable.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone
is connected to HFL.
Track Icons
Select or to
change track.
Select and hold to
move rapidly within a
track.
Repeat Icon
Select to repeat the current track.
(Back) Button
Press to go back
to the previous
display.
VOL/ AUDIO
(Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Shuffle Icon
Select to play all tracks in the
current category in random order.
Music Library Icon
Select to display the
music search screen.
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
296
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not
compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.
■
To play or pause a file
Select the play/pause icon.
1. Select Music Library.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
3. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.
■
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
■
Searching for Music
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone manufacturer's
operating instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
You can change the connected phone by selecting
Change Devices.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
1Searching for Music
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
297
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.
■
Shuffle/Repeat
Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon until you find a play mode option of your
preference.
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle
Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list in random order.
Repeat
Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.
Repeat Group: Repeats the current group.
Repeat all: Repeats all songs.
■
How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the functions may not be displayed.
298
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuHondaLink®
Features
HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect
your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 304
2 Phone Setup P. 399
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink®.
■
To enable the HondaLink® service
You must consent to location sharing to enable the HondaLink® service.
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Privacy.
4. Select Data Sharing with Honda.
5. Select Enable.
■
To Connect to HondaLink®
1HondaLink®
If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you
can use HondaLink® without connecting the phone.
The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most
iPhone and Android phones.
If the system is connected to the HondaLink® connect
app through Bluetooth® and another Bluetooth®
audio device is connected, the Bluetooth®
connection to the HondaLink® connect app will be
severed.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, HondaLink® can only be connected
through Wi-Fi.
299
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuHondaLink®
Continued
Features
■
To link with HondaLink®
You can see the connection guide screen after
launching HondaLink® when there is no
connection to a network. If you do not need
this guide, select check-box and select OK.
■
Vehicle Notifications
Displays instruction messages when the
vehicle needs service.
■
Connect Honda
Displays tips for vehicle usage and gets
support via roadside assistance or the
customer service center.
■
Connect
Displays your phone connection status and
HondaLink® subscription status.
■
HondaLink® Menu
300
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuHondaLink®
Features
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.
1. A notification appears and notifies you of a new message in the header area.
2. Select the system status icon to see the messages.
u A notification is continuously displayed in the header area until the new
message is read.
3. Select a new message to open.
■
Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
301
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuHondaLink® Service
Continued
Features
HondaLink® Service
Is a subscription-based service that provides convenient features such as voice
communication in case of emergency, online security, and one-on-one operator
assistance.
1HondaLink® Service
HondaLink® also provides services you can operate
from the Internet or your smartphone.
To subscribe to HondaLink®, or to get more
information about all of its features, contact a Honda
dealer, or visit:
U.S.: https://mygarage.honda.com/s/hondalink-
marketing
Canada: https://www.honda.ca/en/hondalink
(English)
https://www.honda.ca/fr/hondalink (French)
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuHondaLink® Service
302
Features
Your subscribed telematics service provider can track your vehicle’s location,
remotely lock or unlock doors, and help you find your vehicle.
To use these features, you need your user ID and personal identification number
(PIN).
■
Stolen vehicle tracking
This feature searches and tracks down your vehicle position even if it is on the move.
If you believe that your vehicle has been stolen, contact the police as well as the
provider.
■
Remote door lock/unlock
The provider can remotely lock or unlock doors upon your request.
■
Vehicle finder
This feature is convenient to use when trying to locate your vehicle in large areas,
such as a crowded parking lot. If you cannot locate your vehicle after using the
remote transmitter’s answer back function, you can contact your provider, which
can flash your vehicle's exterior lights, sound the horn, and send your vehicle's
location via web/Smartphone.
■
Security alarm notification
If the security system in your vehicle detects an abnormal condition, such as
someone tampering with the lock on your vehicle, the provider notifies you by email.
■
Security Features
1Security Features
The contact information of your provider, your user
ID, and PIN will be given when you subscribe to
HondaLink®. If you forget any of the above, contact a
Honda dealer, or visit:
U.S.: https://mygarage.honda.com/s/hondalink-
marketing
Canada: https://www.honda.ca/en/hondalink
(English)
https://www.honda.ca/fr/hondalink (French)
You can also activate the remote door lock/unlock
and vehicle finder features from the Internet or by
using your smartphone app. Ask a dealer, or visit:
U.S.: https://mygarage.honda.com/s/hondalink-
marketing
Canada: https://www.honda.ca/en/hondalink
(English)
https://www.honda.ca/fr/hondalink (French)
1Vehicle finder
The lights will stop flashing and horn will stop
sounding under the following:
• When 30 seconds have elapsed.
• You unlock the doors using the remote transmitter.
• You unlock the doors using the keyless access
system.
• You unlock the doors using the built-in key.
• The power mode is set to ACCESSORY or ON.
303
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuHondaLink® Service
Features
Your subscribed telematics service provider can check your vehicle’s condition.
■
Virtual Dashboard
You can remotely check the mileage, fuel range, and oil life in your app.
■
Remote start and stop the engine
You can remotely turn the power system on and off using your app the same way
as the keyless remote.
■
Geofence Alert
You can receive a notification anytime your vehicle enters or leaves a region set by
you.
■
Speed Alert
You can receive a notification when your vehicle has exceeded a speed limit set by
you.
■
Personal Data Wipe
You can reset your audio and navigation system settings to factory defaults with the
app.
■
Wi-Fi hotspot
Vehicle provides a 4G LTE network environment as a Wi-Fi router to use a tablet or
a smartphone in your vehicle.
■
Convenient Features
304
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuWi-Fi Connection
Features
Wi-Fi Connection
This vehicle is equipped with Wi-Fi connectivity. You can connect to an external Wi-
Fi hotspot or communication device. In addition, the vehicle can be used by other
communication devices as a Wi-Fi hotspot via the telematics unit (TCU).
• Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi hotspot
• Use Wi-Fi inside the vehicle
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Wi-Fi.
u To change the Wi-Fi settings, select Options.
5. Select the access point you want to connect to the system.
6. Select Connect.
u When the connection is successful, the status text Connected next to the
network name is displayed on the list.
7. Press the button to go back to the home screen.
■
Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi hotspot
1Wi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are registered trademarks of
Wi-Fi Alliance®.
1Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi hotspot
You cannot go through the setting procedure while
the vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the
audio system in Wi-Fi mode.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone
has Wi-Fi connectivity.
You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or
off with the icon on the Wi-Fi network list.
Transmission speed and others will not be displayed
on this screen.
In case of Wi-Fi connection with your phone, make
sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point
(tethering) mode.
When you select Access Point, you can set up a
Wireless connection from the phone to the vehicle.
2 Customized Features P. 354
305
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuWi-Fi Connection
Features
You can set the network as a Wi-Fi hotspot of this audio system.
Use the following steps to set up.
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Data Connection Options.
5. Select Set Up Wi-Fi.
6. Select Options.
7. Select Add Network.
The following options are available for the setup.
• Network SSID: Set this network name.
• Security: Set a password to be required when connecting a Wi-Fi device to this
network.
■
Use Wi-Fi inside the vehicle
306
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAT&T Hotspot
Features
AT&T Hotspot
If you have subscribed to AT&T hotspot services, your vehicle will provide data to
connect your mobile devices to the Internet. You can use the AT&T Hotspot app to
turn vehicle data on/off and monitor data usage left on your subscription.
a Hotspot Enable
Turn AT&T Hotspot on/off.
b Data Usage Bar
Check the current status of your data plan. This Usage Bar will show your current
plan and how much data remains on your plan. Subscription plans for AT&T Hotspot
can be added/modified at:
■
AT&T Hotspot Menu
1AT&T Hotspot
To use AT&T Hotspot services, your vehicle must be
subscribed to a data plan. If your vehicle is not
subscribed to a data plan, you can add vehicle data
services at:
U.S.: www.att.com/honda
Canada: https://myvehicle.att.com/#/honda/
learn?country=CA&language=en (English)
https://myvehicle.att.com/#/honda/
learn?country=CA&language=fr (French)
Hotspot network SSID and password can be changed
in the Settings of the AT&T Hotspot app. Settings
cannot be accessed while driving. Park in a safe place
to adjust Hotspot settings.
Alternatively, you can use your mobile hotspot to
connect the vehicle and other mobile devices to the
Internet.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 304
U.S.: www.att.com/honda
Canada: https://myvehicle.att.com/#/honda/learn?country=CA&language=en
(English)
https://myvehicle.att.com/#/honda/learn?country=CA&language=fr
(French)
307
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAT&T Hotspot
Features
c Plan Info
Shows your current AT&T subscription plan for the vehicle.
d Settings
Shows the current network SSID and password for vehicle Hotspot. Settings can be
changed while the vehicle is not in motion.
e Help
308
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay
Features
Apple CarPlay
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the USB port
or wirelessly, and the Apple CarPlay icon is selected, you can use Apple CarPlay on
the audio/information screen.
2 USB Ports P. 239
1Apple CarPlay
Only iPhone 5s or newer versions with iOS 11.3 or
later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.
We recommend using the latest OS.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to
Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible
apps.
While connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible
to use the Bluetooth® Audio or HandsFreeLink®.
Music playback or calls are only made through Apple
CarPlay. Other previously paired phones can use the
Bluetooth® Audio.
When using Hands Free, you can only control it with
Siri.
2 Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri P. 262
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the
same time.
For details on countries and regions where Apple
CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining
to function, refer to the Apple homepage.
Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of
certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle
location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to
enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need
to consent to the sharing of this information on the
audio/information screen.
Apple CarPlay Icon
Continued
309
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay
Features
The following items are only representative examples. Applications displayed on the
screen can be changed on your iPhone.
• Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voicemail.
• Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.
• Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.
• Maps
Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your
iPhone.
Only one navigation system (Google built-in or Apple CarPlay) can give directions
at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set
on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will
direct you to your destination.
• Honda
Select the Honda icon to go back to the home screen.
■
Apple CarPlay Menu
1Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an
active cellular connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Apple
CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use third-party apps if they are
compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple
homepage for information on compatible apps.
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay
310
Features
1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable.
2 USB Ports P. 239
u The confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Select Yes.
u If you do not allow this consent, select No.
You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu.
■
Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable to the USB
Port
1Apple CarPlay
Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely
parked.
When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you
will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the
instruction manual that came with your iPhone.
You can also use the method below to set up Apple
CarPlay:
Press the button General Settings
Connections Manage Device Connections
Select Device.
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is
governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and
Apple’s Privacy Policy.
Wireless Apple CarPlay and AT&T Hotspot cannot be
used at the same time. When using Apple CarPlay
and AT&T Hotspot at the same time, connect to
Apple CarPlay with a USB cable.
If there is a problem with the connection of your
iPhone, an error code will be displayed.
2 Customized Features P. 354
311
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay
Continued
Features
■
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the home screen
1. Press the button.
2. Select Apple CarPlay.
3. Select Connect Phone or Search for Device.
4. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
5. Select Yes.
■
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the Bluetooth® device list
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Manage Device Connections.
5. Select + Connect New Device.
6. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
7. Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,
accept to connect.
■
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly with the steering wheel
1. Press and hold the (Talk) button on the steering wheel.
2. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
3. Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks for permission to accept an Apple CarPlay connection,
accept to connect.
■
Connect Apple CarPlay Wirelessly
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuApple CarPlay
312
Features
Press and hold the (Talk) button to activate Siri.
Press again to deactivate Siri.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
■
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Below are examples of questions and commands for
Siri:
• What movies are playing today?
• Call dad at work.
• What song is this?
• How’s the weather tomorrow?
• Read my latest email.
• Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit
www.apple.com/ios/siri.
313
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto
TM
Continued
Features
Android Auto
TM
When you connect an Android
TM
phone to the audio system via the USB port or
wirelessly, and the Android Auto icon is selected, you can use Android Auto on the
audio/information screen.
We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using
Android Auto.
2 USB Ports P. 239
2 Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port P. 315
1Android Auto
TM
We recommend that you update Android OS to the
latest version when using Android Auto.
Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is
connected to Android Auto.
To use Android Auto on a smartphone with Android
9.0 (Pie) or earlier, you need to download the
Android Auto app from Google Play to your
smartphone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android
phone to Android Auto and when launching any
compatible apps.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the
same time.
Android and Android Auto are trademarks of Google
LLC.
To use each of Android Auto's features, say a wake-
up word while the Android Auto screen is displayed,
or press and hold the (talk) button to activate
Google Assistant.
2 Operating Android Auto with Voice
Recognition P. 317
Android Auto Icon
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto
TM
314
Features
The following items are only representative examples. Applications displayed on the
screen can be changed on your smartphone.
• Maps
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your
Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard
entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other
inputs.
Only one navigation system (Google built-in or Android Auto) can give directions
at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set
on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will
direct you to your destination.
The audio/information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your
destination.
• Phone
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
• Honda
Select the Honda icon to go back to the home screen.
■
Android Auto Menu
1Android Auto
TM
For details on countries and regions where Android
Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to
function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Screens may differ depending on the version of the
Android Auto app you are using.
Android Auto Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone
with an active cellular connection and data plan.
Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Android
Auto functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Android Auto functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Android Auto performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use third-party apps if they are
compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android
Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.
Continued
315
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port using the USB cable.
2 USB Ports P. 239
u The confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Select Yes.
u If you do not allow this consent, select No.
You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu.
■
Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the home screen
1. Press the button.
2. Select Android Auto.
3. Select Connect Phone or Search for Device.
4. Pair the device to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
5. Select Yes.
■
Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB
Port
■
Connect Android Auto Wirelessly
1Android Auto
TM
Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely
parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone,
you will need to set up your phone so that auto
pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual
that came with your phone.
You can use the method below to change Android
Auto settings after you have completed the initial
setup:
Press the button General Settings
Connections Manage Device Connections
Select Device.
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is
governed by Google’s Privacy Policy.
Wireless Android Auto and AT&T Hotspot cannot be
used at the same time. When using Android Auto
and AT&T Hotspot at the same time, connect to
Android Auto with a USB cable.
If there is a problem with the connection of your
smartphone, an error code will be displayed.
2 Customized Features P. 354
316
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
■
Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the Bluetooth® device list
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Manage Device Connections.
5. Select + Connect New Device.
6. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
7. Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto
connection, accept to connect.
■
Connect Android Auto wirelessly with the steering wheel
1. Press and hold the (Talk) button on the steering wheel.
2. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
3. Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks for permission to accept an Android Auto
connection, accept to connect.
317
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuAndroid Auto
TM
Features
Press and hold the (Talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.
Press and release to activate the standard voice recognition system.
■
Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with
voice recognition:
• Reply to text.
• Call my wife.
• Navigate to Honda.
• Play my music.
• Send a text message to my wife.
• Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android
Auto homepage.
318
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuGoogle built-in
Features
Google built-in
You can use the features available with Google built-in on the audio screen.
a Google Assistant
b Google Maps
c Google Play
1Google built-in
• Google, Google Play, and Google Maps are
trademarks of Google LLC.
• For more details on Google Apps and Services’
features, visit the Google homepage.
Additional information for Google Apps and Services
is available at mygarage.honda.com (US) or honda.ca
(Canada).
Continued
319
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuGoogle built-in
Features
You can operate features with hands-free help from Google Assistant.
You can activate Google Assistant by:
• Using wake words.
u Wake words vary by region and language. Refer to the Google homepage for
more information.
• Pressing the (Talk) button on the steering wheel.
• Selecting the Google Assistant icon on the audio/information screen.
■
Google Assistant
1Google Assistant
Below are example voice commands that can be used
once Google Assistant is activated:
• Play music.
• Play radio.
Refer to the Google homepage for more information.
You can customize language and other settings
regarding Google Assistant.
2 Customized Features P. 354
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuGoogle built-in
320
Features
Google Maps helps you reach your next destination faster with real-time traffic info,
automatic rerouting, and voice control.
■
Google Maps
1Google Maps
Operate when vehicle is stopped in a safe location.
When your Google Account is linked with a valid
user, destinations stored on other devices (home,
work, favorites, previous searches, etc.) can be
displayed. When the device and the vehicle are
logged into the same Google Account, changing
information on the device will change it on Google
Maps as well.
322
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuUser Information
Features
User Information
a User Information
1User Information
This feature cannot be used while driving.
You can customize settings individually for each user.
2 Profile Settings P. 326
You can customize security settings for each user. If
you have forgotten security settings, you will need to
delete the user and create a new one. If you have
forgotten security settings for the Owner user, please
contact a dealer or Honda Customer Services.
2 Customer Service Information P. 723
Certain features are unavailable when using a newly
created user or the Guest user.
323
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuUser Information
Continued
Features
You can add and change users, as well as customize user settings.
By registering a User, you can personalize your vehicle settings.
You can select a user when the audio/information screen loads, even when the
doors are open or unlocked.
By linking your profile with your Google Account, you can enjoy a more personalized
Google built-in experience. For more assistance on account linking, visit the Google
homepage.
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuUser Information
324
Features
1. Select User Info.
u You can also add users by selecting
Profile Settings.
2 Profile Settings P. 326
u You can add users even when the doors
are open or unlocked.
2. Select Change Profile.
3. Select Add profile.
4. Enter User Information.
2 Start Up P. 268
1. Select User Info.
u You can also change users by selecting Profile Settings.
2 Profile Settings P. 326
u You can switch users even when the doors are open or unlocked.
2. Select Change Profile.
3. Select the User you want to use.
■
Registering a User
1Registering a User
Profile can be changed only when the vehicle is
parked.
You can add up to 4 users other than the Owner user
and the Guest user.
When you add a user, the audio/information screen is
loaded under that user.
■
Switching Users
1Switching Users
Profile can be changed only when the vehicle is
parked.
Users with customized security settings can restrict
screen operations by selecting the Screen Lock
shortcut.
325
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuUser Information
Features
1. Select Profile Settings.
2. Select Manage Profile.
3. Select Profiles & accounts.
4. Select Delete your profile.
■
Deleting Users
1Deleting Users
When the profile currently being used is deleted, the
audio/information screen is loaded under the Guest
user.
While using the Owner user, you can delete other
users via General Settings Advanced Settings.
2 Customized Features P. 354
Depending on the version of your OS, the steps for
deleting a user may differ from the instructions on
this page. Follow the on-screen prompts.
326
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuProfile Settings
Features
Profile Settings
You can add and change users, as well as customize user settings.
Press the button, select Profile Settings, and select a setting item you want.
a Profile Settings
■
How to Customize the Profile Settings
1Profile Settings
When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
• Shift to (P.
• Set the parking brake.
To customize features detail, refer to the following.
2 Change Profile P. 327
2 Manage Profile P. 327
327
uu9-in. Color TouchscreenuProfile Settings
Features
■
Change Profile
You can change and add users.
2 User Information P. 322
■
Manage Profile
Use Manage Profile to change profile settings. Please confirm the details on the audio/information screen.
Specifications are subject to change via system updates, etc.
328
Features
Audio Error Messages
The following error messages are just examples. If you see an error message not
listed below, follow the on-screen instructions to clear it.
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
*2:Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Error Message Solution
Bad USB Device
Please check owners manual
*1
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. To resolve the issue, disconnect the
device. When safe, turn off the vehicle, wait at least 10 seconds, and turn the vehicle
back on. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Connect Retry
*1
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File
*1
The selected file cannot be played on this
system
*2
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported
format. This error message appears for about a few seconds, then plays the next file.
No Data
*1, *2
Appears when the iPod is empty.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or
WAV files in the USB flash drive.
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
*1
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported
device is connected, reconnect the device.
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
329
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Features
*1:Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
*2:Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Error Message Solution
Error
*2
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported
device is connected, reconnect the device.
Appears when unsupported formats are in the device. Check that compatible files are
stored on the device.
Device No Response
*1
Appears when the system does not communicate with a connected device. If it appears
when a device is connected, contact your place of device purchase.
USB hub not supported
*1
USB Hub Unsupported
*2
Appears when only a HUB is connected. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the
HUB.
A charging error has occurred with the
connected USB device. When safe please
check the compatibility of the device and
USB cable and try again.
*1
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn
the audio system off and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the
error.
330
Features
General Information on the Audio System
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
• Please use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher formatted with
FAT16 or FAT32.
• Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV formats may be unsupported.
■
iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
Made for iPod touch (6th to 7th generation) released between 2015 and 2019
Made for iPhone 5s/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6S/iPhone 6S Plus/iPhone SE/
iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/
iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max /iPhone SE (2nd generation)/
iPhone 12/iPhone 12 Pro/iPhone 12 Pro Max/iPhone 12 mini/iPhone 13/iPhone 13
Pro/iPhone 13 Pro Max/iPhone 13 mini/iPhone 14/iPhone 14 Plus/iPhone 14 Pro/
iPhone 14 Pro Max
Model
Made for iPod touch (6th generation)/iPod touch (7th generation)
Made for iPhone 5s/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6s/iPhone 6s Plus/iPhone SE/
iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/
iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max/iPhone SE (2nd generation)/
iPhone 12 mini/iPhone 12/iPhone 12 Pro/iPhone 12 Pro Max/iPhone 13/iPhone 13
Pro/iPhone 13 Pro Max/iPhone 13 mini/iPhone SE (3rd generation)
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
The Lightning connector works with iPhone 5s,
iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6S, iPhone 6S Plus,
iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8, iPhone
8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone
XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max,
iPhone SE (2nd generation), iPhone 12, iPhone 12
Pro, iPhone 12 Pro Max, iPhone 12 mini, iPhone 13,
iPhone 13 Pro, iPhone 13 Pro Max, iPhone 13 mini,
iPhone 14, iPhone 14 Plus, iPhone 14 Pro, iPhone 14
Pro Max, iPhone SE (3rd generation), iPod touch (6th,
7th generation).
USB works with iPhone 5s, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus,
iPhone 6S, iPhone 6S Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7,
iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X,
iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR, iPhone 11,
iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPhone SE (2nd
generation), iPhone 12, iPhone 12 Pro, iPhone 12 Pro
Max, iPhone 12 mini, iPhone 13, iPhone 13 Pro,
iPhone 13 Pro Max, iPhone 13 mini, iPhone 14,
iPhone 14 Plus, iPhone 14 Pro, iPhone 14 Pro Max,
iPhone SE (3rd generation), iPod touch (6th, 7th
generation).
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
■
USB Flash Drives
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
331
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
Honda App License Agreement
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND
CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL
SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR
OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919
TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND
ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A
THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S
PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.
A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE
during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The
SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content
provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through
the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.
B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.
1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a)
as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a
DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the
“HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your
VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be
specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while
you are using the SOFTWARE.
■
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
332
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source
licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors
of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such
software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone.
Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual
or within the SOFTWARE.
4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER
TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or
permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants,
conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information,
targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any
applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.
(a) Limited License.
You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance
with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA
(any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to
you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under
the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
333
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device
other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying
DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This
AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors,
affiliates, or suppliers.
(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation,
HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or
any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER
TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;
(2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
(3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES in any way;
(4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;
(5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver
distraction laws, rules or regulations;
(6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions,
and privacy policies; or
(7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile,
or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software
licenses.
334
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export
jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other
governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation
1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in
violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation.
The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their
jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by
their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any
information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal
information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE.
Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require
that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER
SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control
over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the
inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER
SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER
SERVICES.
4. Links to Third Party Sites:
The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable,
directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of
such websites and content.
335
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and
SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge
and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and
PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any
fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such
measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
6. SOFTWARE Updates.
The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-
air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be
updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other
applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE.
Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not
provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and
VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings
1. Vehicle Geolocation Information.
You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The
traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude),
travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION
INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to
provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts,
or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
336
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls,
routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency
services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such
navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
3. Speech Recognition:
You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands
when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a)
consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA
and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors
are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address
any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
4. Distraction Hazards.
Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert
data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such
interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of
the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in
a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable
to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
337
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
E. Information Collection and Storage
1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data:
You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may
collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services.
HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services
suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you.
HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally identifies you.
2. Information Storage.
Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease
of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved
destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
(a) Vehicle Health Information.
Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE
(“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and
malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows,
battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes,
diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA
for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period
of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based).
If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data
(latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is
at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information
uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and
safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
338
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you
will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result
from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-
infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your
use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely
on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We
do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via
the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the
accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via
the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may
not apply to you.
G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.
1. Limitations on YOUR liability.
HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s
fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW
ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
339
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential,
indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including,
without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does
not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such
states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for
any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you,
and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA
or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES
interruptions of any length.
(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS
For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA,
PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in
connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the
total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence,
strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE
or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN
DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS
LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND
AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO
ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has
ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone
making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your
VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.
340
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia
system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within
the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission
limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of
or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any
portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance
degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given
location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy
shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA
instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact
HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
K. Termination and Transfer.
1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason,
and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to
comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided
you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed
materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or
transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
341
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless
explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall
respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from
time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion
thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification,
suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.
M. ARBITRATION:
PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU
MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE
HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE
MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.
Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to
court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and
conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the
Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration.
YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third
party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any
representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek
remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.
YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact
these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written
submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers,
HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator
may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.
342
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional
HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this
AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole
remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the
balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as
explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of
California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of
another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of
the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not
prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included
for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.
Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow
substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of
this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall
include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.
This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is
unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely
unenforceable. You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Service Mail Stop CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746.
HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.
343
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Continued
Features
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE
APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE
SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER
LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND
VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR
DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.
USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN
THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE
DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED,
STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING,
FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS
SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE
POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF
DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.
■
OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
344
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Features
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR
SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS
PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS,
EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED
TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR
AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST
AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE
PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE,
SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC.,
SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY
TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY
(CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED
BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING
LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
■
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
345
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses
Features
About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select License.
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Advanced Settings.
4. Select System.
5. Select Legal Information.
6. Select Third-party licenses.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
346
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
Features
License Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by ALPS ALPINE CO., LTD. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
https://www.bluetooth.com/develop-with-bluetooth/marketing-branding/
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or
distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from Microsoft.
■
Bluetooth
■
Windows Media
347
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
Continued
Features
“Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone,” mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not
responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone,
may affect wireless performance.
Apple, the Apple Logo, iPhone, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries. Apple CarPlay, iPod, iPhone, iTunes, Siri and
Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
■
Apple
348
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
Features
Mpeg4 Visual
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD
(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO
PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY
OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO
PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
AVC/H.264
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE
AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
■
MPEG
349
Continued
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the MENU
button. To customize the phone settings, press the PHONE button, then select
Settings.
■
How to Customize the Settings
1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
• Shift to (P.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Audio/Information Screen
MENU Button
Selector Knob
PHONE Button
350
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
List of customizable options
Press the MENU button.
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Sound Settings
Bass / Treble
Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’
sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 246
—
Balance / Fader
Speed Volume
Compensation
Bluetooth Settings
Connect New Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
—
Change Device
Connects a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
—
Priority Device Sets a device as the priority device. ON
*1
/OFF
Disconnect All Device Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. —
Delete Device Deletes a paired phone. —
Clock Settings
Automatic Time
Selects ON to have the GPS automatically
adjust the clock. Select OFF to cancel this
function.
ON
*1
/OFF
Daylight Saving Time
Sets the clock to update based on daylight
savings time.
ON/OFF
*1
Set Time
Adjusts time.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 160
—
Time Zone Changes the time zone manually.
Smartphone Settings
Apple CarPlay Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection.
—
Android Auto Sets up the Android Auto connection.
RDS Settings RDS Information
Selects whether the RDS information comes
on.
ON
*1
/OFF
351
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Display Adjustment
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/
information screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/
information screen.
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/
information screen.
Day
Changes between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode, and display off mode.
Night
Display OFF
Touch Panel Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. Normal
*1
/High
Rear Camera Setting
Fixed Guideline
Shows the guideline that does not move with
the steering wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 594
ON
*1
/OFF
Dynamic Guideline
Shows the guideline that moves with the
steering wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 594
ON
*1
/OFF
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Shows arrows on the rear camera image to
indicate vehicles approaching from the sides.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor
*
P. 590
ON
*1
/OFF
Language Changes the display language. English
*1
/Español/Français
License Shows the legal information. —
Factory Data Reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 353
—
* Not available on all models
352
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Press the PHONE button and select Settings.
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Bluetooth Settings
Connect New Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
—
Change Device
Connects a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 380
—
Priority Device Sets a device as the priority device. ON
*1
/OFF
Disconnect All Device Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. —
Delete Device Deletes a paired phone. —
Ringtone Selects the ringtone. Phone
*1
/Vehicle
Auto Phone Call Transfer
Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
ON
*1
/OFF
Hands-Free System Clear
Resets all customized items in the Phone
Settings group as default.
—
353
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.
3. Select Yes to reset the settings.
4. Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u The system will reboot.
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third-party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the
preinstalled apps to their factory default.
354
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
With the power mode in ON, select General Settings, then select a setting item.
■
How to Customize the General Settings
1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
• Set the parking brake.
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
355
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■
System
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Date & Time
Set Date &
Time
Automatic
Date &
Time
Select ON to have the GPS automatically adjust
the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.
On
*1
/Off
Set Date
Adjusts date.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 160
—
Set Time
Adjusts clock.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 160
—
Time Zone
Automatic
Time Zone
Sets the navigation system to automatically
adjust the clock when driving through different
time zones.
On
*1
/Off
(Select time
zone)
Changes the time zone manually. —
Auto Daylight Saving
Time
Select ON to have the GPS automatically adjust
the clock to daylight savings time. Select OFF to
cancel this function.
On
*1
/Off
Date Format Sets the date format.
Day-of-week, MM DD, YYYY
*1
/
YYYY.MM.DD Day-of-week/
YYYY.MM.DD (Day-of-week)/
Day-of-week DD.MM.YYYY/
DD.MM.YYYY
Time Format Changes the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H
*1
/24H
356
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Language Changes the display language.
English (United States)
*1
/
Español/Français
Touch Panel
Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. Low
*1
/High
About
IP Address
Displays the Android setting items. —
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Bluetooth MAC Address
Serial Number
Up Time
Model Number
Android Version
Kernel Version
Build Number
Software Version
Factory Data
Reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 374
Cancel/Continue
357
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■
Connections
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Manage
Device
Connections
Options
Bluetooth Turns Bluetooth® on and off. On
*1
/Off
Priority
Device
Information
Displays the priority device. —
Change
Name
Changes vehicle name for Bluetooth® connection
setting.
—
Smartphone
Projection
Screen Size
Changes the screen size of the smartphone
projection.
Normal/Wide
*1
Smartphone
Projection
Error Code
Displays the error code(s) of the smartphone
projection.
—
+ Connect New Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
—
(Saved Devices)
Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired
phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
—
358
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Wi-Fi Options
Wi-Fi Allow vehicle to connect to Wi-Fi. Off/On
*1
Add
Network
Allows you to connect to a new external
network.
—
Saved
Networks
Delete a saved network or change update
permission settings for the selected network.
—
Access Point Options
Access
Point
Allow wireless connection from the phone to the
vehicle. This feature must be turned on for
wireless Apple CarPlay or Android Auto to work.
Off
*1
/On
Edit Access
Point
Settings
Allows you to confirm hotspot settings and edit
hotspot connection information.
—
Data
Connection
Options
Set Up Wi-Fi
Sets personal hotspot (phone tethering).
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 304
Set Up Vehicle Data Plan
Sets AT&T vehicle data plan.
2 AT&T Hotspot P. 306
359
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■
Privacy
*1:Default Setting
*2:Please confirm the details on the audio/information screen. Specifications are subject to change via system updates, etc.
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Data Sharing with Honda Turns data sharing on and off. Disable/Enable
*1
Microphone
Turns the microphone on and off. eCall can still
be used regardless of settings.
Location
Sets the data sharing permission for each
function.
Infotainment system data
App permissions
System-wide Permission Settings
Data sharing with Google
*2
Ads
Google legal
*2
Google Terms of
Service
*2
Displays the Google URL. —
Google Privacy Policy
*2
360
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Display
*1:When the AID sensor is disabled.
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.
—
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.
—
Day Mode
*1
Changes between the daytime mode and night
mode.
—
Night Mode
*1
Display Off
Turns the audio/information screen brightness
off.
—
362
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Sound Volume
*1:Default Setting
■
Camera
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Sounds
Adjusts the sounds' volume settings.
0~2
*1
~3
Voice Recognition 1~2
*1
~11
Navigation Guidance 0~6
*1
~11
Phone Calls 0~20
*1
~40
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Rear Wide
Camera
Guidelines
Fixed
Guideline
Shows the guideline that does not move with the
steering wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 594
On
*1
/Off
Dynamic
Guideline
Shows the guideline that moves with the steering
wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 594
On
*1
/Off
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Shows arrows on the rear camera image to
indicate vehicles approaching from the sides.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor
*
P. 590
On
*1
/Off
* Not available on all models
363
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■
Voice Control
*1:Default Setting
*2:Activates when the iPhone is connected.
*3:Default Setting (When Apple CarPlay is launched, the setting will be switched to On.)
■
Security
You can customize security settings. Please confirm the details on the audio/information screen.
Specifications are subject to change via system updates, etc.
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Default Assist App Selects the assistant apps.
None/Alexa/Google
Assistant
*1
Listen for “Hey Siri”
*2
Toggles Siri activation when you say “Hey Siri.” On/Off
*3
Google Assistant Sets the functions of Google Assistant. —
364
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Google
You can customize Google settings. Please confirm the details on the audio/information screen.
Specifications are subject to change via system updates, etc.
■
Advanced Settings
You can customize advanced system settings. Please confirm the details on the audio/information screen.
Specifications may be changed via system updates, etc.
365
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
With the power mode in ON, press the button, and then select Vehicle Settings
and select a setting item.
■
How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
366
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
TPMS Calibration
*
■
Driver Assist System Setup
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
TPMS Calibration
Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) P. 460
Calibrate
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Forward Collision Warning
Distance
Changes the distance at which Collision Mitigation Braking System
(CMBS) alerts.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) P. 474
Long/Normal
*1
/Short
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect
Beep
Turns audible notification On/Off when vehicle has moved in/out of
Adaptive Cruise Control range.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
P. 521
On/Off
*1
Road Departure Mitigation
Setting
Selects operating mode of the Road Departure Mitigation system.
2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 492
Narrow/Normal
*1
/Wide/
Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep
Switches the LKAS suspend alert beeps on and off.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 541
On/Off
*1
Blind Spot Information
*
Turns the blind spot information system audible alert On/Off.
2 Blind Spot Information System
*
P. 467
Audible And Visual Alert
*1
/
Visual Alert
* Not available on all models
367
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Traffic Sign Recognition
System Display Setting
Displays the traffic sign recognition system on instrument panel.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 562
On
*1
/Off
Traffic Sign Recognition
System Speed Limit
Warning
Enables over speed limit warning when speed limit is exceeded.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 562
On/Off
*1
Speed Limit Warning
Threshold Setting
When Traffic Sign Recognition System Speed Limit Warning
setting is on, select speed limit warning threshold based on personal
preference.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 562
Speed Limit
*1
/
Speed Limit+3mph/
Speed Limit+5mph/
Speed Limit+10mph
(When mph is selected)
Speed Limit
*1
/
Speed Limit+5km/h/
Speed Limit+10km/h/
Speed Limit+15km/h
(When km/h is selected)
Driver Attention Monitor
Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.
2 Driver Attention Monitor P. 121, 149
Tactile And Audible Alert
*1
/
Tactile Alert/Off
Rev Match System
Selects On/Off the rev match system.
2 Rev Match System P. 434
On
*1
/Off
Rear Sensor Setting
*
Turns the Rear Parking Sensor ON or OFF. This selection will also
affect the rear Low Speed Braking Control
*
.
2 Parking Sensor System
*
P. 585
2 Low Speed Braking Control
*
P. 487
On
*1
/Off
* Not available on all models
368
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Meter Setup
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts outside temperature reading by a few degrees.
2 Outside Temperature P. 112
-5°F ~ ±0°F
*1
~ +5°F (U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C
*1
~ +3°C (Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Selects the timing to reset Trip A.
2 Range/Fuel/Trip Meter P. 117
2 Speed/Time/Trip Meter P. 119
When Fully Refueled/IGN Off/
Manually Reset
*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Selects the timing to reset Trip B.
2 Range/Fuel/Trip Meter P. 145
2 Speed/Time/Trip Meter P. 147
When Fully Refueled/IGN Off/
Manually Reset
*1
Adjust Alarm Volume
Changes volume level of all system warnings, door opening
warning, and indicator.
High/Mid
*1
/Low
Rev Indicator Turns the rev indicators on and off. On
*1
/Off
Turn by Turn Auto Display
Turns the pop-up information on/off in the turn-by-turn
navigation in the driver information interface.
2 Turn-by-Turn Directions P. 148
On
*1
/Off
Rear Seat Reminder Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off. On
*1
/Off
Speed/Distance Units
Selects the speed/distance units.
2 Speed/Distance Units P. 156
km/h · km/mph · miles
*1
(U.S.)
km/h · km
*1
/mph · miles (Canada)
Shift Up Alarm
Changes whether alarm sounds when the tachometer reading
approaches the red zone.
On
*1
/Off
369
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■
Keyless Access Setup
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s door
handle.
Driver Door Only
*1
/All
Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the
doors.
On
*1
/Off
Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors. On
*1
/Off
Lockout Prevention Changes the settings for the lockout protection function. On
*1
/Off
370
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Lighting Setup
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Auto High-Beam Turns the auto high-beam on and off. On
*1
/Off
Interior Light Dimming Time
Selects the length of time the interior lights stay on after doors are
closed.
2 Interior Light Switches P. 215
60sec/30sec
*1
/15sec
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Selects the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close
the driver's door.
2 Automatic Lighting Off Feature P. 195
60sec/30sec/15sec
*1
/0sec
Auto Light Sensitivity
*
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid
*1
/Low/Min
Auto Headlight On with
Wiper On
Turns headlight function at wiper operation On/Off when the
headlight is in AUTO setting.
2 Headlight Integration with Wipers P. 194
On
*1
/Off
* Not available on all models
371
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■
Door Setup
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature. With Vehicle Speed
*1
/Off
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.
All Doors When Driver’s Door Opens
*1
/
All Doors When Ignition Switched Off/
Off
Walk Away Auto Lock
Changes the settings for the auto lock function when
you walk away from the vehicle.
On/Off
*1
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Turns flash of exterior lights on/off when doors are
locked/unlocked by keyless remote.
2 Using the Remote Transmitter P. 170
On
*1
/Off
Keyless Remote Power
Window Control
Turns the remote window control on and off. On
*1
/Off
Lock Presetting Changes the settings for the lock presetting function. On
*1
/Off
372
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■
Climate Control Setup
*1:Default Setting
■
INDIVIDUAL Settings
*1:Default Setting
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Driver Seat automatic
Climate Control
Automatic climate control of Driver Seat with automatic air
conditioner. Changes the interlocking control setting.
On
*1
/Off
Passenger Seat automatic
Climate Control
Automatic climate control of Passenger Seat with automatic air
conditioner. Changes the interlocking control setting.
On
*1
/Off
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Engine
Selects the responsiveness of the engine and transmission.
2 Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings P. 456
NORMAL
*1
/SPORT
Steering
Selects the level of steering effort.
2 Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings P. 456
NORMAL
*1
/SPORT
Engine Sound
Selects the effect of engine sound.
2 Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings P. 456
NORMAL
*1
/SPORT
Gauge
Selects the gauges to be displayed in the Driver Information
Interface.
2 Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings P. 456
NORMAL
*1
/SPORT
374
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
Only the Owner user can execute this command.
If current profile is not the Owner user, please switch users.
2 Switching Users P. 324
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.
5. Select Continue to reset the settings.
6. Select Reset again to reset the settings.
u The system will reboot.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Vehicle Settings.
3. Select Default All.
4. Select Yes.
■
Defaulting System Settings
■
Defaulting Vehicle Settings
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third-party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the
preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use
the HondaLink® because it goes offline.
2 HondaLink® P. 298
375
Continued
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluet ooth® HandsFreeLink®
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit https://mygarage.honda.com/s/honda-
handsfreelink-compatibility-check, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
• Canada: Call 1-855-490-7351.
Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
Up to 20 favorite contacts can be stored. If there is no
entry in the system, the pop-up notification appears
on the screen.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 388
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call
history, Call History is disabled.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Selector Knob
Left Selector Wheel
PHONE Button
VOL
(+/VOL (-
(Volume) Switch
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
376
Features
Left Selector Wheel: While receiving a call, the incoming call screen is displayed on
the driver information interface. You can pick up the call using the left selector
wheel.
2 Receiving a Call P. 392
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
1Bluet ooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
377
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uUsing HFL
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
■
HFL Status Display
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Signal Strength
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone
is connected to HFL.
Roam Status
Call Name
Call Number
378
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
PHONE button
Recent Calls
*1
All
Pair a phone to the system.
Connect New Device
Change Device
Connects a paired phone.
Priority Device
Sets a device as the priority device.
Bluetooth Settings
Keypad
*1
Settings
Favorite
Contacts
*1
(Existing entry list)
Contacts
*1
Dialed
Missed
Received
Display the last outgoing, incoming, and missed calls.
Display the last outgoing calls.
Display the last missed calls.
Display the last incoming calls.
Dial the selected number in the favorite contacts list.
Display the phonebook of the paired phone.
Enter a phone number to dial.
Disconnect All Device
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Delete Device
Delete a previously paired phone.
*1: Available only when a phone is connected to HFL.
379
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
Ringtone
Select the ringtone stored in the connected cell phone.
Phone
Vehicle
Select the ringtone stored in HFL.
Auto Phone Call
Transfer
Hands-Free
System Clear
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle.
Clear the phone settings, paired phones, all favorite contacts entries, all
call history data, and all imported phonebook data.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
380
Features
■
To pair a cell phone (No phone has
been paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode.
3. Select Yes.
u The audio system will enter a waiting
mode for pairing.
4. Select Honda Civic from your phone.
u If you want to pair a phone from this
audio system, select Search from car
and follow the prompts.
When your phone appears on the list,
select it.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone matches.
This may vary by phone.
6. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.
■
Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
connected to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and return to the Bluetooth Settings
screen.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
: The phone can be used with HFL.
When pairing a phone from this audio system:
If your phone doesn’t appear on the audio/
information screen, select Search from phone and
search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, select Honda Civic.
381
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■
To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button.
u If a prompt appears asking to connect to
a phone, select No and proceed with
step 2.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth Settings.
4. Select Connect New Device.
u The audio system will enter a waiting
mode for pairing.
382
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
5. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode.
6. Select Honda Civic from your phone.
u If you want to pair a phone from this
audio system, select Search from car
and follow the prompts.
When your phone appears on the list,
select it.
7. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone matches.
This may vary by phone.
8. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.
u You can prioritize a Bluetooth® device at
the same time. Select Yes if you want to
prioritize the device.
383
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■
To change the currently paired phone
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth Settings.
4. Select Change Device.
u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Select a desired device name.
6. Select Both, Audio, or Phone.
u When another device is connected to
Android Auto and you select Both or
Phone, a confirmation message appears.
Select Continue.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
384
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■
To delete a paired phone
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth Settings.
4. Select Delete Device.
u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Select a phone you want to delete.
6. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
u When the device is connected to Android
Auto, a confirmation message appears.
Select Yes.
Continued
385
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
If paring between your phone and the system is executed while you are on the
phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer.
4. Select ON or OFF.
You can change the ringtone setting.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Ringtone.
4. Select Phone or Vehicle.
■
Automatic Transferring
■
Ringtone
1Ringtone
Phone: Depending on the make and model of the
cell phone, the ringtone stored in the phone will
sound if the phone is connected.
Vehicle: The fixed ringtone sounds from the
speakers.
386
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Phone settings, paired phones, all favorite contacts entries, all call history data, and
all imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Hands-Free System Clear.
4. Select Yes.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
6. A notification appears on the screen. Select
OK.
■
To Clear the System
Continued
387
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to HFL.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to five category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Pager
Work
Fax
Car
Other
Voice
388
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■
To add a favorite contact
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad.
3. Select the star icon.
3. Select Add to Favorites.
u A notification appears on the screen if
the favorite contact is successfully stored.
u To remove the favorite contact, select
the star icon again.
■
Favorite Contacts
Recent Calls Screen
Star Icon
Contacts Screen
Star Icon
Keypad Screen
Add to Favorites
On the Recent Calls or Contacts screen
On the Keypad screen
389
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■
To delete a favorite contact
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
3. Select the star icon.
4. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
390
Features
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
Recent Calls, Favorite Contacts, and Contacts entries.
■
To make a call using the imported phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically
imported to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Contacts.
3. Select a name. If more than one number is registered, select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
u The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
u You can sort by First Name or Last Name. Select the icon on the upper right
of the screen.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
Continued
391
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■
To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Keypad.
3. Select a number.
4. Select Call.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■
To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Recent Calls.
u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. Select the icon on the
upper right of the screen.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■
To make a call using a favorite contact
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is
connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed,
received, or missed calls.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
392
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds and the Incoming Call...
screen appears.
You can answer the call using the left selector
wheel.
To pick up the call, roll up or down to select
Answer on the driver information interface
and then press the left selector wheel.
u If you want to decline or end the call,
select Ignore on the driver information
interface using the left selector wheel.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Select Answer using the left selector wheel to put
the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Select Swap calls using the left selector wheel to
return to the current call.
Select Ignore using the left selector wheel to ignore
the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.
Select Hang up using the left selector wheel if you
want to hang up the current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the icons on the driver information
interface.
HFL Mode
Caller’s Name
393
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Swap Calls: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Use Handheld: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower
half of the screen.
Select the option.
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Keypad: Available on some phones.
Mute Icon
394
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■
HFL Buttons
1Bluet ooth® HandsFreeLink®
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit https://mygarage.honda.com/s/honda-
handsfreelink-compatibility-check, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
• Canada: Call 1-855-490-7351.
To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be
ON. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay,
HFL is unavailable.
2 Phone Setup P. 399
Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphones.
• If the microphones pick up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume.
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch
Left Selector Wheel
Continued
395
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uUsing HFL
Features
Left Selector Wheel: Roll up or down to select Phone on the driver information
interface, and then press the left selector wheel.
1Bluet ooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
396
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
■
HFL Status Display
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
■
Limitations for Manual Operation
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is
connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
Battery Level
Status
Caller’s Name (If registered)/
Caller’s Number (If not registered)
397
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.
■
Phone menu screen
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Menu.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving.
Ringtone
Select a fixed ringtone or the one from the connected cell phone.
Auto Sync Phone Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
Auto Phone Call Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
Keypad Enter a phone number to dial.
Latest Call History
Set whether the history shortcut is displayed in the phone screen.
398
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■
Phone screen
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.
Display the last outgoing, incoming, and missed calls.
Recents All
Dialed
Received
Display the last outgoing calls.
Display the last incoming calls.
Missed
Display the last missed calls.
(Existing entry list)
Dial the selected number in the favorite contacts list.
Contacts
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Go to Device List
Connect New Device
Pair a new phone to the system.
Connect, disconnect, or delete a paired device.
Press & Hold to
Add
From Recents
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a
favorite contact number.
From Contacts
Using Enter
Number
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a
favorite contact number.
Enter a phone number to store as a favorite contact number.
Menu
Change Devices
Display the phone menu screen.
399
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■
Bluetooth® setup
You can turn Bluetooth® function on and off.
1. Press the button.
2. Select General Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Manage Device Connections.
5. Select Options.
6. Set Bluetooth to ON.
■
Phone Setup
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
400
Features
■
To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Connect New Device.
4. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then select Search for
Devices.
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
5. Select your phone when it appears on the
list.
u If your phone still does not appear,
search for Bluetooth® devices using your
phone.
From your phone, search for Vehicle
Name.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the audio/
information screen and your phone
matches.
This may vary by phone.
6. Select Yes.
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
the system before you can make and receive hands-
free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or more icons on
the right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio
and HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Apple CarPlay.
: The phone is compatible with Android Auto.
Continued
401
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■
To change the currently paired phone
1. Go to the phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 398
2. Select Change Devices.
3. Select Go to Device List.
4. Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
5. Select or , .
6. Select Yes.
■
To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 398
2. Select Change Devices.
3. Select Go to Device List.
4. Select a phone you want to delete.
5. Select Delete Device.
6. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Delete.
1To change the currently paired phone
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, the original phone is
connected again.
To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device
from the Bluetooth screen.
You can also switch the connection with the icon,
or icon in the device list.
When or is selected, cannot be selected.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
402
Features
You can change the ringtone setting.
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 397
2. Select Ringtone.
3. Select Vehicle or Phone.
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 397
2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer.
3. Select On or Off.
■
Ringtone
■
Automatic Transferring
1Ringtone
Vehicle: The fixed ringtone sounds from the
speakers.
Phone: Depending on the make and model of the
cell phone, the ringtone stored in the phone will
sound if the phone is connected.
Continued
403
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
■
When Auto Sync Phone is set to ON:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to the system.
■
Changing the Auto Sync Phone setting
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 397
2. Select Auto Sync Phone.
3. Select On or Off.
■
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
On some phones, you will be asked to allow your
cellular phonebook to be imported.
When you select a name from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons
indicate what types of numbers are stored for that
name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to the system.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Home
Mobile Work
Other
Pref
404
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
To store a number as a favorite contact:
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select and hold Press & Hold to Add.
4. Select From Recents, From Contacts, or
Using Enter Number.
5. Select the phone number.
5. Input number, and select Enter.
■
Favorite Contacts
From Recents screen
From Contacts screen
Using Enter Number screen
From Recents, From Contacts
Using Enter Number
405
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■
To edit a favorite contact
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select and hold a favorite contact.
4. Select Edit Favorites.
5. Select a setting you want.
6. Select Enter or select type.
■
Add a favorite contact to the home screen
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select and hold a favorite contact.
4. Select Add to Home.
■
To delete a favorite contact
1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select and hold a favorite contact.
4. Select Remove Favorite.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
406
Features
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, or favorite contact
entries.
■
Making a Call
1Making a Call
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
While there is an active connection with Apple
CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with
HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple
CarPlay.
Phone screen
Phone menu screen
407
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■
To make a call using the imported phonebook
1. Go to the phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 398
2. Select Contacts.
3. Select a name.
u You can sort by First Name or Last Name. Select the icon on the upper right
of the screen.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■
To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 397
2. Select Keypad.
3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers.
4. Select Call.
u Dialing starts automatically.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
408
Features
■
To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, and Received.
1. Go to the phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 398
2. Select Recents.
u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. Select the icon on the
upper right of the screen.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■
To make a call using a favorite contact entry
1. Go to the phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 398
2. Select desired favorite contact.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is
connected to the system.
Continued
409
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® uHFL Menus
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call... screen appears.
You can answer the call using the left selector
wheel.
To answer the call, roll up or down to select
(answer) on the driver information
interface and then press the left selector
wheel.
u If you want to decline or end the call,
select (ignore) on the driver
information interface using the left
selector wheel.
■
Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Select (answer) to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Select using the left selector wheel to return to
the current call.
Select (ignore) to ignore the incoming call if you
do not want to answer it.
Select if you want to hang up the current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the and on the driver
information interface.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
410
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer to Mobile: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.
Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower
half of the screen.
Select the option.
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■
Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen.
411
Driving
This chapter discusses driving and refueling.
Before Driving................................... 412
Towing a Trailer................................ 417
When Driving
Starting the Engine .......................... 418
Precautions While Driving................. 425
Continuously Variable Transmission
*
... 426
Shifting............................ 427, 429, 433
ECON Button
*
................................. 437
Auto Idle Stop.......................... 438, 444
Drive Mode System
*
................ 449, 452
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA
®
), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System .............457
Agile Handling Assist ....................... 459
Limited Slip Differential (LSD)
*
......... 459
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....460
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ......... 465
Blind Spot Information System
*
....... 467
Honda Sensing® ................................ 471
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) ....................................... 474
Low Speed Braking Control
*
............ 487
Road Departure Mitigation System... 492
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow
*
............................... 500
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
........ 521
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).... 541
Traffic Jam Assist
*
........................... 553
Traffic Sign Recognition System ....... 562
Front Wide View Camera................. 568
Sonar Sensors
*
................................ 570
Braking .............................................. 571
Parking Your Vehicle........................ 583
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 594
Refueling........................................... 596
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions.... 599
Turbo Engine Vehicle
*
...................... 600
* Not available on all models
412
Driving
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving or fall off and impact other road users. If frozen solid,
remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 637
• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.
■
Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also, check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.
Continued
413
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415
• Do not pile items higher than the seatback height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 174
• Adjust your seating position properly.
2 Seats P. 207
u Adjust the front head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions P. 212
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Mirrors P. 205
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 204
■
Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
Continuously variable transmission models
414
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 49
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 90
415
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Continued
Driving
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the
Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories and all cargo.
2 Specifications P. 710, 712
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 710, 712
3
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
Label Example
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
416
Driving
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
1Maximum Load Limit
Towing a Trailer:
See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your
vehicle is designed to tow a trailer.
2 Towing a Trailer P. 417
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Example2
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
417
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.
Towing Behind a Motorhome
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 701
418
Driving
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) comes on for 30 seconds
when you pull up the electric parking
brake switch.
2. Check that the transmission is in
(P, then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in
(N, it is safer to start it in (P.
2. Check that the shift lever is in
(N. Then,
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Bring the keyless remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the keyless
remote is weak.
2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
P. 680
Electric Parking Brake Switch
Brake Pedal
Continuously variable transmission models
Clutch Pedal
Brake Pedal
Manual transmission models
Continued
419
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1Starting the Engine
The engine may not start if the keyless remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds
before starting the engine again.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 181
All models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
420
Driving
You can remotely start the engine using the keyless remote.
■
To start the engine
Press the button, then press and hold
the button.
u Some exterior lights flash once.
If the engine starts successfully, some exterior
lights flash six times.
■
Remote Engine Start
*
1Remote Engine Start
*
The remote engine start may violate local laws.
Before using the remote engine start, check your
local laws.
If there are buildings and obstacles between your
vehicle and the keyless remote, the range will be
reduced.
This distance may vary by external electrical
interference.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can
rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly
enclosed areas.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Never use the remote engine starter with
the vehicle parked in a garage or other
areas with limited ventilation.
LED: Blinks when any
button is pressed.
* Not available on all models
Continued
421
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
If the engine does not start, exterior lights will
not flash.
u Go within the range, and try again.
When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling
and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed
simultaneously.
To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the
button, then press and hold the button.
u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was
transmitted successfully.
1Remote Engine Start
*
The engine may not start by the remote engine start
if:
• You have disabled a remote engine start setting.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
• The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF.
• The transmission is in a position other than (P.
• The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked.
• You have already used the remote twice to start
the engine.
• Another registered keyless remote is in the vehicle.
• There is any antenna failure.
• The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
• The security system alarm is not set.
• The battery charge is too low.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
422
Driving
■
To stop the engine
Press and hold the button for one
second.
If the engine stops successfully, the exterior
lights flash once.
When the remote is out of the keyless access
system range, the exterior lights will not flash.
The engine will not stop.
u Go within the range, and try again.
1Remote Engine Start
*
The engine may stop while it is running if:
• You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of
starting the engine with the keyless remote.
• The engine is stopped by using the keyless remote.
• The security system alarm is not set.
• The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
• The hood is open, or any door, or the trunk is
unlocked.
• You press the shift lever release button.
• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
• The battery is low.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if there is
a problem with the emissions control systems.
While the engine is running, the vehicle will
automatically precondition inside the vehicle.
When it is warm outside:
• The climate control system is activated in
recirculation mode.
When it is cold outside:
• The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
• The rear defogger, heated door mirrors
*
, front seat
heaters
*
, and heated steering wheel
*
are activated.
2 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
Button P. 201
2 Front Seat Heaters
*
P. 229
2 Heated Steering Wheel
*
P. 228
* Not available on all models
Continued
423
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal, then press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the transmission into
(D. Select
(R when reversing.
3. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.
2 Parking Brake P. 571
■
Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Put the transmission into
(D, (S
*
, or (L
*
when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill,
or
(R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
■
Starting to Drive
1Starting to Drive
Engine Restart Function
If the engine stalls, fully depress the clutch pedal
within three seconds. The engine may automatically
restart under certain conditions. Otherwise, follow
the standard procedure.
2 Starting the Engine P. 418
The engine stops when the transmission is taken out
of
(P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.
You can also release the parking brake by pressing
the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
brake pedal.
When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle
more smoothly by manually releasing it with the
electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with
the accelerator pedal.
Manual transmission models
When the engine was started using the button on
the keyless remote
Continuously variable transmission models
When the engine was started using the button on the keyless remote
When the engine was started in any case
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
will not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is
switched off.
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
424
Driving
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1. Put the transmission into
(P.
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the transmission is in
(N, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the transmission is in any gear other than (N, depress the clutch pedal, then
press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
■
Stopping the Engine
1Stopping the Engine
The power mode will automatically turn to VEHICLE
OFF about 20 minutes after the following conditions
have been met:
• A door has been opened, such as when leaving the
vehicle.
• The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
• The transmission is in (P.
• The vehicle is completely stopped.
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
425
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Continued
Driving
Precautions While Driving
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
■
In Rain
■
Other Precautions
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while
driving, the engine will shut down and all steering
and brake power assist functions will stop, making it
difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not select
(N while driving as you will lose engine
braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as not to damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km)
after purchasing your new vehicle or replacing the
brake pads or rotors, to allow for proper break-in.
Continuously variable transmission models
uuWhen DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission
*
426
Driving
Continuously Variable Transmission
*
When the engine runs at higher idle speeds, the creeping force increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped or ensure that brake-hold is
engaged.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed.
Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
The following can damage the under spoiler:
• Parking the vehicle by a parking block
• Parallel parking along the road shoulder
• Driving towards the bottom of a hill
• Driving up or down to a different surface level
(such as a road shoulder)
• Driving on a rutted or bumpy road
• Driving on a road with potholes
■
Creeping
■
Kickdown
* Not available on all models
427
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■
Shift positions
Continuously variable transmission models without paddle shifters
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF unless the shift position is in
(P.
The vehicle may move very slightly even in
(N while
the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
Reverse
Used when reversing
Drive
Used for normal driving
Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine
Neutral
Transmission is not locked
Release Button
Drive (S)
Used:
●
For better acceleration
●
To increase engine braking
●
When going up or down hills
Low
●
Used to further increase engine braking
●
Used when going up or down hills
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
428
Driving
■
Shift Operation
1Shift Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift position from (D to (R
and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift position indicator to check the lever
position before pulling away.
If the transmission system indicator blinks when
driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with
the transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.
Shift Position Indicator
(Transmission System
Indicator)
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release
button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release button and shift.
Tachometer red zone
429
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■
Shift positions
Continuously variable transmission models with paddle shifters
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF unless the shift position is in
(P.
The vehicle may move very slightly even in
(N while
the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
Reverse
Used when reversing
Drive
Used:
●
For normal driving
●
When temporarily driving in the
7-speed manual shift mode
●
When driving in the 7-speed
manual shift mode (when driving
in SPORT mode)
Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine
Neutral
Transmission is not locked
Release Button
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
430
Driving
■
Shift Operation
1Shift Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift position from (D to (R
and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift position indicator to check the lever
position before pulling away.
If the transmission system indicator blinks when
driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with
the transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.
Shift Position Indicator
(Transmission System Indicator)
Press the shift lever release button and shift.
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release
button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator
Tachometer red zone
Continued
431
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without releasing
your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed
manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful
when engine braking is needed.
■
When the transmission is in (D:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the
number is displayed in the shift indicator.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant
speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off.
Pulling the
(+ paddle shifter for a few seconds will cancel this mode.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed
temporarily before making a turn.
■
When the transmission is in (D with SPORT mode:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the
speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down,
the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to
a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer red
zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.
You can only pull away in 1st speed.
When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, use the DRIVE MODE switch to
select other than SPORT mode or pull the
(+ paddle shifter for a few seconds.
When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift
indicator will turn off.
■
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode
In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission
shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter
under the following conditions:
Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed position.
Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the tachometer
red zone, the transmission shifts up automatically.
When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold
of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts
down automatically.
Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces
may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7-
speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back
to the normal
(D driving mode.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
432
Driving
■
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed
change.
To change continuously, release the paddle shifter
before pulling it again for the next speed.
The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or
down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its
allowable shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)
(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)
Downshifting when pulling
the
(- paddle shifter
(Changes to lower speed
number)
Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter
(Changes to higher speed
number)
433
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Continued
Driving
Shifting
Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then
slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into
(R, or
shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not
“grind.”
When you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your
clutch to wear out faster.
■
Shift Lever Operation
Manual transmission models
1Shifting
NOTICE
Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
Shifting to
(R before stopping can damage the
transmission.
NOTICE
Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not
go into the tachometer red zone. Should this occur, it
can severely damage your engine.
There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave
the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot
day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because
of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the
outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel
cold.
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you
are in, the engine speed will enter into the
tachometer red zone. When this happens, you may
experience a slight jolt.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
434
Driving
Adjusts the engine’s RPM to match the optimal speed of the gear that is about to be
engaged.
■
Limitations
The rev match system will not activate under the following conditions:
• You are shifting into a lower gear, but the system has determined that the engine
will over rev.
• You are shifting into 1st gear from a higher gear.
• Engine RPM is low and you are shifting into a lower gear in sequential order.
• The system has determined that the engine will be at idling speed after you have
shifted into a higher gear.
• The clutch pedal is not fully depressed.
The rev match system may deactivate if the clutch pedal is fully depressed for a
extended period of time.
■
Rev Match System
1Rev Match System
You can turn off the rev match system using the
audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 354
If you depress the accelerator pedal while changing
gears, the system may give priority to inputs from the
accelerator pedal depending on the amount of
depression of the accelerator pedal.
If the message below appears, there may be a
problem with the system. The rev match system may
not operate, but you can perform regular gear
shifting.
Have the system checked by a dealer.
Continued
435
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Come on to inform you that upshifting or
downshifting is necessary to prevent the
engine from over revving or stalling.
The shift up indicator: Comes on when
upshifting is recommended.
The shift down indicator: Comes on when
downshifting is recommended.
■
Shift Up/Down Indicators
1Shift Up/Down Indicators
This indicator will not prompt you to downshift to
increase engine braking. It is up to you to downshift
to increase engine braking when driving downhill.
Always shift down at the appropriate vehicle speed.
The shift down indicator does not come on when
downshifting from
(2 to (1.
Road and traffic conditions may require you to shift
at times other than those indicated.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
436
Driving
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally
shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain
speed.
If you cannot shift to
(R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:
1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to
(R.
2. If you still cannot shift into (R, apply the
parking brake, and set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into
(R.
4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.
■
Reverse Lockout
1Reverse Lockout
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you have to
go through this procedure repeatedly.
437
uuWhen DrivinguECON Button
*
Driving
ECON Button
*
The ECON button turns ECON mode on and off.
ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of
the engine, transmission and climate control system.
1ECON Button
*
While in ECON mode, the climate control system has
greater temperature fluctuation.
Due to emergency brakes operation or driving
conditions, you may not be able to change the mode.
ECON Mode Indicator ECON Button
* Not available on all models
438
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Driving
Auto Idle Stop
To help maximize fuel economy, the engine automatically stops when the vehicle
comes to a stop, depending on environmental and vehicle operating conditions. The
indicator (green) comes on at this time.
The environmental and vehicle conditions that
impact Auto Idle Stop system operation are
varied.
2 Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 440, 441
The engine then restarts once the vehicle is
about to move again, and the indicator
(green) goes off.
2 The Engine Automatically Restarts When:
P. 442
If the driver’s door is opened while the
indicator (green) comes on, a buzzer sounds
to notify you that the Auto Idle Stop function
is in operation.
A message associated with Auto Idle Stop
appears on the driver information interface.
Continuously variable transmission models
1Auto Idle Stop
The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is
specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop.
Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type
may shorten the 12-volt battery life, and prevent
Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace
the 12-volt battery, make sure to select the specified
type. Ask a dealer for more details.
The duration of the Auto Idle Stop operation:
• Increases in the ECON mode, compared to when
the ECON mode is off, with climate control in use.
2 ECON Button
*
P. 437
2 Drive Mode System
*
P. 449
Models without Drive Mode Switch
Models with Drive Mode Switch
Auto Idle Stop
Indicator (Green)
* Not available on all models
Continued
439
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Driving
The Auto Idle Stop suspend indicator comes
on and a message appears on the driver
information interface when the Auto Idle Stop
system cannot be activated.
2 Indicators P. 90
2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 439
To turn the Auto Idle Stop system off, press
this button. The Auto Idle Stop system stops.
u Auto Idle Stop system will stop, the
indicator will come on and a message
appears on the driver information
interface.
The Auto Idle Stop system is turned on every
time you start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the vehicle.
Auto Idle Stop
Suspend Indicator
■
Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
1Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
If you turn off the Auto Idle Stop system while it is
activated, the engine will restart.
If you press and hold the Auto Idle Stop OFF button,
you can select whether to display the status messages
or not.
Auto Idle Stop OFF
Indicator
Auto Idle Stop OFF
button
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
440
Driving
The vehicle stops with the transmission in (D and the brake pedal depressed.
When you put the transmission into (P quickly with depressing the brake pedal, the
Auto Idle Stop continues to operate, even if the brake pedal is released.
u If you depress the brake pedal, the engine may automatically restart.
■
Auto Idle Stop does not activate when:
• The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.
• The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
• The engine is not adequately warmed up or coolant temperature is high.
• The transmission fluid temperature is low or high.
• The vehicle comes to a stop again before the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5
km/h) after the engine starts.
• The vehicle is stopped on a steep incline.
• The transmission is in a position other than
(D.
• The engine is started with the hood open.
u Turn off the engine. Close the hood before you restart the engine to activate
Auto Idle Stop.
• The battery charge is low.
• The internal temperature of the battery is 41°F (5°C) or less.
• The climate control system is in use, and the outside temperature is below −4°F
(−20°C) or over 104°F (40°C).
• The climate control system is in use, and the temperature is set to Hi or Lo.
• is ON (indicator on).
• The drive mode is in the SPORT mode.
■
Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
1Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop
function is activated. If the hood is opened, the
engine will not restart automatically.
In this case, restart the engine with the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
2 Starting the Engine P. 418
Pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button causes
the engine to no longer restart automatically. Follow
the standard procedure to start the engine.
2 Starting the Engine P. 418
When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow is in operation, the vehicle stops
without depressing the brake pedal and Auto Idle
Stop may activate. In such cases, the engine may
restart if you change the shift position other than
(D.
Models with Drive Mode Switch
441
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Continued
Driving
■
Auto Idle Stop may not activate when:
• The vehicle is stopped by braking suddenly.
• The steering wheel is operated.
• The vehicle is repeatedly accelerated and decelerated at a low speed.
• The fan speed is high.
• The climate control system is in use, and there is a significant difference between
the set temperature and the actual interior temperature.
• The climate control system is in use, and humidity in the interior is high.
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
442
Driving
• The brake pedal is released (without the automatic brake hold system activated).
• The accelerator pedal is depressed (with the automatic brake hold system
activated).
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 576
• When the transmission is put into (P from (D or (N on a slope.
■
The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed
*1
when:
• The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.
• The steering wheel is operated.
• The transmission is put into
(R, (S
*
, or (L
*
, or when it is set from (N to (D.
u If you put the transmission into
(P after the Auto Idle Stop activates, the Auto
Idle Stop continues to operate. In this case, the engine restarts when you
depress the brake pedal.
• The pressure on the brake pedal is reduced and the vehicle starts moving while
stopped on an incline.
• The pressure on the brake pedal is repeatedly applied and released slightly during
a stop.
• The battery charge becomes low.
• The accelerator pedal is depressed.
• The driver’s seat belt is unlatched.
• is ON (indicator on).
• The climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set
temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant.
• The climate control system is being used to dehumidify the interior.
• The vehicle ahead of you starts again when your vehicle stops automatically with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow.
• The SPORT mode is selected by using the DRIVE MODE switch.
■
The Engine Automatically Restarts When:
1The Engine Automatically Restarts When:
If you are using an electronic device during Auto Idle
Stop, the device may temporarily be turned off when
the engine restarts.
1The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed
*1
when:
*1: With the automatic brake hold system activated,
you can release the brake pedal while Auto Idle Stop
is in operation.
If the automatic brake hold system has been turned
off, or if there is a problem with the system, the
engine will restart automatically when you release
the brake pedal.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 576
Models with Drive Mode Switch
* Not available on all models
443
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Driving
Briefly keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal to restart the engine.
This can keep your vehicle from unexpectedly moving while on an incline.
■
Starting Assist Brake Function
444
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Driving
Auto Idle Stop
To help maximize fuel economy, the engine automatically stops when the vehicle
comes to a stop, depending on environmental and vehicle operating conditions. The
indicator (green) comes on at this time.
The environmental and vehicle conditions that
impact Auto Idle Stop system operation are
varied.
2 Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 446, 447
The engine then restarts once the vehicle is
about to move again when you depress the
clutch pedal, and the indicator (green) goes
off.
2 The Engine Automatically Restarts When:
P. 448
If the driver’s door is opened while the
indicator (green) comes on, a buzzer sounds
to notify you that the Auto Idle Stop function
is in operation.
A message associated with Auto Idle Stop
appears on the driver information interface.
Manual transmission models
1Auto Idle Stop
The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is
specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop.
Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type
may shorten the 12-volt battery life, and prevent
Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace
the 12-volt battery, make sure to select the specified
type. Ask a dealer for more details.
Auto Idle Stop
Indicator (Green)
Continued
445
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Driving
The Auto Idle Stop suspend indicator comes
on and a message appears on the gauge
when the Auto Idle Stop system cannot be
activated.
2 Indicators P. 90
2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 445
To turn the Auto Idle Stop system off, press
this button. The Auto Idle Stop system stops.
u Auto Idle Stop system will stop, the
indicator will come on and a message
appears on the gauge.
The Auto Idle Stop system is turned on every
time you start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the vehicle.
Auto Idle Stop
Suspend Indicator
■
Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
1Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
If you turn off the Auto Idle Stop system while it is
activated, the engine will restart.
If you press and hold the Auto Idle Stop OFF button,
you can select whether to display the status messages
or not.
Auto Idle Stop OFF
Indicator
Auto Idle Stop OFF
button
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
446
Driving
After the vehicle moves forward, stopping with the brake, the clutch pedal fully
depressed, the shift lever in (N, and then the clutch pedal is released.
■
Auto Idle Stop does not activate when:
• The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.
• The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
• The engine is not adequately warmed up or coolant temperature is high.
• The vehicle comes to a stop again before the vehicle speed reaches 2 mph (3 km/h)
after the engine starts.
• The engine is started with the hood open.
u Turn off the engine. Close the hood before you restart the engine to activate
Auto Idle Stop.
• The battery charge is low.
• The internal temperature of the battery is 41°F (5°C) or less.
• The shift lever is in any position except
(N.
• The climate control system is in use, and the outside temperature is below −4°F
(−20°C) or over 104°F (40°C).
• The climate control system is in use, and the temperature is set to Hi or Lo.
• is ON (indicator on).
• The drive mode is in the SPORT mode.
■
Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
1Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop
function is activated. If the hood is opened, the
engine will not restart automatically.
In this case, restart the engine with the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
2 Starting the Engine P. 418
Pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button causes
the engine to no longer restarts automatically. Follow
the standard procedure to start the engine.
2 Starting the Engine P. 418
447
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Continued
Driving
■
Auto Idle Stop may not activate when:
• The steering wheel is operated.
• The fan speed is high.
• The climate control system is in use, and there is a significant difference between
the set temperature and the actual interior temperature.
• The climate control system is in use, and humidity in the interior is high.
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
448
Driving
The clutch pedal is depressed.
■
The engine automatically restarts even if the clutch pedal is not depressed
with the transmission in
(N when:
• The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.
• The steering wheel is operated.
• The pressure on the brake pedal is reduced and the vehicle starts moving while
stopped on an incline.
• The pressure on the brake pedal is repeatedly applied and released slightly during
a stop.
• The battery charge becomes low.
• is ON (indicator on).
• The climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set
temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant.
• The climate control system is being used to dehumidify the interior.
• The SPORT mode is selected by using the DRIVE MODE switch.
■
The Engine Automatically Restarts When:
1The Engine Automatically Restarts When:
If you are using an electronic device during Auto Idle
Stop, the device may temporarily be turned off when
the engine restarts.
The engine does not restart automatically when there
is a problem in the system. Follow the normal
procedure to start the engine.
2 Starting the Engine P. 418
The engine does not restart automatically when:
• The driver’s seat belt is unlatched.
• The transmission is put into a position other than
(N. Put the transmission into (N to restart the
engine.
NOTICE
Auto Idle Stop system also comes with stall recovery.
If you fully depress the clutch pedal after stalling the
engine, the engine automatically restarts.
2 Starting to Drive P. 423
When the system stops operating, follow the normal
procedure to start the engine.
2 Starting the Engine P. 418
449
uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System
*
Continued
Driving
Drive Mode System
*
Press the DRIVE MODE switch to select the appropriate mode. The mode you select
appears on the driver information interface.
■
Selecting the Drive Mode
Continuously variable transmission models
1Drive Mode System
*
The mode may not be able to be changed under
some driving conditions.
If there is a vehicle system failure, a message will also
appear on the driver information interface, and you
cannot change the mode.
DRIVE MODE Switch
SPORT
Mode
NORMAL
Mode
ECON
Mode
* Not available on all models
450
uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System
*
Driving
Enhances responsiveness to the driver's input.
Optimizes the balance between operability
and comfort.
■
SPORT Mode
■
NORMAL Mode
451
uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System
*
Driving
Facilitates fuel-efficient driving.
The mode for the next start-up is saved according to the following chart.
■
ECON Mode
1ECON Mode
While in ECON mode, the climate control system will
be less effective and the vehicle will be slower to
accelerate.
■
Next Start-up Mode
Last Mode Next Mode
SPORT NORMAL
NORMAL NORMAL
ECON ECON
452
uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System
Driving
Drive Mode System
Press the DRIVE MODE switch to select the appropriate mode. The mode you select
appears on the driver information interface and audio/information screen.
Manual transmission models
1Drive Mode System
The mode may not be able to be changed under
some driving conditions.
If there is a vehicle system failure, a message will also
appear on the driver information interface, and you
cannot change the mode.
453
uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System
Continued
Driving
■
Selecting the Drive Mode
Changing modes
by DRIVE MODE
switch alters the
screen on the
driver information
interface.
DRIVE MODE
Switch
Press the or button
Press the DRIVE MODE switch
up and hold or select
Customize P. 456
Press the DRIVE MODE switch
up or down
INDIVIDUAL Settings Screen
Audio/Information Screen
INDIVIDUAL Mode
SPORT Mode
NORMAL Mode
*1: The display returns to audio/information
screen a few seconds after pressing the
DRIVE MODE switch up or down.
*1
455
uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System
Continued
Driving
Optimizes the balance between operability
and comfort.
The mode for the next start-up is saved according to the following chart.
■
NORMAL Mode
■
Next Start-up Mode
Last Mode Next Mode
SPORT, NORMAL or INDIVIDUAL NORMAL
uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode System
456
Driving
1. Select INDIVIDUAL mode.
2. Press the DRIVE MODE switch up and hold
or select Customize to open the
INDIVIDUAL Settings.
u You can also select from Customized
Features on the 9-in. Color Touchscreen.
2 Selecting the Drive Mode P. 453
2 Customized Features P. 354
3. Select the setting category.
4. Select the desired setting.
■
Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings
1Customizing the INDIVIDUAL Settings
When you select Reset to Default on the
INDIVIDUAL Settings screen, all INDIVIDUAL
settings are reset to their factory defaults.
457
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Continued
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic brake system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
■
VSA® Operation
1Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF
*
, Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
/Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
*
, low tire pressure/TPMS
*
, and safety
support indicators may come on in amber along with a
message in the gauge when you set the power mode
to ON after reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
VSA® System
Indicator
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
458
Driving
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To partially disable VSA® functionality/
features, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
Your vehicle will have normal braking and
cornering ability, but traction control function
will be less effective.
To restore VSA® functionality/features, press
the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a
beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■
VSA® On and Off
1Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the button is pressed, the traction control
function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if
you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
VSA® OFF
Indicator
459
uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist
Driving
Agile Handling Assist
Lightly brakes the front wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and
helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering.
Limited Slip Differential (LSD)
*
LSD (limited slip differential) is a type of differential that delivers extra torque to the
wheel or the wheels with the most traction to minimize wheel slip and maintain
control of the vehicle.
1Agile Handling Assist
The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in
all driving situations. You still need to drive and
corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and
always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, the agile handling assist does not
activate.
You may hear a sound coming from the engine
compartment while the agile handling assist is
activated. This is normal.
1Limited Slip Differential (LSD)
*
NOTICE
Make sure both front tires of your vehicle are of the
same brand and specified size, and have equal wear.
Otherwise, the LSD may not function properly.
* Not available on all models
460
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated.
This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator to come on and a message to appear
on the gauge.
*1: Appears when any one tire is significantly under-inflated. (e.g., a front right side tire)
*2: Appears when two or more tires are significantly under-inflated.
U.S. models
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become overinflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come
on as a result of overinflation.
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 637
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
• You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
• You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
• Tire chains
*
are used.
• The tire loses air pressure rapidly.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
• A compact spare tire
*
is used.
• There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires than
the condition at calibration.
• Tire chains
*
are used.
Low Tire
Pressure/TPMS
Indicator
*1
*2
* Not available on all models
Continued
461
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 637
Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.
• The power mode is in ON.
• The transmission is in
(P.
• The shift lever is in
(N.
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF
*
, Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
/Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)
*
, low tire pressure/TPMS, and
safety support indicators may come on in amber
along with a message in the gauge when you set the
power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
■
TPMS Calibration
1TPMS Calibration
TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire
*
is
installed.
The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between
31-62 mph (50-100 km/h).
During this period, if power mode is set to ON and
the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may
notice the low tire pressure indicator comes on
briefly. This is normal and indicates that the
calibration process is not yet complete.
If the tire chains
*
are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
462
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
You can calibrate the system from the settings
on the driver information interface.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
1. Press the (home) button and roll the left
selector wheel to select screen, then
press the left selector wheel.
u Vehicle settings appears on the display.
2. Roll the left selector wheel.
u TPMS calibration appears on the
display.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
463
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Continued
Driving
3. Press the left selector wheel.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select Cancel or Calibrate.
4. Roll the left selector wheel and select
Calibrate, then press the left selector
wheel.
u Calibration started screen appears,
then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.
• If the Calibration failed to start message
appears, repeat step 4.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.
464
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
When you calibrate the TPMS, do the
following.
2 9-in. Color Touchscreen P. 267
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the button.
3. Select Vehicle Settings.
4. Select TPMS Calibration.
5. Select Calibrate.
• If the Calibration failed to start message
appears, repeat step 5.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
465
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Continued
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
U.S. models
466
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
467
uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System
*
Continued
Driving
Blind Spot Information System
*
When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the
appropriate indicator comes on, providing assistance when you change lanes.
The system activates when your vehicle is moving forward at about 20 mph (32 km/h)
or above.
Alert zone range
A: Approx. 1.6 ~ 10 feet (0.5 ~ 3 meters) from vehicle side.
B: Approx. 10 feet (3 meters) from rear bumper.
C: Approx. 10 ~ 82 feet (3 ~ 25 meters) behind from rear bumper. (The faster the
approaching vehicle, the further away it will be detected.)
The initially set alert zone is alert zone 1. Over time, after the vehicle has been driven
on straight roads with traffic and roadside objects, the system will adapt and expand
the alert zone (alert zone 1 and 2).
■
How the System Works
1Blind Spot Information System
*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the blind spot information
system has limitations. Always look in your mirrors, to
either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes. Overreliance on the
blind spot information system may result in a
collision.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer in the
following situations:
• The rear bumper or area around the radar sensors
is strongly impacted.
• The indicator does not come on even if a vehicle in
the alert zone should have been detected.
• The rear bumper or any system components need
to be repaired.
If the rear bumper or any system components are
repaired, the system will revert to alert zone 1 only
until it is able to adapt and expand to alert zone 1
and 2.
Radar Sensors : underneath
the rear bumper corners
: Alert zone 1
A
BC
: Alert zone 2
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System
*
468
Driving
■
When the system detects a vehicle
Blind spot information system alert indicator:
Located on the outside door mirror on both
sides.
Comes on when:
• A vehicle approaches you from behind to
overtake you at a speed difference of no
more than about 31 mph (50 km/h).
• You pass a vehicle at a speed difference of
no more than about 12 mph (20 km/h).
Blinks and a beeper sounds when:
You use the turn signal lever to signal a turn in
the direction of the detected vehicle while the
blind spot information system alert indicator is
on.
u The beeper sounds three times.
1Blind Spot Information System
*
For proper blind spot information system operation:
• Always keep the rear bumper and area around the
radar sensors clean.
• Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with
labels or stickers of any kind.
The system is for your convenience only. Even if an
object is within the alert zone, the following
situations may occur:
• The blind spot information system alert indicator
does not come on and the Blind spot
information system not available message
appears on the driver information interface.
• The blind spot information system alert indicator
may come on even with the message displayed.
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF
*
, Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
/Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)
*
, low tire pressure/TPMS
*
, and
safety support indicators may come on in amber
along with a message in the gauge when you set the
power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Comes On
Blinks
* Not available on all models
Continued
469
uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System
*
Driving
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
2 Switching the Display P. 115, 143
2 Safety Support P. 124, 155
The blind spot information system will stay on the previously selected on or off
setting each time you start the engine.
■
Blind Spot Information System On and Off
1Blind Spot Information System
*
You can change the settings for the blind spot
information system.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
* Not available on all models
470
uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System
*
Driving
The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on under the
following conditions:
• There is a large speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle in the
adjacent lane.
• A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
• An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle.
• The vehicle driving in the adjacent lane is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.
The blind spot information system may not operate correctly under the following
conditions:
• Making a turn at an intersection.
• Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc.) are detected.
• An object that does not reflect radio waves well or a motorcycle, is in the alert
zone.
• Driving on a curved road.
• A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent lane.
• The system picks up signal interference such as other radar sensors from another
vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
• The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors is covered by dirt, mud,
snow, ice, etc.
• The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors has been damaged or
deformed.
• In bad weather (heavy rain, snow, and fog).
• Making a short turn or driving on a bumpy road that slightly tilts the vehicle.
• An object such as a bicycle rack is attached to the rear of the vehicle.
■
Blind Spot Information System Conditions and Limitations
471
Continued
Driving
Honda Sensing®
Assists with functions such as acceleration, braking, and steering in order to reduce
the burden on the driver, as well as help avoid or reduce the severity of collisions.
Honda Sensing® has the following functions:
■
The functions that do not require switch operations to activate
• Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) 2 P. 474
• Low Speed Braking Control
*
2 P. 487
• Road Departure Mitigation System 2 P. 492
• Traffic Sign Recognition System 2 P. 562
• Auto High-Beam 2 P. 196
• Blind Spot Information System
*
2 P. 467
• Cross Traffic Monitor
*
2 P. 590
• Parking Sensor System
*
2 P. 585
• Driver Attention Monitor 2 P. 121, 149
■
The functions that require switch operations to activate
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
2 P. 500
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
2 P. 521
• Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 541
• Traffic Jam Assist
*
2 P. 553
1Honda Sensing®
Make sure that all the tires are of the same specified
size, type, and brand, and that they are evenly worn.
If you use tires of different sizes, types, brands, or
degree of wear, the system may not work properly.
Do not modify the suspension. Altering the height of
the vehicle may prevent the system from working
properly.
* Not available on all models
472
uuHonda Sensing® u
Driving
■
Button
Press to activate standby mode for ACC with
Low Speed Follow
*
/ACC
*
.
Or press to cancel the system.
■
LKAS Button
Press to activate standby mode for LKAS and
Traffic Jam Assist
*
.
Or press to cancel these systems.
■
Interval Button
Press to change the ACC with Low Speed
Follow
*
/ACC
*
following-interval.
■
CANCEL Button
Press to cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow
*
/
ACC
*
.
■
RES/+/SET/− Switch
Press the RES/+/SET/− switch up to set or
resume the ACC with Low Speed Follow
*
/
ACC
*
or increase the vehicle speed.
Press the RES/+/SET/− switch down to set the
ACC with Low Speed Follow
*
/ACC
*
or
decrease the vehicle speed.
■
Operation Switches for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
with Low Speed Follow
*
/Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
/
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)/Traffic Jam Assist
*
Interval Button
Button
LKAS Button
CANCEL Button
RES/+/SET/− Switch
* Not available on all models
473
uuHonda Sensing® u
Driving
You can see the current state of Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow
*
/Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
, Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS), and
Traffic Jam Assist
*
.
a Indicates that ACC with Low Speed
Follow
*
/ACC
*
is ready to be activated.
• Green: The system is on.
• White: The system is standby.
• Amber: There is a problem with the system.
b Indicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist
*
is
ready to be activated.
• Green: The system is operating.
• White: The system is standby.
• Amber: There is a problem with the system.
c Indicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist
*
is
activated and whether or not traffic lane
lines are detected.
• Green lines: The system is operating.
• White lines: Traffic lane lines are detected.
• Amber line: Lane departure is detected.
d Indicates whether or not a vehicle is
detected ahead.
• Control target vehicle: White and outlined
in green
• Outside of control target vehicle: Gray
e Indicates that ACC with Low Speed
Follow
*
/ACC
*
shows the set vehicle speed.
f Indicates that ACC with Low Speed
Follow
*
/ACC
*
shows the set vehicle
interval.
■
Gauge Content
6
Models with A-type meter
6
Models with B-type meter
Models with B-type meter
* Not available on all models
474
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle
colliding with a vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead from behind, an oncoming
vehicle in front, a vehicle approaching from the side, a pedestrian, or someone
riding a bicycle (moving bicycle).
The CMBS
TM
is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined,
as well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding collisions, and reducing collision
severity.
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Important Safety Reminder
The CMBS
TM
is designed to reduce the severity of an
unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collisions
nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your
responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering
wheel appropriately according to the driving
conditions.
The CMBS
TM
may not activate or may not detect a
vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain
conditions:
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 479
You can read about handling information for the
front wide view camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
When the CMBS
TM
is activated, it will continue to
operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially
depressed. However, it will be canceled if the
accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
When the CMBS
TM
activates, the engine may stop
automatically. Start the engine by normal operation if
the engine stops.
2 Starting the Engine P. 418
Manual transmission models
Continued
475
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■
How the system works
The CMBS
TM
will be canceled when your vehicle stops or the system determines
there no longer is the potential for a collision.
The CMBS
TM
may also be canceled when a driver operates the steering wheel and
the brake or accelerator pedal to avoid a collision.
1How the system works
The front wide view camera in the CMBS
TM
is also
designed to detect pedestrians.
However, this pedestrian detection feature may not
activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of
your vehicle under certain conditions.
Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection
limitations from the list.
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 479
The front wide view camera is located
behind the rearview mirror.
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about
3 mph (5 km/h) or above and will search for a vehicle (including motorcycles),
pedestrian, or moving bicycle in front of you.
The CMBS
TM
activates when:
●
The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle (including motorcycles),
pedestrian, or moving bicycle detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5
km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.
●
Your vehicle drives at about 18 mph (30 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a
frontal collision with a detected oncoming vehicle (including motorcycles),
pedestrian, or moving bicycle when you turn left at an intersection.
●
Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines
there is a chance of a collision with:
- An oncoming or stationary vehicle detected in front of you.
- A pedestrian or moving bicycle detected in front of you.
- A vehicle approaching from the side in front of you.
When to use
476
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■
When the system activates
You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the
system’s earliest collision alert will come on.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
When in Long, visual and audible alerts come on at a longer distance from a vehicle
ahead than in Normal setting, and in Short, at a shorter distance than in Normal.
The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the
collision is avoided.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.)
Visual Alerts
Beep
Audible Alert
477
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBS
TM
may not go through all of
the stages before initiating the last stage.
■
Collision Alert Stages
Distance between vehicles
CMBS
TM
The sensors detect a vehicle Audible & Visual WARNINGS Braking
Stage
one
There is a risk of a collision with the
vehicle ahead of you.
The visual alert flashes.
If the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you continues to
decrease, the audible alert sounds in
addition to the visual alert flashing.
u The collision warning distance can
be changed.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
—
Stage
two
The risk of a collision has increased,
time to respond is reduced.
Visual and audible alerts.
Lightly applied
Stage
three
The CMBS
TM
determines that a
collision is unavoidable.
Forcefully applied
Your Vehicle Vehicle
Ahead
Normal
ShortLong
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
478
Driving
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
2 Switching the Display P. 115, 143
2 Safety Support P. 124, 155
The CMBS
TM
is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off
the last time you drove the vehicle.
■
CMBS
TM
On and Off
1Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
You cannot turn the CMBS
TM
off while driving.
The CMBS
TM
may automatically shut off, and the
safety support indicator (amber) will come and stay
on under certain conditions:
2 CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations P. 479
The CMBS
TM
is not activated for about 15 seconds
after the engine starts.
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF
*
, Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
/Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)
*
, low tire pressure/TPMS
*
, and
safety support indicators may come on in amber
along with a message in the gauge when you set the
power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
* Not available on all models
479
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
In the following situations, the front wide view camera may be unable to correctly
detect vehicles, pedestrians, moving bicycles, or road conditions, potentially causing
the CMBS
TM
to operate improperly.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
■
Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• There is little contrast between objects and the background.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto vehicles (including motorcycles), pedestrians,
moving bicycles, or road surfaces.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
• Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
vehicles [including motorcycles], pedestrians, or moving bicycles may not be
illuminated).
■
Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
■
CMBS
TM
Conditions and Limitations
480
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■
Vehicle conditions
• Tire chains
*
are installed.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
• The front wide view camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow,
accessories, decals, stickers, film, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire
*
, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
• The suspension has been modified.
• Driving with the parking brake applied.
• Camera vision is blocked by drops of water from the window washer, or by the
wiper blades.
• Operation of the vehicle is unstable due to a slippery road, etc.
* Not available on all models
481
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
■
Examples of limitations on the correct detection of the front wide view
camera due to the condition of the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming
vehicles, vehicle approaching from the side, pedestrians, or moving bicycles
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead
of you, oncoming vehicle, vehicle approaching from the side, pedestrian, or
moving bicycle ahead of you is too short.
• The vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, vehicle
approaching from the side, pedestrian, or moving bicycle suddenly cuts in front of
or jumps out in front of you.
• The bicycle is stopped.
• The oncoming vehicle or vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you is sideways
or facing diagonally.
• When the vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, vehicle
approaching from the side, pedestrian, or moving bicycle blends in with the
background, preventing the system from recognizing them.
• When several pedestrians are moving ahead of you in a group.
• When several bicycles are moving ahead of you in a group.
• When a pedestrian or moving bicycle crosses the road too quickly.
• A pedestrian or moving bicycle approaches from the opposite direction.
• The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you or oncoming vehicle are lit on one side
or not lit on either side in a dark place.
• When part of a pedestrian (heads, limbs, etc.) is hidden by a carried object.
• When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, when their hands are raised, or they
are running.
• When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about
6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
• When the pedestrian is pushing a stroller or bicycle.
• A vehicle is approaching diagonally from the side.
• A specially-shaped vehicle (such as a tank lorry or a lorry without a load) is
approaching from the side.
• A vehicle approaching from the side is driving on a curve or hill.
482
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
■
Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation
• When the vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you is a small motorcycle,
motorcycle with a sidecar, wheelchair, or other specially shaped vehicle.
• When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not
carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle.
• When the vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you, oncoming vehicle,
pedestrian, or moving bicycle is not in front of the vehicle.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle (including
motorcycles) ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle is
significantly large.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle, pedestrian, or moving
bicycle approaching from the side is significantly large.
• When the vehicle (including motorcycles) or moving bicycle in front of you slows
suddenly.
• When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel to avoid a collision.
• When you approach the vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you, oncoming
vehicle, pedestrians, or moving bicycles while accelerating rapidly or operating
the steering wheel (except when turning left at an intersection etc.)
*1
• When the moving bicycle is a child-sized bicycle, folding bicycle, three-wheeler or
other bicycle with small tires, or a long bicycle like a tandem bicycle.
• When the front wide view camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the
vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, vehicle
approaching from the side, pedestrian, or moving bicycle.
• When a vehicle (including motorcycles) that has an extremely high minimum
ground clearance is ahead of you or approaching from the side.
*1: When there is a possibility of a frontal collision with the oncoming vehicle while turning left, the CMBS
TM
is activated. However, it may not be activated if you suddenly turn the steering wheel.
483
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
■
Automatic shutoff
The CMBS
TM
may automatically shut itself off and the safety support indicator
(amber) comes and stays on when:
• You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Driving with the parking brake applied.
• The front wide view camera temperature gets too high.
• The front wide view camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow,
accessories, stickers, film, etc. on the windshield.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected (incorrect tire size, flat tire, etc.).
Once the conditions that caused the CMBS
TM
to shut off improve or are addressed
(e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.
484
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
Even if there is little chance of a collision, the CMBS
TM
may activate under the
following conditions.
Also, the system may activate if it detects a possibility of collision with pedestrians,
moving bicycles, or vehicles.
• Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right
turn.
• Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to
pass.
■
With Little Chance of a Collision
485
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Continued
Driving
• When your vehicle approaches vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles.
• When vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles are passing in front of you.
• When you drive under a low structure or through a narrow gate at high speed.
• When there are traffic signs or structures such as guard rails beside the road along
a curve.
• When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where the oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.
• When approaching stationary vehicles or walls, such as when parking.
486
uuHonda Sensing® uCollision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
)
Driving
• A vehicle approaches from the side as it is driving through a curve.
• You pass by a vehicle (including motorcycles), pedestrian, or bicycle that is turning
left or right.
• You pass in front of a vehicle (including motorcycles), pedestrian, or bicycle that
is approaching from the side.
• A vehicle (including motorcycles), pedestrian, or bicycle turns left or right while
approaching your vehicle from the side.
• You attempt to pass in front of a vehicle (including motorcycles) or bicycle while
you are turning left or right.
• A vehicle (including motorcycles) or bicycle is attempting to pass in front of your
vehicle while you are turning left or right.
• A vehicle (including motorcycles), pedestrian, or bicycle enters the path of your
vehicle and stops in front of you.
• When you are turning left or right, a crossing pedestrian enters the path of your
vehicle and stops in front of you.
• You pass close by the side of a vehicle parked on the street.
487
uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control
*
Continued
Driving
Low Speed Braking Control
*
Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers and the front grille, this
system can detect if there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other
obstacle during normal driving. The system then assists in avoiding collisions and
reducing damage from impact through assistive braking.
1Low Speed Braking Control
*
If the Low Speed Braking Control activates in a
situation where you do not want automatic brake
application (such as when the vehicle is between two
railroad crossing gates), simply press the brake pedal
to deactivate the system and then continue to drive
as intended.
3
WARNING
The Low Speed Braking Control System
cannot avoid all collisions and may not
reduce damage in each situation where the
accelerator is mistakenly or aggressively
pressed. Overreliance on the system may
result in a collision with serious injury or
death. Always check your surroundings,
your shift position, and your pedal use.
Driver remains responsible for safely
operating the vehicle.
* Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing® uLow Speed Braking Control
*
488
Driving
The Low Speed Braking Control provides a visual and audible alert when the vehicle
is moving between approximately 1 and 6 mph (2 and 10 km/h) and there is the
possibility of a collision with a detected wall or other obstacles, as well as providing
assistance with braking.
If only the rear parking sensors are turned off, the Low Speed Braking Control will
not work when reversing.
2 Customized Features P. 354
■
How the System Works
1Low Speed Braking Control
*
For directions on the proper handling of the sonar
sensors, please refer to the following page.
2 Sonar Sensors
*
P. 570
The vehicle will release the brake a few seconds after
the system is activated. Keep the brake pedal
depressed.
In order to prevent the system from activating when
not needed, always turn it off during vehicle
maintenance; when loading on ships, trucks, and so
on; when using a chassis dynamometer or free rollers
for inspection; or when washing the car in a conveyor
type car wash machine.
If you put any accessories (such as a bicycle rack) on
or around the rear sensors, the Low Speed Braking
Control System may activate if it detects these
accessories as an obstacle. In this case, turn off the
rear sensor.
2 Customized Features P. 354
Audible Alert
Beep
The vehicle
applies brake
Driver
depresses
brake pedal
Release
brake after
maintaining
stationary
position
Stop
* Not available on all models
Continued
489
uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control
*
Driving
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
2 Switching the Display P. 143
2 Safety Support P. 155
The system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the
last time you drove the vehicle.
■
System On and Off
1System On and Off
The system may temporarily turn off after
reconnecting the battery.
The system will automatically turn ON after the
vehicle has been moving at over 12 mph (20 km/h)
for some time.
If the system does not turn on, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
uuHonda Sensing® uLow Speed Braking Control
*
490
Driving
A certain amount of time has passed since activation.
The system may not operate correctly in the following conditions:
■
Examples of obstacles the sonar sensor cannot detect
• Obstacles that do not reflect sound waves well, such as people, snow, cloth,
sponges, etc.
• Thin obstacles such as fences, bicycles, sign posts, etc.
• Short or small obstacles.
• Obstacles immediately in front of the bumper.
• Moving objects or obstacles that suddenly enter the road.
• Obstacles that are not perpendicular to the ground.
■
Examples of situations where the sonar sensor cannot detect obstacles
• The sonar sensor is dirty (covered by snow, water, mud, etc.).
• The vehicle is too hot or cold.
• The steering wheel is turned sharply when approaching the obstacle at an angle.
■
Conditions for Cancellation
■
Low Speed Braking Control System Conditions and Limitations
1Conditions for Cancellation
After Low Speed Braking Control has activated once,
it will not activate again for the same obstacle.
It can be activated again after driving for a certain
distance after last activation.
Low Speed Braking Control activates separately when
moving forward and reversing. (For example, if it
activates when moving forward, it can be activated
again immediately if reversing.)
491
uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control
*
Driving
■
Examples of other cases where the system may not work correctly
• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load or suspension modifications.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• Bad weather conditions such as heavy rain, fog, snow, sandstorms, etc.
• The ambient temperature/humidity is too high or low.
• When going down a very steep slope.
• When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or other objects that emit
ultrasonic waves.
■
Situations where the system may activate even without risk of a collision
• When passing through short or narrow gates.
• When driving on uneven surfaces, grassy areas, or places with steps.
• When a sloped pillar or wall is protruding from a high position.
• When there are obstacles next to the road.
• When driving toward flags, curtains, tree branches, railroad crossing bars, etc.
• When driving on flooded roads.
492
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Driving
Road Departure Mitigation System
Alerts and helps assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle
crossing over detected lane markings, or approaching the outer edge of the
pavement (into grass or gravel road shoulder) or a detected oncoming vehicle.
The front wide view camera behind the
rearview mirror monitors left and right lane
markings in white or yellow, the outer edge of
the pavement (into grass or gravel road
shoulder), or a detected oncoming vehicle.
If your vehicle approaches any detected lane
markings, the outer edge of the pavement
(into grass or gravel road shoulder), or a
detected oncoming vehicle when the turn
signals have not been engaged, the system
activates.
u If the system cannot detect lane markings
(in white or yellow), no assistance will be
provided to avoid approaching oncoming
vehicles. In addition to a visual alert, the
system assists with steering and alerts you
with rapid steering wheel vibrations to
help you remain within the detected lane.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
As a visual alert, the Lane departure message
appears on the driver information interface.
*1: Models with A-type meter
*2: Models with B-type meter
■
How the System Works
1Road Departure Mitigation System
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the Road Departure
Mitigation system has limitations.
Overreliance on the Road Departure Mitigation
system may result in a collision. It is always your
responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving
lane.
The Road Departure Mitigation system alerts you
when the system detects that you are approaching
the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel
road shoulder), an oncoming vehicle, or drifting into
another lane without using a turn signal.
The Road Departure Mitigation system may not detect
all lane markings or every instance of lane drift.
The Road Departure Mitigation system may not
detect that you are approaching the outer edge of
the pavement (into grass or gravel road shoulder) or
an oncoming vehicle.
The Road Departure Mitigation system may not be
able to assist you depending on weather, speed or
road conditions.
The Road Departure Mitigation system is not activated
for about 15 seconds after the engine starts.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
The Road Departure Mitigation system may not work
properly or may work improperly under the certain
conditions:
2 Road Departure Mitigation system
Conditions and Limitations P. 496
Amber line
*1
*2
Continued
493
uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Driving
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid
crossing over detected lane markings or approaching the outer edge of the
pavement (into grass or gravel road shoulder) or an oncoming vehicle.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system
beeps to alert you.
1Road Departure Mitigation System
There are times when you may not notice the Road
Departure Mitigation system functions due to your
operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.
You can change the settings for the Road Departure
Mitigation system.
If LKAS is off, the message below may appear if the
system has determined that there is a possibility of
your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings,
the outer edge of the pavement (into a grass or
gravel road shoulder), or an oncoming vehicle.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System
494
Driving
The system activates when all of the following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking, or steering.
■
How the System Activates
1How the System Activates
The Road Departure Mitigation system may
automatically shut off and the safety support
indicator (amber) comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 90
The Road Departure Mitigation system function can
be impacted when the vehicle is:
• Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
• Driven in a narrow lane.
Continued
495
uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Driving
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
2 Switching the Display P. 115, 143
2 Safety Support P. 124, 155
The Road Departure Mitigation system is in the previously selected on or off setting
each time you start the engine.
*1: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
*2: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
■
Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off
1Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off
When you have selected Warning only
*1
/Warning
Only
*2
, the system does not operate the steering
wheel.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF
*
, Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
/Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)
*
, low tire pressure/TPMS
*
, and
safety support indicators may come on in amber
along with a message in the gauge when you set the
power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
496
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Driving
The system may not properly detect lane markings (in white or yellow), the outer
edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel road shoulder), or an oncoming vehicle
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.
■
Environmental conditions
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are
parallel to white (or yellow) lines.
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
lane lines, the road surface, or oncoming vehicles may not be illuminated).
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and
lane lines and the road surface are not visible.
• The outer edge of the road is bordered by objects, materials, etc. other than grass
or gravel.
■
Road Departure Mitigation system Conditions and Limitations
497
uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Continued
Driving
■
Roadway conditions
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or deteriorated lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or
crosswalk.
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
(or yellow) lines.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• Driving on roads with double lane lines.
• Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
• Passing through an exit or an interchange.
• The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.
• Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.
• White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as
curves, twists, or hills.
498
uuHonda Sensing® uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Driving
■
Vehicle conditions
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow,
accessories, decals, stickers, film, etc.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
• When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire
*
, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
• Tire chains
*
are installed.
• The suspension has been modified.
■
Examples of limitations on detection due to the condition of oncoming
vehicles
• The oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead of you is sideways.
• The oncoming vehicle jumps out in front of you.
• When the oncoming vehicle blends in with the background, preventing the
system from recognizing it.
• The headlights of an oncoming vehicle are lit on one side or not lit on either side
in a dark place.
• The distance between your vehicle and the oncoming vehicle is too short.
• Part of the oncoming vehicle is not visible due to the vehicle ahead of you.
• There are multiple oncoming lanes or turning lanes.
• The vehicle in the adjacent lane is parked or moving at an extremely slow speed.
* Not available on all models
499
uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Driving
■
Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation
• When the oncoming vehicle is specially-shaped.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the oncoming vehicle.
■
With Little Chance of a Collision
The Road Departure Mitigation system may activate in the below conditions.
• When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.
500
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Driving
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate
and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your
vehicle’s brake lights will illuminate.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
3
WARNING
Improper use of ACC with Low Speed Follow
can lead to a crash.
Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only when
driving on expressways or freeways and in
good road and weather conditions.
3
WARNING
ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited
braking capability and may not stop your
vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a
vehicle that quickly stops in front of you.
Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal
if the conditions require.
When to use
■
Vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow: A vehicle is detected ahead
within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with Low Speed Follow
operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
No vehicle is detected within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with
Low Speed Follow operates at the speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or above.
■
Shift position for ACC with Low Speed Follow: In (D or (S
*
.
The front wide view camera is
located behind the rearview
mirror.
* Not available on all models
Continued
501
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Driving
■
How to activate the system
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low
Speed Follow. Use the brake pedal whenever
necessary, and always keep a safe interval between
your vehicle and other vehicles.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly
under certain conditions.
2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions
and Limitations P. 508
When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow: Turn
off adaptive cruise by pressing the button.
3
WARNING
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped
while the ACC with Low Speed Follow
system is operating can result in the vehicle
moving without operator control.
A vehicle that moves without operator
control can cause a crash, resulting in
serious injury or death.
Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is
stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.
How to use
■
Press the button on the
steering wheel.
(white) is on in the gauge
ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to use.
* Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
502
Driving
When driving at about 20 mph (30 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the
pedal and press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down when you reach the desired
speed. The moment you release the switch, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with Low
Speed Follow begins.
When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the
Electric Power Steering system) is activated.
By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull,
Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.
When driving slower than about 20 mph (30 km/h): If the vehicle is moving
and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the switch fixes the set speed to
about 20 mph (30 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If your vehicle is
stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the
following conditions:
• On roads with frequent lane change or continuous
stop and go traffic, ACC with Low Speed Follow
cannot keep an appropriate distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you.
• On roads with sharp turns.
• On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.
• On roads with bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.),
ACC with Low Speed Follow may not detect the
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you properly.
• On roads with slippery or icy surfaces. The wheels
may spin out and your vehicle may lose the control
on the condition.
• On roads with steep uphill or steep downhill slopes.
• On roads with undulating slopes.
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/
TPMS
*
, and safety support indicators may come on in
amber along with a message in the gauge when you
set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the
battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
On when ACC with
Low Speed Follow
begins
Up or down
(green)
RES/+/SET/− Switch
* Not available on all models
Continued
503
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Driving
When ACC with Low Speed Follow starts
operating, the vehicle icon, interval bars, and
set speed appear on the gauge.
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface
between mph and km/h.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 No Content P. 126
Set Vehicle Speed
Set Vehicle Interval
(green)
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
504
Driving
■
There is a vehicle ahead
ACC with Low Speed Follow monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with
Low Speed Follow range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with Low Speed
Follow system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the
vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 513
■
When in Operation
1When in Operation
If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if
another vehicle cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds
and a message appears on the driver information
interface.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
interval from the vehicle ahead.
Beep
ACC with Low Speed Follow Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
Continued
505
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Driving
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed is detected in front of you, your
vehicle starts to slow down.
A vehicle icon appears on the
gauge.
1When in Operation
Even if the interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with Low Speed
Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the
following circumstances:
• The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
• A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval
between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in
front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with
Low Speed Follow detecting range. A vehicle detect
beep on and off can be selected.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
Limitations
You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
interval when using ACC with Low Speed Follow.
Additionally, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not
work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions
and Limitations P. 508
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
506
Driving
■
There is no vehicle ahead
Your vehicle maintains the set speed without
having to keep your foot on the brake or
accelerator pedal.
If there previously was a vehicle detected
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow
accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and
then maintains it.
While driving down steep hills, ACC with Low
Speed Follow brakes to inhibit excessive
acceleration for maintaining the set speed.
However, the vehicle speed may become
faster than the set speed.
■
When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or
visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.
ACC with Low Speed Follow stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the
accelerator pedal, the system resumes the set speed.
There are times when the vehicle speed will decrease when the accelerator pedal is
lightly applied.
1When in Operation
• ACC with Low Speed Follow may temporarily
control the interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle in adjacent lane or surroundings of your
vehicle depending on the road conditions (e.g.,
curves) or vehicle conditions (e.g., operating the
steering wheel or the vehicle location in the lane).
• When the vehicle ahead of you moves away, such
as when entering an interchange or rest area, ACC
with Low Speed Follow may continue to maintain
the set following-interval for a short time.
A vehicle icon with line contour
appears on the gauge.
507
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Continued
Driving
■
A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and
slows to a stop
Your vehicle also stops automatically. The
Stopped message appears on the gauge.
When the vehicle ahead of you starts again, if
you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or
down, or depress the accelerator pedal, ACC
with Low Speed Follow will operate again
within the previously set speed.
If no vehicle is ahead of you before you
resume driving, depress the accelerator pedal
and ACC with Low Speed Follow will operate
again within the prior set speed.
(green)
(green)
508
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Driving
The system may automatically shut off under certain conditions. Some examples of
these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC
with Low Speed Follow functions.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
■
Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Strong light is reflected onto vehicles or road surfaces.
• Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
the whole vehicle may not be illuminated).
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
■
ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations
509
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Continued
Driving
■
Roadway conditions
• Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads.
• Driving on rutted roads (snowy or unpaved roads, etc.).
• Puddles or a film of water is on the road surface.
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
■
Vehicle conditions
• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
• Tire chains are installed.
• The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories,
stickers, film, etc. of the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The suspension has been modified.
510
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Driving
■
Examples of conditions under which the camera may not correctly detect
the vehicle ahead of you
• A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
• When the vehicle ahead of you blends in with the background, preventing the
system from recognizing it.
• The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you are lit on one side or not lit on either
side in a dark place.
511
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Continued
Driving
■
Examples of conditions under which the system may not work properly
• A vehicle ahead of you stops and the speed difference between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead of you is significantly large.
• When the vehicle ahead of you slows suddenly.
• When the vehicle ahead of you is a specially shaped vehicle.
• When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not
carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle.
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on the edge of the lane.
• When the vehicle ahead of you is a narrow vehicle such as a motorcycle.
• When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the vehicle ahead of you.
Camera detects upper section of an empty carrier truck.
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
512
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+/SET/− switch on the steering
wheel.
• Each time you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, the vehicle speed is
increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep the RES/+/SET/− switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed
increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
than your increased set speed, ACC with Low Speed
Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to
maintain the set interval between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead.
When you depress the accelerator pedal and then
press down and release the RES/+/SET/− switch, the
current speed of the vehicle is set.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
513
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Continued
Driving
Press the Interval button to change the ACC
with Low Speed Follow following-interval.
Each time you press the button, the following-
interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected
ahead of you) setting cycles through furthest,
far, mid, and nearest following-intervals.
Determine the most appropriate following-
interval setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any
following-interval requirements set by local
regulation.
■
To Set or Change Following-interval
Interval Button
514
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Driving
The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the nearest, mid, far, or
furthest following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.
When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has
stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with Low
Speed Follow interval setting.
Following-interval
When the Set Speed is:
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)
Nearest
87.3 feet
26.6 meters
1.2 sec
110.6 feet
33.7 meters
1.2 sec
Mid
113.4 feet
34.6 meters
1.6 sec
147.2 feet
44.9 meters
1.6 sec
Far
144.2 feet
44.0 meters
2.0 sec
187.3 feet
57.1 meters
2.0 sec
Furthest
175.9 feet
53.6 meters
2.4 sec
229.6 feet
70.0 meters
2.4 sec
Continued
515
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Driving
To cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow, do any
of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge
changes to the indicator (white).
• Press the button.
u indicator (green) goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is
moving forward.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge
changes to the indicator (white).
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled ACC with Low Speed Follow, you can
activate the ACC with Low Speed Follow with the
prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by
pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up even if the
vehicle is stopped.
When you turn the ACC with Low Speed Follow off
by pressing the CANCEL button or depressing the
brake pedal, the prior set speed is displayed on the
gauge in gray.
When pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up, the ACC
with Low Speed Follow is activated with displayed
speed.
If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press
the RES/+/SET/− switch up, but no prior set speed (in
gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your
vehicle's current speed.
CANCEL Button
Button
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
516
Driving
■
Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when
ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may
cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel:
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road for extended periods, or driving off road.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA®, or CMBS
TM
is activated.
• When the VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too
close to your vehicle.
• When accelerating rapidly.
• The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories,
stickers, film, etc. on the windshield.
• The vehicle is loaded heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
• When passing through a dark place, such as tunnel.
• When the parking brake and brake system indicator (amber) comes on.
• The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to maintain the set speed (for
example, you are descending a long slope).
• When the system doesn't detect any driving actions from the driver for a certain
amount of time while the LKAS is also activated.
The ACC with Low Speed Follow automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the
following causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
• The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
• The engine is turned off.
1To Cancel
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
with Low Speed Follow has been turned off using the
button. Press the button to activate the
system, then set the desired speed.
Prior Set Speed (gray)
(white)
Continued
517
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Driving
Press and hold the Interval button for one
second. Cruise mode selected appears on
the driver information interface for two
seconds, and then the mode switches to
Cruise.
The indicator comes on.
• Green: The system is on.
• White: The system is standby.
To switch back to ACC with Low Speed
Follow, press and hold the Interval button
again for one second.
■
To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle
ahead of you.
You cannot switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to
Cruise Control in the following situations:
• When the vehicle speed is set.
• When ACC with Low Speed Follow is not activated.
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface
between mph and km/h.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 No Content P. 126
ACC with
Low Speed
Follow ON
Cruise
Control ON
Interval
Button
(white) (white)
518
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down when
you reach the desired speed.
The moment you release the RES/+/SET/− switch, the set speed is fixed, and cruise
control begins. The color of indicator changes from white to green and set
speed appears on the gauge.
When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power
Steering system) is activated.
By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering
pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight
line.
■
When to use
Desired speed in a range above roughly 20 mph (30 km/h).
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
Set Vehicle Speed
(green)
Continued
519
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
Driving
• Each time you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, the vehicle speed is
increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep the RES/+/SET/− switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed
increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).
• Press the button.
u The indicator (green) goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled
cruise control, you can activate the cruise control with
the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by
pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up while driving at a
speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.
When you turn the cruise control off by pressing the
CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal, the
prior set speed is displayed on the gauge in gray.
When pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up, the
cruise control is activated with displayed speed.
If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press
the RES/+/SET/− switch up, but no prior set speed (in
gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your
vehicle's current speed.
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
520
Driving
1To Cancel
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
• When cruise control is canceled by pressing the
button.
At vehicle speeds of 17 mph (25 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
Prior Set Speed (gray)
(white)
521
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Continued
Driving
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
When ACC slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle’s brake lights will
illuminate.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the
brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a
safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.
3
WARNING
Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.
Use ACC only when driving on expressways or
freeways and in good road and weather
conditions.
3
WARNING
ACC has limited braking capability.
When your vehicle speed drops below 17 mph
(25 km/h), ACC will automatically cancel and
no longer will apply your vehicle’s brakes.
Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal
when conditions require.
When to use
■
Vehicle speed for ACC: Desired speed in a range above roughly 20 mph (30 km/h).
■
Shift position for ACC: In (2 or higher position.
The front wide view camera is
located behind the rearview
mirror.
* Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
522
Driving
■
How to activate the system
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 528
When the engine speed slows down, try to downshift.
When the engine speed goes up, try to upshift. You
can maintain the set speed if you change gear within
five seconds.
When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by
pressing the button.
Do not use ACC under the following conditions:
• On roads with frequent lane change or continuous
stop and go traffic, ACC cannot keep an
appropriate distance between your vehicle and
vehicle ahead of you.
• On roads with sharp turns.
• On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.
• On roads with bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.),
ACC may not detect the distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you properly.
• On roads with slippery or icy surfaces. The wheels
may spin out and your vehicle may lose the control
on the condition.
• On roads with steep uphill or steep downhill slopes.
• On roads with undulating slopes.
How to use
■
Press the button on the
steering wheel.
(white) is on in the gauge
ACC is ready to use.
* Not available on all models
Continued
523
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down when
you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the switch, the set speed is
fixed, and ACC begins.
When you use ACC, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering
system) is activated.
By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering
pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight
line.
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC), low tire pressure/TPMS
*
, and
safety support indicators may come on in amber
along with a message in the gauge when you set the
power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface or
the audio/information screen between mph and
km/h.
2 Speed/Distance Units P. 156
2 Customized Features P. 354
On when ACC with
Low Speed Follow
begins
Up or down
(green)
RES/+/SET/− Switch
* Not available on all models
524
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon,
interval bars and set speed appear on the
gauge.
Set Vehicle Speed
Set Vehicle Interval
(green)
Continued
525
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
■
There is a vehicle ahead
ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected
doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order
to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 533
■
When in Operation
1When in Operation
If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if
another vehicle cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds
and a message appears on the driver information
interface.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
interval from the vehicle ahead.
Beep
ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
526
Driving
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed is detected in front of you, your
vehicle starts to slow down.
Outside of control target vehicle
Control target vehicle
Control target vehicle: White
and outlined in green
Outside of control target vehicle:
Gray
A vehicle icon appears on the
gauge.
1When in Operation
Even if the interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start
accelerating your vehicle under the following
circumstances:
• The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
• A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval
between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in
front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC
detecting range. A vehicle detect beep on and off can
be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 354
Limitations
You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
interval when using ACC. Additionally, ACC may not
work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 528
Continued
527
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
■
There is no vehicle ahead
Your vehicle maintains the set speed without
having to keep your foot on the brake or
accelerator pedal.
If there previously was a vehicle detected
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to
the set speed, and then maintains it.
While driving down steep hills, ACC brakes to
inhibit excessive acceleration for maintaining
the set speed.
However, the vehicle speed may become
faster than the set speed.
■
When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or
visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC range.
ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the
system resumes the set speed.
There are times when the vehicle speed will decrease when the accelerator pedal is
lightly applied.
1When in Operation
• ACC may temporarily control the interval between
your vehicle and the vehicle in adjacent lane or
surroundings of your vehicle depending on the
road conditions (e.g., curves) or vehicle conditions
(e.g., operating the steering wheel or the vehicle
location in the lane).
• When the vehicle ahead of you moves away, such
as when entering an interchange or rest area, ACC
may continue to maintain the set following-interval
for a short time.
528
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
The system may automatically shut off under certain conditions. Some examples of
these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC
functions.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
■
Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Strong light is reflected onto vehicles or road surfaces.
• Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
the whole vehicle may not be illuminated).
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
■
ACC Conditions and Limitations
529
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Continued
Driving
■
Roadway conditions
• Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads.
• Driving on rutted roads (snowy or unpaved roads, etc.).
• Puddles or a film of water is on the road surface.
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
■
Vehicle conditions
• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
• Tire chains
*
are installed.
• The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories,
stickers, film, etc. of the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire
*
, etc.).
• The suspension has been modified.
* Not available on all models
530
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
■
Examples of conditions under which the camera may not correctly detect
the vehicle ahead of you
• A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
• When the vehicle ahead of you blends in with the background, preventing the
system from recognizing it.
• The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you are lit on one side or not lit on either
side in a dark place.
531
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Continued
Driving
■
Examples of conditions under which the system may not work properly
• A vehicle ahead of you stops and the speed difference between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead of you is significantly large.
• When the vehicle ahead of you slows suddenly.
• When the vehicle ahead of you is a specially shaped vehicle.
• When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not
carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle.
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on the edge of the lane.
• When the vehicle ahead of you is a narrow vehicle such as a motorcycle.
• When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the vehicle ahead of you.
Camera detects upper section of an empty carrier truck.
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
532
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+/SET/− switch on the steering
wheel.
• Each time you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, the vehicle speed is
increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep the RES/+/SET/− switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed
increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
than your increased set speed, ACC may not
accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set
interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
When you depress the accelerator pedal and then
press down and release the RES/+/SET/− switch, the
current speed of the vehicle is set.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
533
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Continued
Driving
Press the Interval button to change the ACC
following-interval.
Each time you press the button, the following-
interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected
ahead of you) setting cycles through furthest,
far, mid, and nearest following-intervals.
Determine the most appropriate following-
interval setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any
following-interval requirements set by local
regulation.
■
To Set or Change Following-interval
Interval Button
534
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the nearest, mid, far or
furthest following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.
Following-interval
When the Set Speed is:
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)
Nearest
87.3 feet
26.6 meters
1.2 sec
110.6 feet
33.7 meters
1.2 sec
Mid
113.4 feet
34.6 meters
1.6 sec
147.2 feet
44.9 meters
1.6 sec
Far
144.2 feet
44.0 meters
2.0 sec
187.3 feet
57.1 meters
2.0 sec
Furthest
175.9 feet
53.6 meters
2.4 sec
229.6 feet
70.0 meters
2.4 sec
Continued
535
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
To cancel ACC, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge
changes to the indicator (white).
• Press the button.
u indicator (green) goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is
moving forward.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge
changes to the indicator (white).
• Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or
more.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge
changes to the indicator (white).
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled ACC, you can activate the ACC with the
prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by
pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up.
When you turn the ACC off by pressing the CANCEL
button or depressing the brake pedal, the prior set
speed is displayed on the gauge in gray.
When pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up, the ACC
is activated with displayed speed.
If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press
the RES/+/SET/− switch up, but no prior set speed (in
gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your
vehicle's current speed.
CANCEL Button
Button
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
536
Driving
■
Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when
ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to
automatically cancel:
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road for extended periods, or driving off road.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA®, CMBS
TM
or Low Speed Braking Control
*
is activated.
• When the VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• When vehicle speed is less than 17 mph (25 km/h).
• Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle.
• When accelerating rapidly.
• The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, accessories,
stickers, film, etc. on the windshield.
• The engine is turned off.
• The vehicle is loaded heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
• When passing through a dark place, such as tunnel.
• When the parking brake and brake system indicator (amber) comes on.
• The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to maintain the set speed (for
example, you are descending a long slope).
• When the system doesn't detect any driving actions from the driver for a certain
amount of time while the LKAS is also activated.
• Ignoring shift down indication shown in the gauge will cancel the ACC after
about 10 seconds.
• The engine speed goes into the tachometer red zone.
• The engine speed goes to below 1,000 rpm.
• You shift into neutral temporarily when shifting into a higher or lower gear.
• When the transmission is put into
(N without depressing the clutch pedal.
1To Cancel
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
has been turned off using the button. Press the
button to activate the system, then set the
desired speed.
If the vehicle speed is less than 20 mph (30 km/h) you
cannot resume.
Prior Set Speed (gray)
(white)
* Not available on all models
Continued
537
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
Press and hold the Interval button for one
second. Cruise mode selected appears on
the driver information interface for two
seconds, and then the mode switches to
Cruise.
The indicator comes on.
• Green: The system is on.
• White: The system is standby.
To switch back to ACC, press and hold the
Interval button again for one second.
■
To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle
ahead of you.
You cannot switch ACC to Cruise Control in the
following situations:
• When the vehicle speed is set.
• When ACC is not activated.
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface or
the audio/information screen between mph and
km/h.
2 Speed/Distance Units P. 156
2 Customized Features P. 354
ACC ON
Cruise
Control ON
Interval
Button
(white) (white)
538
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down when
you reach the desired speed.
The moment you release the RES/+/SET/− switch, the set speed is fixed, and cruise
control begins. The color of indicator changes from white to green and set
speed appears on the gauge.
When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power
Steering system) is activated.
By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering
pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight
line.
■
When to use
Desired speed in a range above roughly 20 mph (30 km/h).
■
To Set the Vehicle Speed
Set Vehicle Speed
(green)
Continued
539
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
Driving
• Each time you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, the vehicle speed is
increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep the RES/+/SET/− switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed
increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).
• Press the button.
u The indicator (green) goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).
• Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or more.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).
■
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
■
To Cancel
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled
cruise control, you can activate the cruise control with
the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by
pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up while driving at a
speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.
When you turn the cruise control off by pressing the
CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal, the
prior set speed is displayed on the gauge in gray.
When pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up, the
cruise control is activated with displayed speed.
If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press
the RES/+/SET/− switch up, but no prior set speed (in
gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your
vehicle's current speed.
uuHonda Sensing® uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
540
Driving
1To Cancel
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
has been turned off using the button. Press the
button to activate the system, then set the
desired speed.
If the vehicle speed is less than 20 mph (30 km/h) you
cannot resume.
Prior Set Speed (gray)
(white)
541
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not an
autonomous driving system and always requires
driver attention and control. The system does not
work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or
fail to steer the vehicle.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on
expressways or freeways.
Do not place objects on the instrument panel.
Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent
correct detection of the traffic lanes.
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect
all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will
vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker
condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 549
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and
resumes after the signals are off.
If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts
activate, and torque is applied to the steering.
■
Front Wide
View Camera
Monitors the
lane lines
■
Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel
and a warning display alert you that
the vehicle is drifting out of a detected
lane.
■
Steering input assist
The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left
and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets
closer to either of the lane lines.
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
542
Driving
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle
nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become
stronger.
■
Lane Keep Support Function
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will
temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the
system will recover automatically.
The LKAS may not function as designed while driving
in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with
sharp curves.
543
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering
wheel vibration as well as a warning display.
■
Lane Departure Warning Function
Warning Area
Warning Area
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
544
Driving
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not suddenly depressed.
■
How to activate the system
1. Press the LKAS button.
u LKAS indicator (white) appears on the
gauge.
The system is standby.
u If traffic lane lines are detected, white
lines appear on the gauge.
*1: Models with A-type meter
*2: Models with B-type meter
■
When the System can be Used
1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line
due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Follow the points below to properly activate the
system:
• Always keep the windshield around the camera
clean.
• When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
• Do not attach a sticker to the area around the
camera.
If LKAS button is pressed when the system can be
used, LKAS is on without standby.
LKAS indicator
(white)
White lines
White lines
LKAS indicator
(white)
*1
*2
LKAS Button
545
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
2. Keep your vehicle near the center of the
lane while driving.
u The LKAS indicator changes from white
to green, and white lines change to
green once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.
Models with A-type meter
Models with B-type meter
LKAS indicator (green)
Green lines
Green lines
LKAS in
dicator (green)
546
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
Press the LKAS button.
The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the
engine, even if you turned it on the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■
To Cancel
LKAS Button
Continued
547
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
■
The LKAS may be automatically suspended when:
When the LKAS is suspended under the following circumstances, green lines on the
gauge change to white lines or disappear, and the beeper sounds (if activated).
• Your vehicle is driving to the right or the left
of the lane.
• The system fails to detect lane lines.
• The steering wheel is turned quickly.
• You fail to steer the vehicle.
• Driving through a sharp curve.
• Driving at a speed in excess of
approximately 94 mph (150 km/h).
• The ABS or VSA® system engages.
• The brake pedal is suddenly depressed.
Once these conditions no longer exist, the
LKAS automatically resumes.
1The LKAS may be automatically suspended when:
You can change the setting for the LKAS.
LKAS suspended beep on and off can be selected.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
Models with A-type meter
Models with B-type meter
LKAS indicator (white)
White lines
LKAS indicator (white)
White lines
548
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
■
The LKAS may be automatically canceled when:
In the following cases, traffic lane lines may disappear on the gauge, the beeper may
sound, and the LKAS may be automatically canceled:
• The camera temperature gets extremely high.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, is dirty.
549
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
The system may not detect lane markings (in white or yellow), and LKAS may not
function properly under certain conditions, including the following:
■
Environmental conditions
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are
parallel to white (or yellow) lines.
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
lane lines or the road surface may not be illuminated).
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and
lane lines and the road surface are not visible.
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
■
LKAS Conditions and Limitations
550
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
■
Roadway conditions
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or deteriorated lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or
crosswalk.
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
Faded lines Tire tracksDuplicate lines
Very wide or narrow traffic lane
551
uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Continued
Driving
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
(or yellow) lines.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• Driving on roads with double lane lines.
• Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
• The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.
• There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface.
• White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as
curves, twists, or hills.
• Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.
• Passing through an exit or an interchange.
Lane void of lines at exit or
interchange
552
uuHonda Sensing® uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving
■
Vehicle conditions
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow,
accessories, decals, stickers, film, etc.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire
*
, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
• The suspension has been modified.
• Tire chains
*
are installed.
* Not available on all models
553
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Continued
Driving
Traffic Jam Assist
*
The Traffic Jam Assist system uses a camera mounted to the upper portion of the
windshield to detect and monitor left and right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines.
Based on inputs from the camera, the system can apply steering torque to keep your
vehicle in the center of the detected lane.
■
How Traffic Jam Assist works
When you are in heavy traffic and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active, the
Traffic Jam Assist system, upon detecting the traffic lane lines, will apply steering
torque to help keep your vehicle in the center of the lane.
When the driver takes full control of the steering, the steering assist function is
temporarily canceled.
The torque applied to the steering may not be noticeable when the driver has full
control of the steering, or when the surface of the road is rough or uneven.
1Traffic Jam Assist
*
Important Safety Reminders
Traffic Jam Assist is for your convenience only. It is
not an autonomous driving system and always
requires driver attention and control. The system
does not work if you take your hands off the steering
wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
Traffic Jam Assist is convenient when it is used on
expressways or freeways.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
The Traffic Jam Assist only alerts you when lane drift
is detected without a turn signal in use. The Traffic
Jam Assist may not detect all lane markings or lane
departures; accuracy will vary based on weather,
speed, and lane marker condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
Traffic Jam Assist may not work properly under
certain conditions:
2 Traffic Jam Assist Conditions and
Limitations P. 558
Front Wide View Camera
When you use the turn signal to indicate a lane change, Traffic Jam Assist is
temporarily deactivated. It is reactivated once the vehicle is traveling in the
center of the lane and the system has detected the traffic lane lines.
Detects left and right white
(or yellow) traffic lane lines
* Not available on all models
554
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Driving
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the Traffic Jam Assist alerts you with
slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display.
■
Lane Departure Warning Function
Warning Area
Warning Area
Continued
555
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Driving
Traffic Jam Assist is activated when all of the following conditions exist:
• LKAS is activated.
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• The vehicle is traveling between about 0 and 45mph (0 and 72km/h).
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The driver is gripping the steering wheel.
• The shift position is in
(D, (S
*
or (L
*
.
Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in any of the following situations:
• You are traveling on a road with sharp curves.
u The system may not allow your vehicle to respond in a manner best suited for
the road conditions.
• You are entering a toll booth, interchange, service area, or parking area.
• You are driving in adverse weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• The surface of the road is slippery; for example, it is icy or covered with snow.
u The tires may slip, causing you to lose control of the vehicle.
■
Traffic Jam Assist Activation
1Traffic Jam Assist Activation
Refer to the following page for proper handling of
the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS):
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 541
Refer to the following page for steering buttons and
displays:
2 Operation Switches for the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow
*
/Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
/
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)/Traffic
Jam Assist
*
P. 472
2 Gauge Content P. 473
* Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
556
Driving
Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane
while driving.
u The LKAS indicator changes from white
to green, and white lines change to
green once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.
■
How Traffic Jam Assist Works
1How Traffic Jam Assist Works
If your vehicle veers too far to the right or the left of
the white (or yellow) traffic lane lines while Traffic
Jam Assist is active, deactivate Traffic Jam Assist and
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
In some cases the system cannot properly detect the
traffic lane lines and, as a result, will not provide
steering assistance.
2 Traffic Jam Assist Conditions and
Limitations P. 558
If the driver takes their hands off the steering wheel
or does not adequately maintain control of steering,
the warning below will appear.
If the driver does not grip the steering wheel after the
warning above has repeatedly appeared, a warning
buzzer will sound and Traffic Jam Assist will be
canceled.
Green lines
LKAS indicator (green)
Continued
557
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Driving
Press the LKAS button to cancel Traffic Jam Assist.
■
Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.
• The steering wheel is turned sharply.
• You fail to steer the vehicle.
• You are driving through a sharp curve.
• The brake pedal is suddenly depressed.
Once these conditions no longer exist, Traffic Jam Assist automatically resumes.
■
Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically canceled when:
• The temperature of the camera is too high.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, is dirty.
Upon cancelation, the lane lines will disappear from the screen and the beeper may
sound.
■
Canceling Traffic Jam Assist
1Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when:
You can change the setting for the Traffic Jam Assist
suspended beep on and off when you select the
Lane keeping assist suspend beep on the driver
information interface.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
558
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Driving
The system may not detect lane markings (in white or yellow), and Traffic Jam Assist
may not function properly under certain conditions, including the following:
■
Environmental conditions
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are
parallel to white (or yellow) lines.
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
lane lines or the road surface may not be illuminated).
• When the lane lines or road surface are not visible, such as when the distance to
the vehicle in front of you is extremely short or when at an intersection.
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
■
Traffic Jam Assist Conditions and Limitations
559
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Continued
Driving
■
Roadway conditions
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or deteriorated lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or
crosswalk.
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks
Very wide or narrow traffic lane
560
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Driving
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
(or yellow) lines.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• Driving on roads with double lane lines.
• Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
• The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.
• There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface.
• White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as
curves, twists, or hills.
• Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.
• Passing through an exit or an interchange.
Lane void of lines at exit or
interchange
561
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Jam Assist
*
Driving
■
Vehicle conditions
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow,
accessories, decals, stickers, film, etc.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
• The suspension has been modified.
• Tire chains are installed.
562
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving
Traffic Sign Recognition System
Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit your vehicle
has just passed, showing it on the gauge.
When the camera located behind the rearview mirror detects traffic signs while the
vehicle is being driven, the system displays recognized signs in your vehicle for a
programmed time and distance. If a speed limit sign is detected and the vehicle
exceeds the speed limit by a programmed threshold, the speed limit sign icon will
blink.
If the system does not detect any traffic signs while you are driving, the sign icon will
not be displayed.
The sign icon also may switch to another one, or disappear when:
• The end of speed limit or other designated limit is detected.
• You make a turn with a turn signal at an intersection.
■
How the System Works
1Traffic Sign Recognition System
Not all signs may be displayed, but any signs posted
on roadsides should not be ignored. The system does
not work on the designated traffic signs of all the
countries you travel, nor in all situations.
Do not rely too much on the system. Always drive at
speeds appropriate for the road conditions.
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the camera’s field of
vision and cause the system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the system
to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend
that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda
replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs
within the camera’s field of vision or installing an
aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the
system to operate abnormally. After replacing the
windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper
calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to
operate properly.
The traffic sign recognition system is not activated for
about 15 seconds after the engine starts.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 568
You can turn the traffic sign recognition system on
and off.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
Models with A-type meter
Models with B-type meter
Speed Limit
Sign
Continued
563
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving
1Traffic Sign Recognition System
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system
to shut off, find a shady area or face the front of the
vehicle away from the sun when parking. If you use a
reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the
camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.
The default speed limit warning threshold is the
maximum speed of the traffic sign detected.
You can adjust the threshold for speed limit warning.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
The system’s ability to accurately notify the driver of
the speed limit is dependent on certain conditions
such as the units displayed on the traffic sign as well
as the speed and direction of travel of the vehicle. In
some cases, the system may display false warnings or
other inaccurate information.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions
and Limitations P. 564
The unit for speed limits (mph or km/h) varies from
country to country. Just after entering a country
whose unit differs to the one of the country from
which you came, the Traffic Sign Recognition System
may not work correctly.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 No Content P. 126
2 Speed/Distance Units P. 156
2 Customized Features P. 354
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System
564
Driving
The Traffic Sign Recognition system may incorrectly recognize, be slow to identify,
or fail to recognize the traffic sign in the following cases.
■
Environmental conditions
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving at night, in dark areas such as long tunnels.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
■
Roadway conditions
• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
■
Vehicle conditions
• When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
• The front of the camera is obstructed by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow,
accessories, decals, stickers, film, etc.
• There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire
*
, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats.
• The suspension has been modified.
• Tire chains
*
are installed.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
■
Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations
1Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations
When the traffic sign recognition system
malfunctions, appears on the gauge. If this
message does not disappear, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Models with A-type meter
Models with B-type meter
* Not available on all models
565
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Continued
Driving
■
The position or the condition of the traffic sign
• The sign is in a place that makes it hard to find.
• The sign is located far away from your vehicle.
• The sign is located where it is hard for headlight beams to reach.
• The sign is on a corner or bend in the road.
• The sign is faded or bent.
• The sign is rotated or damaged.
• The sign is covered with mud, snow, or frost.
• Part of the sign is hidden by the trees, or is in the shadow of a vehicle or other
object.
• Light (such as a streetlight) is reflected on the surface of the sign, or it is hidden
in shadow.
• The sign is too bright or too dark (electric signs).
• Small signs (auxiliary signs, etc.).
■
Other conditions
• When you are driving at a high speed.
566
uuHonda Sensing® uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving
The traffic sign recognition system may not operate correctly, such as displaying
signs that do not adhere to the actual regulations for the roadway or do not exist at
all in the following cases.
u A speed limit sign may display at a higher or lower speed than the actual speed
limit.
• There is a supplementary sign with further information such as weather, time,
vehicle type, school zone, etc.
• Figures on the sign are hard to read (electric signs, numbers on the sign are
blurred, etc.).
• The sign is in the vicinity of the lane you are driving in, even though it is not for
the lane, such as a speed limit sign situated at an exit or an intersection between
the side road and the main road.
• There are things that look similar in color or shape to recognized objects (similar
sign, electric sign, signboard, structure, etc.).
567
uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving
The speed limit sign icon is displayed on the screen.
■
Signs Displayed on the Gauge
Speed Limit Sign
Models with A-type meter
Speed Limit Sign
Models with B-type meter
Speed Limit
Sign
568
uuHonda Sensing® uFront Wide View Camera
Driving
Front Wide View Camera
The camera, used in systems such as Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
), Road Departure Mitigation system, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow
*
/Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
*
, Lane Keeping Assist System
(LKAS), Traffic Jam Assist
*
, Traffic Sign Recognition system, and Auto High-Beam, is
designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate their
functions.
This camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing
system to shut off, find a shady area or face
the front of the vehicle away from the sun
when parking. If you use a reflective sun
shade, do not allow it to cover the camera
housing. Covering the camera can
concentrate heat on it.
■
Camera Location and Handling Tips
1Front Wide View Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could
obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the
system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.
Front Wide
View Camera
* Not available on all models
569
uuHonda Sensing®uFront Wide View Camera
Driving
1Front Wide View Camera
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate:
Camera temperature too high message appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed towards the camera.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate:
Clean front windshield or poor viewing
condition. message appears:
• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and make sure the
windshield is clean.
Clean the windshield if it is dirty. If the message
does not disappear after driven for a while, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
570
uuHonda Sensing® uSonar Sensors
*
Driving
Sonar Sensors
*
■
Location and range of sensors
The sonar sensors are situated in the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille.
1Sonar Sensors
*
For the sonar sensors to work properly, do not:
• Place stickers or other objects on or around the
sensors.
• Hit the area around the sensors.
• Attempt to take apart any sensor.
• Put any accessories on or around the sensors.
Consult with a dealer if:
• A sensor has been subjected to shock.
• Work needs to be done to the area around a
sensor.
In the following cases, the sonar sensors may not
work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
• The front or rear bumper has made contact with a
hill, parking block, curb, embankment, etc.
• The vehicle has been involved in a frontal or rear
collision.
• The vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle.
Sonar Sensors Sonar Sensors
Sensor Range
* Not available on all models
571
Continued
Driving
Braking
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the
parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.
■
To apply
The electric parking brake can be applied any
time the vehicle has battery, no matter which
position the power mode is in.
Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently
and securely.
u The indicator in the switch comes on.
u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) comes on.
■
To release
The power mode must be in ON in order to
release the electric parking brake.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the electric parking brake switch.
u The indicator in the switch goes off.
u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) goes off.
Manually releasing the parking brake using
the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and
smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills.
■
Parking Brake
1Parking Brake
You may hear the electric parking brake system
motor operating from the rear wheel area when you
apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.
The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric
parking brake system operation when you apply or
release the parking brake. This is normal.
You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the
battery goes dead.
2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 683
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake
switch while driving, the brakes on all four wheels
are applied by the VSA
®
system until the vehicle
comes to a stop. The electric parking brake then
applies, and the switch should be released.
Electric Parking
Brake Switch
Electric Parking
Brake Switch
uuBrakinguBrake System
572
Driving
■
Automatic parking brake feature operation
If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated:
• The parking brake is applied automatically when you set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF.
• To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake
system indicator (red) is on.
2 Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature P. 574
■
To release automatically
Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.
Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the
vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
When on a hill, it may require more
accelerator input to release.
u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) goes off.
You can release the parking brake automatically when:
• You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
• The engine is running.
• The transmission is not in
(P or (N.
1Parking Brake
In the following situations, the parking brake
automatically operates.
• When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake
hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped and brake hold is applied.
• When the engine is turned off, except by Auto Idle
Stop system, while brake hold system is applied.
• When there is a problem with the brake hold
system while brake hold is applied.
• When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes
while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with
Low Speed Follow.
• When the engine is turned off, except by Auto Idle
Stop system, while ACC with Low Speed Follow is
activated.
Models with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow
Continuously variable transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Accelerator Pedal
Continued
573
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
Depress the accelerator pedal while releasing the clutch pedal releases the parking
brake.
Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the
vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal and
release the clutch pedal.
u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) goes off.
The parking brake automatically releases as
you depress the accelerator pedal when:
• You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
• The engine is running.
• The transmission is not in
(N.
Manual transmission models
Clutch Pedal
Accelerator Pedal
1Parking Brake
If the parking brake cannot be released
automatically, release it manually.
When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator
pedal may need to be pressed farther to
automatically release the electric parking brake.
The parking brake cannot be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
• Malfunction indicator lamp
• Transmission system indicator
The parking brake may not be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
• Parking brake and brake system indicator (amber)
• VSA® system indicator
• ABS indicator
• Supplemental restraint system indicator
Fully depress the clutch pedal, gently depress the
accelerator pedal, then release the clutch pedal.
Manual transmission models
uuBrakinguBrake System
574
Driving
■
Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature
With the power mode is in ON, carry out the following steps to either activate or
deactivate the automatic parking brake feature.
1. Put the transmission into
(P.
2. Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up and release the electric parking brake
switch.
u Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) has come on.
3. Pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping
sound, release the switch and within three seconds pull up and hold the switch
again.
4. When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the
switch.
u Two beeps indicate that the feature has been activated.
u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated.
u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will
remain applied after you turn off the engine.
u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and
brake system indicator (red) is on.
If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature while putting your vehicle through
a conveyor type car wash, follow the procedure explained below.
1. Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and then within two seconds push down the
electric parking brake switch.
u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected.
u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow and the automatic
brake hold system.
u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and
brake system indicator (red) is on.
1Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature
In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in
place if applied.
When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and
make sure the automatic parking brake feature is
deactivated.
Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyor-
type car wash or when having your vehicle towed,
deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and
leave the parking brake released.
Continuously variable transmission models
Continued
575
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps to reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system
increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an
emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 582
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 581
■
Foot Brake
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear
indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates
that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an
occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply
the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by
high frequency vibration of the brake pads against
the rotating brake disc.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear/speed position. With manual
transmission, use a lower gear for greater engine
braking.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
uuBrakinguBrake System
576
Driving
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is
pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at
traffic lights and in heavy traffic.
■
Turning on the system
Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the
engine. Press the automatic brake hold
button.
u The automatic brake hold system
indicator comes on. The system is turned
on.
The system is in the previously selected on or
off setting each time you fasten the driver's
seat belt and start the engine.
■
Activating the system
Depress the brake pedal to come to a
complete stop. The transmission must not be
in
(P or (R.
u The automatic brake hold indicator
comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10
minutes.
u Release the brake pedal after the
automatic brake hold indicator comes
on.
■
Automatic Brake Hold
1Automatic Brake Hold
3
WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system
on steep hills or slippery roads may still
allow the vehicle to move if you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may
cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never activate the automatic brake hold
system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from
moving when stopped on a steep hill or
slippery roads.
3
WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to
park the vehicle may result in the vehicle
unexpectedly moving.
If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may
cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never leave the vehicle when braking is
temporarily kept by automatic brake hold
and always park the vehicle by putting the
transmission in
(P and applying the parking
brake.
Continuously variable transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Comes
On
Automatic Brake Hold Button
On
Brake Pedal
Comes
On
Comes
On
U.S.
Canada
Continued
577
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
■
Canceling the system
Depress the accelerator pedal while the
transmission is in a position other than
(P or
(N. The system is canceled and the vehicle
starts to move.
u The automatic brake hold indicator goes
off. The system continues to be on.
1Automatic Brake Hold
While the system is activated, you can turn off the
engine or park the vehicle through the same
procedure as you normally do.
2 When Stopped P. 583
You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves
while the automatic brake hold system is in
operation.
3
WARNING
When using the automatic brake hold,
keep your foot on the brake pedal until the
automatic brake hold indicator comes on.
If the vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may
cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death.
Release your foot from the brake pedal
after the automatic brake hold indicator
comes on.
On
Accelerator Pedal
Goes
Off
uuBrakinguBrake System
578
Driving
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until you shift into one of
the gears other than
(N and:
• Release the clutch pedal on a level road or when facing downhill.
• Release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal when facing uphill.
You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights
and in heavy traffic.
■
Turning on the system
Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the
engine. Press the automatic brake hold button.
u The automatic brake hold system
indicator comes on. The system is turned
on.
The system is in the previously selected on or
off setting each time you fasten the driver's
seat belt and start the engine.
■
Activating the system
Depress the brake pedal to come to a
complete stop.
u The automatic brake hold indicator
comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10
minutes.
u Release the brake pedal after the
automatic brake hold indicator comes
on.
1Automatic Brake Hold
The system turns off if the engine stalls while
automatic brake hold is active or the system is on.
Manual transmission models
Manual transmission models
Comes
On
Automatic Brake Hold Button
On
Brake Pedal
Comes
On
Comes
On
U.S.
Canada
579
uuBrakinguBrake System
Continued
Driving
■
Canceling the system
Shift into one of the gears other than
(N and:
u Release the clutch pedal on a level road
or when facing downhill.
u Release the clutch pedal and depress the
accelerator pedal when facing uphill.
The system is canceled and the vehicle
starts to move.
u The automatic brake hold indicator goes
off. The system continues to be on.
■
The system automatically cancels when:
• You engage the parking brake.
• You depress the brake pedal and put the transmission into
(P or (R.
■
The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when:
• Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
• The engine is turned off.
• There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.
• The engine stalls.
On
Accelerator Pedal
Goes
Off
Clutch Pedal
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
uuBrakinguBrake System
580
Driving
■
Turning off the automatic brake hold system
Only the automatic brake hold system
indicator comes on:
• Press the automatic brake hold button.
u The automatic brake hold system
indicator goes off.
When the automatic brake hold indicator
comes on at the same time:
• Press the automatic brake hold button with
the brake pedal depressed.
u The automatic brake hold system
indicator and the automatic brake hold
indicator go off.
1Turning off the automatic brake hold system
Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold
system before using an automated car wash.
If you turn off the engine or unfasten the driver’s seat
belt while the automatic brake hold system is on, the
automatic brake hold system will automatically turn
off. In this case, when the driver’s seat belt is
fastened and the engine is restarted, the automatic
brake hold system will turn on without needing to
press the automatic brake hold button.
Automatic Brake
Hold Button
Goes
Off
Goes
Off
581
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Driving
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
■
ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake
pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to
press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel
the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:
• Wet or snow covered roads.
• Roads paved with stone.
• Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
■
ABS
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of
the incorrect size or type.
If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there
may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking will not be affected, there is a
possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing
the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is
designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to
skidding and loss of steering control.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:
• You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,
such as gravel or snow.
• The tires are equipped with tire chains
*
.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:
• Motor sounds coming from the engine
compartment when the brakes are applied, or
when system checks are being performed after the
engine has been started and while the vehicle
accelerates.
• Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates.
These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS
systems and are no cause for concern.
* Not available on all models
582
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Driving
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■
Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
583
Continued
Driving
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully.
3. Put the transmission into
(P.
4. Turn off the engine.
u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off in about 30
seconds.
3. Move the shift lever to (N.
4. Turn off the engine and move the shift lever to (R or (1.
u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off in about 30
seconds.
Always set the parking brake, especially if you are parked on an incline.
1Parking Your Vehicle
3
WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended
without confirming that Park is engaged.
A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash
resulting in serious injury or death.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal
until you have confirmed that
(P is shown
on the shift position indicator.
Continuously variable transmission models
1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Putting the transmission into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
Continuously variable transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
uuParking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped
584
Driving
1When Stopped
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake
may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are
expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if
parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so
they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the
slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from
moving. If you do not take either precaution, the
vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.
585
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Continued
Driving
Parking Sensor System
*
The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the
beeper, driver information interface and audio/information screen let you know the
approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.
■
The Sensor Location and Range
1Parking Sensor System
*
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is
no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.
The system may not work properly when:
• The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud, or dirt.
• The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
• There is something nearby that emits ultrasonic
waves or high frequency sounds.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
The system may not detect these obstacles:
• Thin or low objects.
• Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
or sponge.
• Objects directly under the bumper.
The system may falsely detect obstacles in the
following situations:
• The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill.
• When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or
other objects that emit ultrasonic waves.
• There is splashing water near the sensors due to
heavy rains, etc.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
uIf you put any accessories (such as a bicycle rack)
on or around the rear sensors, the system may
activate if it detects these accessories as an
obstacle. In this case, turn off the rear sensor.
2 Customized Features P. 354
Front Corner Sensors
Rear Corner Sensors
Rear Center Sensors
Front Center Sensors
Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less Front: Within about 35 in (90 cm) or less
Rear: Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less
* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
586
Driving
You can turn the system on and off using the driver information interface.
2 Switching the Display P. 143
2 Safety Support P. 155
The front corner, rear corner and rear center sensors start to detect an obstacle
when the transmission is in
(R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The front corner and front center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the
transmission is in any position other than
(R, and the vehicle speed is less than
5 mph (8 km/h).
You also need to release the parking brake.
■
Parking Sensor System On and Off
1Parking Sensor System
*
When you set the power mode to ON, the system will
be in the previously selected condition.
You can turn the rear parking sensor system on and
off using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 354
* Not available on all models
587
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Continued
Driving
You can switch between split view off and
split view on by touching the split screen tab.
■
Screen Operation
Split Screen
Tab
Split View Off
Split View On
588
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
*1:On the driver information interface
*2:On the audio/information screen
*3:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.
■
When the Distance between Your Vehicle and Detected
Obstacles Becomes Shorter
Interval
between
beeps
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle
Indicator
Driver information
interface
Audio/Information Screen
Corner Sensors Center Sensors
Moderate —
Front: About 35-28 in
(90-70 cm)
Rear: About 43-28 in
(110-70 cm)
Comes on
*1
/Blinks
*2
in Yellow
*3
Short
About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm)
About 28-22 in
(70-55 cm)
Comes on
*1
/
Blinks
*2
in Amber
Very short
About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
About 22-18 in
(55-45 cm)
Continuous
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
About 18 in
(45 cm) or less
Comes on
*1
/
Blinks
*2
in Red
Indicators light up
where the sensor
detects an obstacle.
Indicators light up where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
Indicators light up where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
Indicators light up where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
589
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System
*
Driving
To temporarily turn off the beeper, press the right selector wheel while it is
sounding. Temporary OFF will be canceled when the shift position is switched or the
vehicle speed reaches 9 mph (14 km/h) or higher.
590
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
Driving
Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts
you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.
The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.
1Cross Traffic Monitor
*
The parking sensor system’s alerting buzzer overrides
the Cross Traffic Monitor buzzer when the sensors
are detecting obstacles at the closest range.
3
CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all
approaching vehicles and may not detect
an approaching vehicle at all.
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
back up the vehicle before doing so may
result in a collision.
Do not solely rely on the system when
reversing; always also use your mirrors, and
look behind and to the sides of your vehicle
before reversing.
Models with parking sensor system
* Not available on all models
Continued
591
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
Driving
The system activates when:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 593
• The transmission is in (R.
• Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or
lower.
When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor
alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.
The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your
vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly
behind your vehicle.
The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your
vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.
■
How the System Works
1Cross Traffic Monitor
*
Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay
alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without
an approaching vehicle under the following
conditions:
• An obstacle, such as another vehicle or a wall near
your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the radar
sensor’s scope.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of about 3 mph
(5 km/h) or higher.
• A vehicle is approaching at a speed other than
between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25
km/h).
• The system picks up external interference such as
other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong
radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
• Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with
snow, ice, mud or dirt.
• When there is bad weather.
• Your vehicle is on an incline.
• Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
• Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a
vehicle, and so on.
If the rear bumper or the sensors have been
improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been
deformed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper
corner area clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels
or stickers of any kind.
Radar sensors:
Underneath the rear bumper
corners
* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
592
Driving
An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information
screen.
■
When the System Detects a Vehicle
1When the System Detects a Vehicle
If the on the lower right changes to in amber
when the transmission is in
(R, mud, snow or ice,
etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the
sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the
bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly
clean the area if necessary.
If the comes on when the transmission is in
(R,
there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic
Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
If the display remains the same with the transmission
in
(R, there may be a problem with the rear camera
system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.
Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Wide ViewNormal View
Arrow Icon
Top Down View
593
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor
*
Driving
The system can be turned on and off on the
audio/information screen by pressing the
Cross Traffic Monitor icon.
You can also switch the system on and off
from the customized feature on the audio/
information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 349
2 Customized Features P. 354
■
Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
Cross Traffic Monitor
icon
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
594
Driving
Multi-View Rear Camera
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.
The display automatically changes to the rear view when the transmission is put into
(R.
*1: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
*2: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
■
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display, which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
The rear camera view is displayed prior to the audio/
information screen.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a
soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 349
2 Customized Features P. 354
Fixed Guideline
ON
*1
/On
*2
: Guidelines appear when you put the
transmission into
(R.
OFF
*1
/Off
*2
: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
ON
*1
/On
*2
: Guidelines move according to the
steering wheel direction.
OFF
*1
/Off
*2
: Guidelines do not move.
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Camera
595
uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Driving
You can view three different camera modes on the rearview display.
Touch the appropriate icon to switch the mode.
• If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view
mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into
(R.
• If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the engine, Wide
view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put
the transmission into
(R.
• If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took
the transmission out of
(R, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you
put the transmission into (R.
• If you were using Top down view mode and put the transmission back into (R
within 10 seconds after you took it out of
(R, Top down view mode will be
activated.
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
If the vehicle’s rear view is not displayed on the audio/
information screen while the shift position is in
(R,
there may be a problem with the system. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Bumper
Wide View Mode
Normal View Mode
Top Down View Mode
Bumper Bumper
596
Driving
Refueling
Fuel Information
■
Fuel recommendation
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the
engine and will result in decreased engine performance.
Use of a gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage.
■
Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid buildup of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca (English), www.honda.ca/fr (French) for additional information on
gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
■
Fuel tank capacity: 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane number 91 or higher
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
597
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Continued
Driving
How to Refuel
Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle
directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler
nozzle.
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Unlock the driver’s door.
u The fuel fill door on the outer side of the
vehicle will unlock.
4. Press and release the area indicated by the
arrow to release the fuel fill door. You will
hear a click and the lid will open slightly.
5. Manually pull the fuel fill door to a fully
open position.
1How to Refuel
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only
service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of
smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon
fuel for other uses) or other non-service station
devices can damage the area in and around the filler
opening.
Use the lock tab or the master door lock switch to
unlock the fuel fill door.
The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically
relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can
be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the
driver’s door.
Using the Walk away auto lock® feature will also lock
the fuel fill door. Always make sure both the driver’s
door and fuel fill door are unlocked before
attempting to open the fuel fill door.
2 Locking the doors and trunk (Walk away
auto lock®) P. 167
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flames away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
Press
Fuel Fill Door
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
598
Driving
6. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the
lower part of filler opening, then insert it
slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the filler
nozzle goes down along with the filler
pipe.
u Keep the filler nozzle level.
u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will
click off automatically.
u If you do not fill up the tank to full,
always add a minimum of 1.3 US gal (5 L)
of fuel.
u After filling, wait about five seconds
before removing the filler nozzle.
7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity and cause fuel to spill.
If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the
specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction
indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
P. 704
599
Driving
Fuel Economy and CO
2
Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO
2
Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO
2
emissions is dependent on several
factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and
vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the
rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
driver information interface.
• Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 618
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
■
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO
2
Emissions
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
https://www.nrcan.gc.ca and search for “fuel
consumption testing” in the search field at the top of
the page.
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liters of
fuel
Kilometers
driven
L per 100 km
600
Driving
Turbo Engine Vehicle
*
Handling Precautions
The turbocharger is a high-precision device to obtain greater horsepower by
delivering a large volume of compressed air into the engine using a turbine driven by
the engine’s exhaust gas pressure.
• When the engine is cold just after starting, avoid revving the engine or sudden
acceleration.
• Always replace the engine oil and engine oil filter according to the Maintenance
Minder
TM
. The turbine rotates at very high speeds over 100,000 rpm and its
temperature reaches over 1,292°F (700°C). It is lubricated and cooled by engine
oil. If you fail to replace the engine oil and filter at the scheduled distance or
interval, deteriorated engine oil may cause failure such as sticking and abnormal
noise of the turbine bearing.
1Turbo Engine Vehicle
*
The scheduled maintenance intervals for replacing
the filter is indicated on the driver information
interface. Follow the information on replacement
timing.
2 Maintenance Minder
TM
P. 605
The Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive.
Allow engine to cool. or Engine temperature
near limit. Avoid heavy acceleration and high
speed. message may appear on the driver
information interface when you restart the engine
after driving under high load conditions such as at
high speed or in hilly terrain.
This is normal. The message goes off after you idle or
drive the vehicle for about one minute.
The temperature gauge pointer is at the mark
when you restart the engine after driving under high
load conditions such as at high speed or in hilly
terrain. This is normal. The gauge goes down after
you idle or drive the vehicle for about one minute.
H
* Not available on all models
601
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 602
Safety When Performing Maintenance .... 603
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 604
Maintenance Minder
TM
..................... 605
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood .... 615
Opening the Hood ........................... 617
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 618
Oil Check......................................... 619
Adding Engine Oil............................ 621
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter..... 622
Engine Coolant................................ 625
Transmission Fluid............................ 627
Brake/Clutch
*
Fluid.......................... 628
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 629
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 630
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
....635
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 637
Tire and Loading Information Label ... 638
Tire Labeling .................................... 638
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)....640
Wear Indicators................................ 642
Tire Service Life ................................ 642
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 643
Tire Rotation.................................... 644
Winter Tires ..................................... 645
Battery............................................... 647
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Remote Battery .......... 649
Climate Control System Maintenance ....650
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 651
Exterior Care.................................... 653
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories ...................................... 656
Modifications................................... 657
* Not available on all models
602
Maintenance
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.)
■
Routine inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
2 Maintenance P. 33
■
Periodic inspections
• Check the brake/clutch
*
fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch
*
Fluid P. 628
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 637
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 630
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 635
■
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 610
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
https://techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 722
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
* Not available on all models
603
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Continued
Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot
warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance.
Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
■
Maintenance Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3
WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner’s manual.
3
WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner’s manual.
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
604
Maintenance
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Make sure that the radiator fan is stopped before inspecting the engine
compartment.
u Depending on the vehicle condition, the radiator fan may operate even when
the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
u Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda Genuine Parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda Genuine Parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
■
Vehicle Safety
1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
NOTICE
Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may
damage the engine cover and component parts.
2.0 L engine models
605
Maintenance
Maintenance Minder
TM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to
ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
606
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
To Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the driver information interface.
You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the (home) button.
3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed.
4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The engine
oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items
due soon.
■
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 610
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
5 5 to 1
0 0
Models with A-type meter
(home) Button
Engine Oil Life
Main Item Sub Item
Left Selector Wheel
607
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Roll the right selector wheel until the Maintenance Minder screen is displayed.
The engine oil life appears on the driver information interface along with
maintenance items due soon.
Models with B-type meter
Engine Oil Life
Main Item
Sub Item
Right Selector Wheel
608
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
*1:Models with A-type meter
*2:Models with B-type meter
■
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information
Interface
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
-
When you select the
Maintenance Minder screen,
it displays codes for
maintenance items due at
the next engine oil change,
along with the percentage of
engine oil life remaining.
-
Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The remaining engine oil life
is 15 to 6 percent.
Press the (home) button
to switch to another display.
Roll the right selector wheel
to switch to another display.
The engine oil is approaching
the end of its service life, and
the maintenance items should
be inspected and serviced
soon.
*1
*2
*1
*2
Models with A-type meter
Models with B-type meter
609
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
*1:Models with A-type meter
*2:Models with B-type meter
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder
message.
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
Maintenance Due Now 5 % The remaining engine oil life
is 5 to 1 percent.
Press the (home) button
to switch to another display.
Roll the right selector wheel
to switch to another display.
The engine oil has almost
reached the end of its service
life, and the maintenance items
should be inspected and
serviced as soon as possible.
Maintenance Past Due
Negative Distance
The engine oil life has passed
its service life, and a negative
distance appears after driving
over 10 miles (U.S. models) or
10 km (Canadian models).
The negative distance on the
display blinks.
Press the (home) button
to switch to another display.
Roll the right selector wheel
to switch to another display.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must
be inspected and serviced
immediately.
*1
*2
Models with A-type meter
Models with B-type meter
*1
*2
Models with A-type meter
Models with B-type meter
610
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
■
Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance Minder Message
System Message
Indicator
Sub ItemsMain Item
611
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Continued
Maintenance
U.S. models
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 719.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
●
Replace engine oil
*1
B
●
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
●
Inspect front and rear brakes
●
Check expiration date for temporary tire repair kit
bottle (if equipped)
●
Inspect these items:
• Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
• Suspension components
• Driveshaft boots
• Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
• All fluid levels and condition of fluids
• Exhaust system
#
• Fuel lines and connections
#
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperature.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under this condition, have the transmission fluid changed
every 37,500 miles (60,000 km).
*6: Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
*7: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
●
Rotate tires
2
●
Replace air cleaner element
*2
●
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
●
Inspect drive belt
3
●
Replace transmission fluid
*4,*5
4
●
Replace spark plugs
●
Inspect valve clearance
*6
5
●
Replace engine coolant
7
●
Replace brake fluid
*7
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
612
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
Canadian models
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel powered vehicles, replace every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 40,000 km (25,000 miles).
*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperature.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under this condition, have the transmission fluid changed
every 60,000 km (37,500 miles).
*6: Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
*7: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 721.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A
●
Replace engine oil
*1
0
●
Replace engine oil
*1
and oil filter
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1
●
Rotate tires
2
●
Replace air cleaner element
*2
●
Replace dust and pollen filter
*3
●
Inspect drive belt
3
●
Replace transmission fluid
*4,*5
4
●
Replace spark plugs
●
Inspect valve clearance
*6
5
●
Replace engine coolant
7
●
Replace brake fluid
*7
9
●
Service front and rear brakes
●
Inspect these items:
• Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
• Suspension components
• Driveshaft boots
• Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
• All fluid levels and condition of fluids
• Exhaust system
#
• Fuel lines and connections
#
Manual transmission models
Continued
613
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the
maintenance service.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the (home) button.
3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed.
4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen.
5. Press and hold the left selector wheel for about 10 seconds to enter the reset
mode.
6. Roll the left selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All
due items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
7. Press the left selector wheel to reset the selected item.
8. Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.
■
Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display
after a maintenance service results in the system
showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can
lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display after completing the required maintenance
service. If someone other than a dealer performs
maintenance service, reset the Maintenance
Minder
TM
display yourself.
You can also reset the Maintenance Minder
TM
display
using the driver information interface or audio/
information screen.
2 Vehicle Settings P. 128
2 Customized Features P. 354
Models with A-type meter
Left Selector Wheel
(home) Button
614
uuMaintenance Minder
TM
uTo Use Maintenance Minder
TM
Maintenance
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Roll the right selector wheel until the Maintenance Minder screen is displayed.
3. Press and hold the right selector wheel for about 10 seconds to enter the reset
mode.
4. Roll the right selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All
due items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
5. Press the right selector wheel to reset the selected item.
6. Repeat from step 3 for other items you wish to reset.
Models with B-type meter
Right Selector Wheel
615
Continued
Maintenance
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
1.5 L engine models
Brake/Clutch Fluid
(Black Cap)
Radiator Cap
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Battery
Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank
616
uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood
Maintenance
2.0 L engine models
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
Battery
Radiator Cap
Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank
Engine Oil Fill Cap
617
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Maintenance
Opening the Hood
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
driver’s side lower corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push the hood latch lever (located under
the front edge of the hood to the center) to
the side and raise the hood. Once you have
raised the hood slightly, you can release the
lever.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in
possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.
NOTICE
Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may
damage the engine cover and component parts.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop
function is activated.
3
WARNING
The hood support rod can become very hot
due to heat from the engine.
To ensure against possible burns, do not
handle the metal section of the rod: Use
the foam grip instead.
2.0 L engine models
Hood Release Handle
Pull
Lever
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
618
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
Recommended Engine Oil
Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and
viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive
the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.
*1:Formulated to improve fuel economy.
■
Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
Genuine Engine Oil Commercial Engine Oil
●
Honda Genuine Motor Oil
●
API service SN or higher grade fuel
efficient oil
●
API Certification Mark "Starburst"
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
The following seal indicates the oil is energy
conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Ambient Temperature
Ambient Temperature
619
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Continued
Maintenance
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil, being careful not to overfill.
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
620
Maintenance
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
1.5 L engine models
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
2.0 L engine models
1Oil Check
NOTICE
Under certain driving conditions, it is normal for the
engine oil level to rise above the upper mark. If you
have a concern, consult a dealer for details.
621
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Maintenance
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and
engine damage.
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
Use a neutral detergent to remove it if it spills on the
engine cover. Do not use organic solvents such as
brake cleaner.
2.0 L engine models
Engine Oil
Fill Cap
1.5 L engine models
Engine Oil
Fill Cap
2.0 L engine models
622
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver
information interface.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the Phillips-head screws and
slotted head screws by turning 90°
counter-clockwise on the undercarriage
and remove the under cover.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
Under CoverScrew
623
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Continued
Maintenance
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
1.5 L engine models
Drain Bolt
Washer
2.0 L engine models
Washer
Drain Bolt
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
624
Maintenance
5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the filter gasket.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
3.7 US qt (3.5 L)
4.2 US qt (4.0 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. If the
low oil pressure warning appears, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Oil Filter
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
Oil Filter
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
625
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Continued
Maintenance
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
u If the coolant level is below the MIN
mark, add the specified coolant until it
reaches the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
■
Reserve Tank
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about −31°F (−35°C). If your
vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures
below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the
coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for
details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
MAX
MIN
Reserve Tank
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
626
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8th turn counter-
clockwise and relieve any pressure in the
cooling system.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counter-clockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
■
Radiator
1Engine Coolant
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
1Radiator
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
Radiator Cap
627
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the continuously variable transmission fluid
yourself.
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the manual transmission fluid by yourself.
■
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2
■
Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda MTF
Models with continuously variable transmission
1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix Honda HCF-2 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda HCF-2 may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda HCF-2 is not covered by
Honda's new vehicle limited warranty.
Models with manual transmission
1Manual Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API
certificated SAE 0W-20 or 5W-20 viscosity motor oil
as a temporary measure.
Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does
not contain the proper additives for the transmission
and continued use can cause decreased shifting
performance and lead to transmission damage.
628
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch
*
Fluid
Maintenance
Brake/Clutch
*
Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reserve
tank.
The brake fluid reserve tank is also used for
your vehicle’s clutch fluid. As long as you keep
the brake fluid level as instructed above, there
is no need for checking the clutch fluid level.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■
Checking the Brake Fluid
1Brake/Clutch
*
Fluid
NOTICE
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
MAX
Reserve Tank
MIN
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
629
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Maintenance
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears
on the driver information interface.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
Use only commercially available windshield washer
fluid.
Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime
scale buildup.
Canadian models
630
Maintenance
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlights
Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the
light assembly.
Front Turn Signal Lights
Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
Front Side Marker Lights
Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights
*
Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.
1Headlights
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
* Not available on all models
631
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker Lights, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Continued
Maintenance
Brake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker Lights, and
Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Pry on the edge of the cover using a flat-tip
screwdriver to remove the cover.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.
2. Unscrew the bolts.
Brake Light: LED
Taillight: LED
Rear Side Marker Light: LED
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
1Brake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker Lights, and Rear Turn
Signal Light Bulbs
Brake lights, taillights, and rear side marker lights are
LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.
Cover
Bolt
632
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Lights, Taillights, Rear Side Marker Lights, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Maintenance
3. Grasp underneath the taillight and rotate it
upward to release the lower snap pin.
4. Rotate the taillight outward to release the
upper snap pin.
5. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
6. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
7. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
8. Align the pins with the body grommets,
then push in until they fully seat.
Lower Snap Pin
Upper Snap Pin
Bulb
Socket
633
uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillights and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Taillights and Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the holding clip using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Rear License Plate Light
Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
Taillight: LED
Back-Up Light: 16 W
1Taillights and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda
dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
then lift and remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is flat.
Clip
Push until the
pin is flat.
Holding Clip
Bulb
Socket
634
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHigh-Mount Brake Light Bulb
Maintenance
High-Mount Brake Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulb.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
High-Mount Brake Light: 21 W
1High-Mount Brake Light Bulb
High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.
Models with LED high-mount brake light
Models without LED high-mount brake light
Bulb
Socket
635
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and become noisy,
and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Lifting the Wiper Arms
1. Set the power mode to ON, then to
VEHICLE OFF.
2. Within 10 seconds of setting the power
mode to VEHICLE OFF, hold the wiper
switch in the MIST position for more than
two seconds.
u Both wiper arms are set to the
maintenance position as shown in the
image.
3. Lift both wiper arms.
1Lifting the Wiper Arms
NOTICE
When lifting the wiper arms, always follow the
instructions to move them into the maintenance
position.
The wiper arms may be damaged if they are moved
manually.
636
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade
Maintenance
Changing the Wiper Blade
1. Lift both wiper arms.
2 Lifting the Wiper Arms P. 635
2. Depress the lock tab, then slide the wiper
blade off the wiper arm.
3. Slide the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
4. Lower both wiper arms.
5. Set the power mode to ON, then set the
wiper switch to the MIST position once.
u The wiper arms return to the standard
position.
1Changing the Wiper Blade
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield,
as it may damage the wiper arm and/or the
windshield.
Tab
637
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■
Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and
comfort. Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified
pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all
tires, including the spare
*
. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa,
0.1-0.2 kgf/cm
2
) per month.
■
Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 642
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm
2
) higher than if
checked when cold.
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 461
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
3
WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
U.S. models
* Not available on all models
638
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Maintenance
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described as shown.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
Label
Example
Example
Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■
Tire Sizes
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
P205/55 R16 89H
P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
205: Tire width in millimeters.
55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
16: Rim diameter in inches.
89: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
H: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
639
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
Maintenance
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the examples in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
■
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
■
Glossary of Tire Terminology
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
There are two different formats that the TIN may be
listed in.
Format A
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
Format B
DOT 1A3 OFBEKP 1522
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
1A3: PLANT CODE
OFBEKP: MANUFACTURER'S CODE
15 22: DATE CODE
Year
Week
640
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
■
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
■
Treadwear
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
641
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
■
Traction
■
Temperature
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
642
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
Maintenance
Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm)
shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the
tread has worn so that the indicator is
exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare
*
, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
* Not available on all models
643
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Maintenance
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3
WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
644
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information
interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■
Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
■
Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Wheel nut torque for the tires that come standard-
equipped with your vehicle is as follows.
Wheel nut torque:
108 N·m (11 kgf·m, 80 lbf·ft)
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 461
Front
Direction Mark
U.S. models
Front
Front
645
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Continued
Maintenance
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the
law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
1Winter Tires
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
3
WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
646
Maintenance
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
*1:Tire chains to be used only on optional 235/40R18 91W tires.
• Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1032
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1032
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1034
Not recommended to use any type of chain or cable
1Winter Tires
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
Models with 215/55R16 93H tires
Models with 215/50R17 91H tires
Models with 235/40R18 91W tires
Models with 235/40R18 95Y tires
*1
647
Maintenance
Battery
Checking the Battery
The condition of the battery is monitored by a
sensor located on the negative terminal of the
battery. If there is a problem with this sensor,
the driver information interface will display a
warning message. If this happens, have your
vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Check the battery terminals for corrosion
monthly.
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 240
• The immobilizer system needs to be reset.
2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 102
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
3
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
Canadian models
648
uuBatteryuCharging the Battery
Maintenance
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
If the battery cable is removed while a system update is being performed, the
electrical system can be permanently damaged. Only remove the battery cable when
a system update is not being performed.
1Battery
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Consult a dealer for more information.
The battery installed in this vehicle is specifically
designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop.
Using a battery other than this specified type may
shorten the battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop
from activating. If you need to replace the battery,
make sure to select the specified type and size. Ask a
dealer for more details.
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF
*
, Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
, safety
support, and low tire pressure/ TPMS
*
indicators may
come on in amber along with a message in the gauge
when you set the power mode to ON after
reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
649
Maintenance
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Remote Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Remove the built-in key.
2. With the buttons facing down, remove the
upper half of the cover by carefully prying
on the slot with the key grip.
u Wrap a key grip with a cloth to prevent
scratching the keyless remote.
3. Remove the battery by prying on the edge
with flat-tip screwdriver. Make sure to
replace the battery with the correct polarity.
u Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratching the keyless remote.
1Replacing the Remote Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
3
WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD
The battery that powers the remote
transmitter can cause severe internal burns
and can even lead to death if swallowed.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children.
If you suspect that a child has swallowed
the battery, seek medical attention
immediately.
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
650
Maintenance
Climate Control System Maintenance
Air Conditioning
To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE
J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians.
Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one
removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and
labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.
Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance Minder
TM
messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Air Conditioning
NOTICE
Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment.
To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the
evaporator with one removed from a used or
salvaged vehicle.
Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
flammable and can be ignited during servicing if
proper procedures are not followed.
The air conditioner label is found under the hood:
2 Safety Labels P. 88
2 Specifications P. 710, 712
Canadian models
: Caution
: Flammable Refrigerant
:
:
Requires Registered
Technician to Service
Air Conditioning
System
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
contact a dealer for replacement.
651
Continued
Maintenance
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
■
Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical
devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are
splashed on them.
Do not use silicone-based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may
cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside
the vehicle.
If a silicone-based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin-based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Opening
■
Cleaning the Window
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass
cleaner, on or around the cover of the electrical
components around the rearview mirror.
uuCleaninguInterior Care
652
Maintenance
The driver's floor mat hooks over floor
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding
forward.
Do not put any additional floor mats on
top of the anchored mat.
To properly clean leather:
1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%
water and 10% neutral soap.
3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.
■
Floor Mats
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position any rear seat floor mats properly. If not
properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with
the front seat functions.
Lock
Unlock
Example
■
Maintaining Genuine Leather
*
1Maintaining Genuine Leather
*
It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as
soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather, resulting
in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the
leather. In addition, please note that some dark
colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats,
resulting in discoloration or stains.
* Not available on all models
653
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Continued
Maintenance
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches
on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you
find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap is stuck to painted surfaces.
• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
• Fold in the door mirrors.
• For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off.
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
• Do not spray water directly onto the camera or the area around it. Water may
enter the lens and cause the camera to malfunction.
■
Washing the Vehicle
■
Using an Automated Car Wash
■
Using High Pressure Cleaners
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
cause a malfunction.
Lock the doors when washing the vehicle.
Do not spray water onto the fuel fill door directly. A
high-pressure spray may cause it to open.
Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the
fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel
system or engine.
If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the
windshield, first set the wiper arms to the
maintenance position.
2 Lifting the Wiper Arms P. 635
Air Intake Vents
uuCleaninguExterior Care
654
Maintenance
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin-coated parts, they
may stain or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
■
Applying Wax
■
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin-Coated Parts
■
Cleaning the Window
1Washing the Vehicle
If water and any chemicals are on the brakes when
your vehicle is being washed, drive a short distance
and apply the brakes several times before parking.
Parking while brakes are wet may cause them to be
stuck by rust.
1Applying Wax
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin-Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
655
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent
to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals
(including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish
on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish,
the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains,
wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
■
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
*
■
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
* Not available on all models
656
Maintenance
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install any items other than Honda Genuine Accessories designated for
your vehicle over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs of the front
seats, on the sides of the rear seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side
windows.
Items other than Honda Genuine Accessories designated for your vehicle installed
in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle’s airbags or may
be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 695
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
1Accessories and Modifications
Honda Genuine Accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
Some Honda Genuine Accessories are supplied with
an exclusive owner’s manual for the operation and
care detail of the product. If an accessory owner’s
manual is provided to you, please refer to it for full
detail.
If any Honda Genuine Accessories become
inoperable, refer to the separate accessory owner’s
manual (if applicable) or consult a dealer for
assistance to troubleshoot the potential faulty
condition.
3
WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
657
uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications
Maintenance
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or
reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar
effect.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance.
Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not
make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle
to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle
is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other
devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely
affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly
resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.
Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.
658
This page intentionally left blank.
659
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools.................................. 660
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
*
....................... 661
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
..... 668
Handling of the Jack
............................ 678
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine........................ 679
If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak ....680
Emergency Engine Start ................... 681
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 682
If the Battery Is Dead
Jump Starting Procedure .................. 683
Continuously variable transmission models
Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 686
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 687
Indicator Coming On/Blinking
If the Engine oil pressure low Warning
Appears ..................................... 689
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On .....690
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 690
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 691
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake
System Indicator (Amber) Comes On .....692
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On ....................... 693
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 694
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 695
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 699
Emergency Towing........................... 701
If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door .... 702
If You Cannot Open the Trunk
............703
Refueling........................................... 704
Emergency Call (eCall)
*
.................... 705
* Not available on all models
661
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
*
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a spare tire. Go
to a dealer as soon as possible to have the regular tire repaired or replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Put the transmission into
(P.
2. Put the transmission into
(R.
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
1Changing a Flat Tire
*
Follow compact spare precautions:
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
2 Specifications P. 710
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a regular tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the regular rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the regular tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
NOTICE
Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call
your dealer or a professional towing service.
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
All models
* Not available on all models
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
*
662
Handling the Unexpected
1. Pull the strap on the floor lid and open the
lid.
2. Take the tool case out of the trunk.
3. Take the jack, wheel nut wrench, and jack
handle bar out of the tool case.
4. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
5. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
■
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1Changing a Flat Tire
*
Do not mount the compact spare on the front. If
mounted on the front, the compact spare, smaller in
size than the regular tire, may damage the
differential.
If either front tire goes flat, remove the rear tire on
the same side, and mount the compact spare on the
rear and the rear tire on the front.
Manual transmission models
Strap
Tool Case
Spare Tire
Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
* Not available on all models
663
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
*
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
7. Put the flat tip of the jack handle bar into
the edge of the wheel cover. Carefully pry
the edge and remove the cover.
u Wrap a cloth around the flat tip of the
jack handle bar to prevent scratches on
the cover.
8. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
Jack Handle Bar
Wheel Nut
Wheel
Cover
Models with wheel cover
All models
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
*
664
Handling the Unexpected
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in
the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
■
How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Jacking Points
Jacking Point
Jack
Handle
Bar
Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
Continued
665
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
*
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop
rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)
■
Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
Make sure the wire support ring is hooked into the
clips around the edge of the wheel cover.
Align the valve mark on the wheel cover to the tire
valve on the wheel, then install the wheel cover.
Models with wheel cover
Clips
Clips
Valve Mark
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
*
666
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the center cap.
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely store the jack, wheel nut wrench,
and jack handle bar back in the tool case.
Store the case in the trunk.
■
Storing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Make sure the wire support ring is on the outer side
of the tire valve as shown.
Models with wheel cover
Tire Valve
Wire Support Ring
1Storing the Flat Tire
3
WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
Models with
aluminum
wheels
Center Cap
Models with aluminum wheels
Spacer Cone
Wing Bolt
For
compact
spare tire
For full-
size tire
All models
All models
667
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
*
Handling the Unexpected
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), Tire
pressure monitor system problem. Check tire pressure. See your dealer. will
appear on the driver information interface and the indicator will start blinking for a
short time and then stay on; however, this is normal and is no cause for concern.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 461
■
TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire
U.S. models
668
uu
If a Tire Goes Flat
u
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
Handling the Unexpected
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise severely damaged, you will need to have the
vehicle towed. If the tire only has a small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can
use the temporary tire repair kit so that you can drive to the nearest service station
for a more permanent repair.
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Put the transmission into
(R.
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
The kit should not be used in the following situations.
Instead, contact a dealer or roadside assistance to
have the vehicle towed.
• The tire sealant has expired.
• More than one tire is punctured.
• The puncture or cut is larger than 5/32 inch (4 mm).
• The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is
outside the contact area.
• Damage has been caused by driving with the tire
extremely under inflated.
• The tire bead is no longer seated.
• The rim is damaged.
Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the
tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be
able to repair the puncture using the kit.
When the puncture is: Kit Use
Smaller than 5/32 inch
(4 mm)
Yes
Larger than 5/32 inch
(4 mm)
No
Contact
Area
* Not available on all models
Continued
669
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
Handling the Unexpected
■
Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
When making a temporary repair, carefully read the
instruction label applied on the kit.
Expiration Date
Speed Restriction Label
Repair Notification Label
Air Compressor Sealant Bottle
Instruction Label
Pressure Relief Tool
670
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
Handling the Unexpected
1. Pull the strap on the floor lid and open the
lid.
2. Take the kit out of the case.
3. Place the kit face up on flat ground near the
flat tire and away from traffic. Do not place
the kit on its side.
Strap
Tire Repair Kit
Continued
671
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve
stem.
2. Shake the sealant bottle.
3. Remove the bottle cap from the bottle
adapter.
4. Attach the air compressor hose onto the
bottle adapter. Screw it until it is tight.
5. Remove the soft cap from the sealant/air
hose.
6. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire
valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.
u Make sure the bottle remains upright to
ensure all the sealant flows into the tire.
■
Injecting Sealant and Air
1Injecting Sealant and Air
Keep the sealant bottle out of the reach of children.
The sealant is latex based and can permanently stain
clothing and other materials. Be careful during
handling and wipe up any spills immediately.
3
WARNING
Tire sealant contains substances that are
harmful and can be fatal if swallowed.
If accidentally swallowed, do not induce
vomiting. Drink plenty of water and get
medical attention immediately.
For skin or eye contact, flush with cool
water and get medical attention if
necessary.
Tire Valve Stem
Valve Cap
Air Compressor Hose
Bottle Adapter
Bottle
Cap
Tire Valve Stem
Sealant/Air Hose
Soft Cap
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
672
Handling the Unexpected
7. Plug in the air compressor to the accessory
power socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a
door or window.
2 Accessory Power Socket P. 223
8. Start the engine.
2 Starting the Engine P. 418
u Keep the engine running while injecting
sealant and air.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 87
1Injecting Sealant and Air
NOTICE
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit
compressor for more than 15 minutes. The
compressor can overheat and become permanently
damaged.
Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure
shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than
actual. After the sealant injection is complete, the
pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the
tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately
measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air
compressor off only after the sealant injection is
complete.
3
WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid buildup of toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
Continued
673
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
Handling the Unexpected
9. Turn the air compressor switch on to
inflate the tire.
u The air compressor starts injecting
sealant and air into the tire.
10. After the air pressure reaches the specified
pressure, turn off the kit.
u Check the air pressure gauge on the air
compressor.
u Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label for
the specified pressure.
11. Unplug the kit from the accessory power
socket.
12. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
13. Apply the repair notification label to the
flat surface of the wheel.
u The wheel surface must be clean to
ensure the label adheres properly.
Air Compressor Switch
OFF
ON
1Injecting Sealant and Air
If the specified air pressure is not reached within 10
minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for
the kit to provide the necessary seal, and your vehicle
will need to be towed.
See a Honda dealer for a replacement sealant bottle
and proper disposal of an empty bottle.
Repair Notification Label
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
674
Handling the Unexpected
1. Apply the speed restriction label to the
location as shown.
2. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes.
u Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
3. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
4. Recheck the air pressure using the air
compressor hose on the air compressor.
u Do not turn the air compressor on to
check the pressure.
2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 676
■
Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
Speed Restriction Label
Air Compressor Hose
1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
3
WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid buildup of toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
675
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
5. If the air pressure is
• Less than 19 psi (130 kPa):
Do not add air or continue driving. The leak is too severe. Call for help and have
your vehicle towed.
2 Emergency Towing P. 701
• Front: 33 psi (225 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa) or more:
Continue driving for another 10 minutes or until you reach the nearest service
station, whichever is sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not
reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure.
u If the air pressure does not go down after the 10 minutes driving, you do not
need to check the pressure any more.
• Greater than 19 psi (130 kPa), but less than front: 33 psi (225 kPa)/rear: 32 psi
(220 kPa):
Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches front:
33 psi (225 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa).
2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 676
Then, drive carefully for 10 more minutes or until you reach the nearest service
station, whichever is sooner. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not
reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure.
u You should repeat this procedure as long as the air pressure is within this range.
6. Unplug the kit from the accessory power socket.
7. Unscrew the air compressor hose from the tire valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
8. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
676
Handling the Unexpected
You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured under-inflated tire.
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2 Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair
the Flat Tire P. 669
2. Remove the kit from the case.
3. Place the kit face up on flat ground near
the tire to be inflated, away from traffic.
Do not place the kit on its side.
4. Remove the valve cap.
5. Attach the air compressor hose onto the
tire valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.
■
Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
NOTICE
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit
compressor for more than 15 minutes. The
compressor can overheat and become permanently
damaged.
Air Compressor Hose
677
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
*
Handling the Unexpected
6. Plug in the air compressor to the accessory
power socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a
door or window.
2 Accessory Power Socket P. 223
7. Start the engine.
2 Starting the Engine P. 418
u Keep the engine running while injecting
air.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 87
8. Turn the air compressor switch on to
inflate the tire.
u The air compressor starts to inject air
into the tire.
u If you have started the engine, leave it
running while injecting air.
9. Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure.
10. Turn off the kit.
u Check the pressure gauge on the air
compressor.
u If overinflated, deflate the tire using the
pressure relief tool attached to the air
compressor.
11. Unplug the kit from the accessory power
socket.
12. Unscrew the air compressor hose from the
tire valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
13. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
3
WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid buildup of toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
Air Compressor Switch
OFF
ON
Tire Valve Stem
Pressure Relief Tool
678
Handling the Unexpected
Handling of the Jack
Your vehicle has jacking points as shown.
When replacing your tires, consult a dealer.
Models with tire repair kit
Jacking Points
679
Handling the Unexpected
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.
2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 683
Depending on the situation, it may be possible to temporarily start the engine using the emergency starting procedure.
2 Emergency Engine Start P. 681
Starter condition Checklist
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
Check for a message on the driver information interface.
●
If the To start, touch start button with emblem side of remote message appears
2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 680
uMake sure the keyless remote is in its operating range.
Check the fuses.
Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 699
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with a
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.
2 Starting the Engine P. 418
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2 Immobilizer System P. 181
2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 91
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 111
Check the fuses.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 699
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 701
Continuously variable transmission models
680
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
Handling the Unexpected
If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the To start, touch start button with emblem side of
remote message appears on the driver information interface, the ENGINE START/
STOP button flashes, and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows:
1. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
u The beeper sounds and the ENGINE
START/STOP button flashes for about
30 seconds.
2. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the keyless
remote while the ENGINE START/STOP
button is flashing. The buttons on the
keyless remote should be facing you.
u The beeper sounds, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button stays on for about
10 seconds.
3. Depress the brake pedal (continuously
variable transmission) or clutch pedal
(manual transmission) and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button while the
ENGINE START/STOP button is on.
u The engine starts.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
681
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Start
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Engine Start
If the engine does not start using the normal starting procedure, you may be able to
start it using the emergency starting procedure below.
Do not use this procedure if it is not an emergency.
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the transmission is in
(P, then set the power mode to ACCESSORY.
3. Firmly depress the brake pedal, then press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP
button for at least 15 seconds.
This should be considered a system malfunction even if you are able to start the
engine using the above procedure.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Continuously variable transmission models
1Emergency Engine Start
Refer to the following if you cannot move the shift
lever out of the
(P position.
2 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 686
682
uu
Engine Does Not Start
u
Emergency Engine Stop
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the
transmission to utilize engine braking.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into
(P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.
1Emergency Engine Stop
NOTICE
Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while
driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine
to be turned off.
If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while
driving, the beeper sounds.
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
683
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
If the Battery Is Dead
Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Open the cover on the positive + terminal.
2. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle’s battery + terminal.
3. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using an automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery,
select a lower charging voltage than 15-
volt. Check the charger manual for the
proper setting.
4. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
1Jump Starting Procedure
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Be careful
not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable
ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
3
WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Booster Battery
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
Booster Battery
uuIf the Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure
684
Handling the Unexpected
5. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the stud bolt as shown. Do
not connect this jumper cable to any other
part.
6. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its RPM slightly.
7. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
1Jump Starting Procedure
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
1.5 L engine models
2.0 L engine models
685
uuIf the Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure
Handling the Unexpected
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
■
What to Do After the Engine Starts
1What to Do After the Engine Starts
The Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) system, Vehicle
Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF
*
, Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed Follow
*
, safety support, and
low tire pressure/ TPMS
*
indicators may come on in
amber along with a message in the gauge when you
set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the
battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph
(20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
686
Handling the Unexpected
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
3. Remove the built-in key from the keyless
remote.
4. Wrap a cloth around the tip of the built-in
key. Put it into the shift lock release slot as
shown in the image, and remove the cover.
5. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
6. While pushing the key in, press the shift
lever release button, and place the shift
lever into
(N.
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
■
Releasing the Lock
Continuously variable transmission models
Slot
Cover
Release Button
Shift Lock Release Slot
687
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The temperature gauge is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses power.
• The Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool.
message appears on the driver information interface.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
■
First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then, open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge at
the mark may damage the engine.
Continuing to drive with the Engine temperature
too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool.
message on the driver information interface may
damage the engine.
3
WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
Models with B-type meter
H
All models
Models with B-type meter
H
All models
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
688
Handling the Unexpected
■
Next thing to do
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the Engine
temperature too hot. Do not drive.
Allow engine to cool. message on the
driver information interface goes off.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■
Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the driver information
interface.
If the Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool.
message does not appear, resume driving. If it appears again, contact a dealer for
repairs.
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Reserve Tank
MIN
MAX
689
Handling the Unexpected
Indicator Coming On/Blinking
If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears
■
Reasons for the warning to appear
Appears when the engine oil pressure is low.
■
What to do as soon as the warning
appears
1. Immediately park the vehicle on level
ground in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights
on.
■
What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for
approximately three minutes.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
2 Oil Check P. 619
3. Start the engine and check the Engine oil
pressure low warning.
u The warning disappears: Start driving
again.
u The warning does not disappear within
10 seconds: Immediately stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs.
1If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
690
uu
Indicator Coming On/Blinking
u
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■
Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system.
■
What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■
Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■
What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■
What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
691
uuIndicator Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks
■
Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■
What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
■
Reasons for the indicator to blink
There is a problem with the electric parking brake system.
■
What to do when the indicator blinks
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator (red) and ABS indicator
come on simultaneously, the electronic brake
distribution system is not working. This can result in
vehicle instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same
time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes
on, the parking brake may not work.
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On or Blinks at the Same Time When the
Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
P. 692
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
692
uu
Indicator Coming On/Blinking
u
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System
Indicator (Amber) Comes On
■
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) comes on or blinks at the
same time when the Brake System Indicator (Amber) comes on,
release the parking brake manually or automatically.
2 Parking Brake P. 571
• If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at
the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,
stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer
immediately.
u To prevent the vehicle from moving:
Put the transmission into (P.
Put the transmission into
(1 or (R.
• If only the brake system indicator (red) is turned off, avoid using the
parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
1
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same
Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able
to release it.
If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake
system indicator (amber) come on at the same time,
the parking brake is working.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same
time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes
on, the parking brake may not work because it is
checking the system.
If you repeatedly operate the electric parking brake in
a short period of time, the brake stops operating to
prevent heating of the system and the indicator
blinks.
It returns to its original state in approximately 1
minute.
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
693
uuIndicator Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■
Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.
■
What to do when the indicator comes on
• Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
• If Do not drive displays on the driver information interface,
immediately stop in a safe place and contact a dealer.
694
uu
Indicator Coming On/Blinking
u
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■
Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one
minute, and then stays on.
If the compact spare tire
*
is installed, the indicator will either come on or
it will first blink for about one minute, then stay on.
■
What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 461
If the compact spare tire
*
causes the indicator to come on, change the
tire to a regular tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.
■
What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire
*
causes the indicator to first blink, and then stay on, change
the tire to a regular tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 461
U.S. models
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
* Not available on all models
695
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Located near the battery. Push the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
■
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Fuse Box
Tab
696
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
■
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1 BATTERY
150 A
*1
125 A
*2
2
- 40 A
- 40 A
F/BOX OPTION 60 A
- 40 A
- 40 A
*1
F/BOX OPTION2
*
(40 A)
*2
DC/DC2 (30 A)
F/BOX MAIN 60 A
3
- 40 A
- 40 A
- 40 A
RR DEFROSTER 40 A
- 40 A
HTR MTR 40 A
- 40 A
4
- 30 A
ABS/VSA MTR 40 A
DC/DC (30 A)
- 30 A
IG MAIN 30 A
- 30 A
R/M2 30 A
5
ST MAGNETIC SW 30 A
WIPER 30 A
EPS 70 A
R/M1 30 A
ABS/VSA FSR 40 A
MAIN FAN 30 A
F/BOX MAIN2 40 A
6 SUB FAN 30 A
7 IG MAIN2 30 A
8- -
9 - -
10 - -
11 USB CHG
*
(10 A)
12 - -
13 H/STRG
*
(10 A)
14 - -
15 - -
16 MG CLUTCH (10 A)
17 WASHER 15 A
18 HORN 10 A
19 BACK UP 15 A
20 AUDIO
*
(15 A)
21 - -
22 DBW 15 A
23 EOP
*
(20 A)
24 BACKUP FI-ECU 10 A
25 IGP 15 A
Circuit Protected Amps
*1:Models with A-type meter
*2:Models with B-type meter
26 TCU
*
(15 A)
27 LCM L (15 A)
28 INJ 15 A
29 STOP 10 A
30 LCM R (15 A)
31 IG COIL 15 A
32 EVTC
*
20 A
33 HAZARD 15 A
34 - -
35 - -
36 AUDIO VST MAIN (30 A)
37 BACKUP2 (30 A)
38 - -
39 - -
40 VBACT
*
10 A
41 IGPS [LAF] 10 A
42 IG1 MON2 7.5 A
Circuit Protected Amps
* Not available on all models
697
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label under the steering column.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.
■
Interior Fuse Box
Fuse Box
Sub Fuse Box
Fuse Label
698
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
■
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1 P/W DR 20 A
2 P/W AS 20 A
3 P/W RR R 20 A
4 P/W RR L 20 A
5 OPTION 10 A
6 SRS 10 A
7 T/G MTR / TRUNK ACT 10 A
8- -
9 FR ACC SOCKET 20 A
10 DOOR LOCK 20 A
11 METER 10 A
12 OPTION3 (ST CUT) 10 A
13 OPTION2 (RR WIP)
*
(10 A)
14 OPTION6 (VB SOL) 10 A
15 DR DOOR UNLOCK (10 A)
16 SUNROOF
*
(20 A)
17 SBW1
*
(10 A)
18 - -
19 - -
20 RR FOG
*
(10 A)
21 CARGO ACC SOCKET
*
(20 A)
22 SMART 10 A
23 DR DOOR LOCK (10 A)
24 SBW2
*
(7.5 A)
25 IMG 10 A
26 SRS 10 A
27 ACG / D/V / ST CUT RLY 20 A
28 OPTION5 10 A
29 FUEL PUMP 15 A
30 L SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A
31 R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A
32 - -
33 - -
34 - -
35 - -
36 OPTION3 (SUNSHADE)
*
(20 A)
37 IGA2
*
(15 A)
38 - -
39 R SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A
40 P/SEAT REC / RR HI
*
(20 A)
41 P/SEAT SLIDE / FR HI
*
(20 A)
42 BACK LT
*
(10 A)
43 A/C 10 A
44 DRL 10 A
45 ACC 10 A
46 ACC KEY LOCK 10 A
47 L SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A
48 H/SEAT 20 A
49 AS P/SEAT REC
*
(20 A)
50 P/LUMBAR DR
*
(10 A)
51 P/LUMBAR AS
*
(10 A)
52 RR H/SEAT
*
(20 A)
Circuit Protected Amps
53 AS P/SEAT SLI
*
(20 A)
54 OPTION1 / FUEL LID 10 A
55 AUDIO AMP
*
(30 A)
56 ADS
*
(30 A)
Circuit Protected Amps
A BACKUP2 MAIN (10 A)
B AUDIO SUB VST
*
(7.5 A)
C ACC VST (10 A)
D VST 1 (10 A)
E AUDIO VST (15 A)
FEOP
*
(20 A)
G - -
H VST 2 (10 A)
Circuit Protected Amps
Sub Fuse Box
* Not available on all models
699
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the main fuse in the engine
compartment fuse box.
u Look at the fuse through the hole.
u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a
dealer.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and
confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.
2 Fuse Locations P. 695
Replace with a fuse of the same specified amperage.
Main Fuse
Hole
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
700
Handling the Unexpected
4. Check the combined fuses in the engine
compartment fuse box.
u Look into the space between the fuses.
u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a
dealer.
5. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with
the fuse puller and replace it with a new
one.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.
Combined Fuse
Blown Fuse
Fuse Puller
701
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■
Flatbed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
■
Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
Make sure the parking brake is released. If you
cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must
be transported by the flatbed equipment.
2 Parking Brake P. 571
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
702
Handling the Unexpected
If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Pull the release cord toward you.
u The release cord unlocks the fuel fill door
when it is pulled.
3. Open the fuel fill door.
2 How to Refuel P. 597
■
What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
1What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
Release Cord
703
Handling the Unexpected
If You Cannot Open the Trunk
If you cannot open the trunk, use the following procedure.
1. Remove the cover with a key.
u Wrap a key with a cloth to prevent
scratching the cover.
2. Pull the release cord.
3. Replace the cover.
■
What to Do If Unable to Open the Trunk
1What to Do If Unable to Open the Trunk
Following up:
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
Cover
Release Cord
704
Handling the Unexpected
Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the fuel fill door.
2 How to Refuel P. 597
3. Take the funnel out of the tool case in the
trunk.
2 Types of Tools P. 660
4. Place the end of the funnel on the lower
part of filler opening, then insert it slowly
and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the funnel
goes down along with the filler pipe.
5. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel
container.
u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.
6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck.
u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before
storing it.
7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
NOTICE
Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container
or any funnel other than the one provided with your
vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.
Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel
tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel
system and its seal.
Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is
gasoline before you refuel.
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flames away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
Funnel
705
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Call (eCall)
*
Automatic emergency call
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, the
vehicle will attempt to connect to a Public
Safety Answering Point (PSAP) operator. Once
a connection is established, your location
information will be sent to a PSAP operator
with whom you will be able to speak.
When an emergency call is initiated, the vehicle speakers are disabled so that you
can hear the operator.
When the power mode is set to ON, the eCall indicator lights up in green for 1
second, then in red for 1 second.
eCall Indicator
* Not available on all models
uuEmergency Call (eCall)
*
uAutomatic emergency call
706
Handling the Unexpected
If the eCall system is working properly, the indicator will light up in green.
• Green: eCall system is ready.
• Blinking in green: eCall system is connected and making an eCall to an operator.
• Repeating a pattern of short flashes of the red light: The eCall system has failed
to connect to an operator. The eCall indicator will continue this pattern for 5
seconds, then it will light up in green.
If the eCall system is disabled in the event of a critical system failure, the following
warning will be given to the occupants of the vehicle:
• Red or blacked out: A problem with the eCall system has occurred. If the indicator
stays red or blacked out even after you have restarted the vehicle, have the system
check by a dealer.
1Emergency Call (eCall)
*
Your vehicle may NOT be able to connect to an
operator if:
• The 12V battery is too low.
• Your vehicle is in an area without adequate cellular
coverage.
• There is a problem with the eCall system itself or its
peripheral equipment such as the microphone or
speakers.
* Not available on all models
707
uuEmergency Call (eCall)
*
uManual emergency call
Handling the Unexpected
Manual emergency call
If you need to make an emergency call, you
can establish a connection manually. Press the
SOS button and hold it for more than 0.5
seconds.
To cancel a call, press the SOS button for
more than 2 seconds, before 10 seconds has
elapsed since the SOS button was pressed.
The SOS button is protected by a cover. Open the cover to gain access.
When an emergency call is initiated, the vehicle speakers are disabled so that you
can hear the operator.
1Manual emergency call
Do NOT press the button while you are driving. If you
need to contact an operator, park the vehicle in a
safe place before you make a call.
If the eCall system at first fails to connect to an
operator, it will try again until a connection is
established. However, if 30 seconds have elapsed
since the first try was attempted, the system will no
longer attempt to establish a connection.
The SOS button does not cancel a call once the
system is connected to an operator.
Cover
Microphone
SOS Button
708
This page intentionally left blank.
709
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 710
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number ......................................... 714
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 715
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 716
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 717
Warranty Coverages ........................ 719
Authorized Manuals......................... 722
Customer Service Information......... 723
Open Source License ........................ 724
710
Information
Specifications
■
Vehicle Specifications
■
Air Conditioning
Model Civic
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
Charge Quantity 15.3 – 17.1 oz (435 – 485 g)
Lubricant Type RB100EV-01 (POE)
Quantity 6.7 – 7.5 cu-in (110 – 123 cm
3
)
1.5 L engine models
■
Engine Specifications
■
Fuel
■
Washer Fluid
Displacement 91.38 cu-in (1,498 cm
3
)
Spark Plugs NGK DILKAR8P8SY
Type
Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane
number 91 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 1.6 US qt (1.5 L)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)
■
Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam) LED
Headlights (High Beam) LED
Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED
Front Side Marker Lights LED
Front Turn Signal Lights LED
Side Turn Signal Lights
(on Door Mirrors)
*
LED
Brake Lights LED
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21 W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Back-Up Lights 16 W
Taillights LED
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Light LED
Interior Lights
Map Lights LED
Ceiling Light LED
Ambient Lights LED
Vanity Mirror Lights 2.3 W
Center Console Light LED
Glove Box Light LED
Trunk Light 5 W
* Not available on all models
711
uuSpecificationsu
Continued
Information
■
Brake/Clutch Fluid
■
Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified Honda MTF
Capacity Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 L)
■
Engine Oil
■
Engine Coolant
Recommended
·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20
·API service SN or higher grade 0W-20
Capacity
Change 3.4 US qt (3.2 L)
Change
including
filter
3.7 US qt (3.5 L)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.48 US gal (5.59 L)
(change including the remaining 0.17 US gal
(0.65 L) in the reserve tank)
■
Tire
For the tire size and pressure information, see the label on
driver’s doorjamb.
*1: U.S. models with optional spare tire and Canadian models
Regular
Size
235/40R18 91W
235/40R18 95Y
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
Front
33 (225 [2.25])
Rear
32 (220 [2.2])
Compact
Spare
*
Size T125/80R17 99M
*1
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size
Regular 18 x 8J
Compact Spare
*
17 x 4T
*1
* Not available on all models
712
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■
Vehicle Specifications
■
Air Conditioning
Model Civic
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
See the certification label on the driver’s
doorjamb
Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
Charge Quantity 15.3 – 17.1 oz (435 – 485 g)
Lubricant Type ND-OIL 14 (POE)
Quantity 6.4 – 7.3 cu-in (105 – 120 cm
3
)
2.0 L engine models
■
Engine Specifications
■
Fuel
■
Washer Fluid
Displacement 121.57 cu-in (1,993 cm
3
)
Spark Plugs NGK DILZKAR7G11Y
Type
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number
87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 1.6 US qt (1.5 L)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)
■
Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam) LED
Headlights (High Beam) LED
Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED
Front Side Marker Lights LED
Front Turn Signal Lights LED
Brake Lights LED
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21 W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Back-Up Lights 16 W
Taillights LED
High-Mount Brake Light 21 W
Rear License Plate Light LED
Interior Lights
Map Lights LED
Ceiling Light LED
Ambient Lights LED
Vanity Mirror Lights
*
2.3 W
Center Console Light
*
LED
Glove Box Light LED
Trunk Light 5 W
* Not available on all models
713
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■
Brake Fluid
■
Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified Honda HCF-2
Capacity Change 2.9 US qt (2.7 L)
■
Engine Oil
■
Engine Coolant
Recommended
·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20
·API service SN or higher grade 0W-20
Capacity
Change 3.9 US qt (3.7 L)
Change
including
filter
4.2 US qt (4.0 L)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.43 US gal (5.42 L)
(change including the remaining
0.17 US gal (0.65 L) in the reserve tank)
■
Tire
*1: Models with 16 inch wheel
*2: Models with 18 inch wheel
Regular
Size
215/55R16 93H
*1
235/40R18 91W
*2
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
Front
32 (220 [2.2])
*1
33 (225 [2.25])
*2
Rear 32 (220 [2.2])
*1, *2
Compact
Spare
Size
T125/80D16 97M
*1
T125/85D16 99M
*2
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm
2
])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size
Regular
16 x 7J
*1
18 x 8J
*2
Compact Spare 16 x 4T
714
Information
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number,
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are
shown as follows.
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
2.0 L engine models
1.5 L engine models
Engine Number
Continuously Variable
Transmission Number
Manual Transmission
Number
715
Information
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements
and standards of the regulation listed below:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Telematics Control Unit
*
ISED RF exposure
IC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator & your body.
NOTE: THE MANUFACTURER IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY RADIO OR TV INTERFERENCE CAUSED BY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS
TO THIS EQUIPMENT. SUCH MODIFICATIONS COULD VOID THE USER'S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.
Canadian models
* Not available on all models
716
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-888-275-
9171); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
717
Continued
Information
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check the state of the readiness codes, set the power mode to ON, without starting
the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for 15 to 20 seconds. If the
malfunction indicator lamp then turns off, the readiness codes are set. If the
malfunction indicator lamp blinks five to ten times, the readiness codes are not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested and the readiness codes are not set,
prepare the vehicle for testing by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in
(P (continuously variable transmission) or (N (manual
transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about
3 minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D (continuously variable transmission) or 5th (manual transmission). Do not use
cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do
this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
718
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information
8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
719
Continued
Information
Warranty Coverages
■
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against
rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
720
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■
Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts
The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for
motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty
coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the
vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on
the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely
for commercial or industrial use.
Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for
repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on
the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another
part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade
Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or
recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service
provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under
warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a
manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the
manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the
warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade
Commission.
721
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
■
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
■
EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report
violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
Director,
Light-Duty Vehicle Center,
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Attention: Warranty Claim
2000 Traverwood Drive,
Ann Arbor, MI 48105;
722
Information
Authorized Manuals
■
Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit https://techinfo.honda.com/ for pricing and options.
■
For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
■
For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
723
Information
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals able to deal with any problems
you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that
they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Service.
U.S. Owners
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop CHI-5
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: [email protected]m
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546
In Guam
Triple J Autogroup
157 S. Marine Corps Drive
Tamuning, GU 96913
Tel: (671) 648-2277
In Saipan, Commonwealth of the
Northern Mariana Islands
Joeten Motor Company, Inc.
P.O. Box 500680
Saipan, MP 96950
Tel: (670) 234-5562
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number P. 714
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
724
Information
Open Source License
■
Meter Open Source License
The software embedded in this product includes open source software. Refer to the
following website for details regarding the open source software.
https://www.nippon-seiki.co.jp/global/business_ic_meter/
■
TCU Open Source License
*
To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and other open source licenses
that have the obligations to disclose source code, that is contained in this product,
and to access all referred license terms, copyright notices and other relevant
documents please visit https://opensource.lge.com. LG Electronics will also provide
open source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing
such distribution (such as the cost of media, shipping, and handling) upon email
request to [email protected]. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this
information for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product.
* Not available on all models
Index
725
Index
Index
Numbers
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode ................... 431
Operation ............................................... 432
A
AAC........................................................... 292
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 581
Accelerator Position Meter ..................... 152
Accessories and Modifications ................ 656
Accessory Power Socket........................... 223
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)................ 521
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow .......................................... 500
Adding
Coolant .................................................. 625
Engine Oil ............................................... 621
Washer ................................................... 629
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 618
Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 214
Clock ...................................................... 160
Front Head Restraints.............................. 212
Front Seats.............................................. 207
Mirrors.................................................... 205
Rear Seats............................................... 209
Sound..................................................... 246
Steering Wheel ....................................... 204
Agile Handling Assist............................... 459
Air Conditioning System
(Climate Control System)........................ 231
Changing the Mode ........................ 231, 232
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 233
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 650
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 232
Sensor ..................................................... 236
Synchronization Mode ............................. 235
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 231
Air Pressure ............................... 638, 711, 713
Airbags ........................................................ 53
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 59
After a Collision......................................... 56
Airbag Care............................................... 72
Event Data Recorder .................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 56
Indicator.............................................. 69, 96
Knee Airbags............................................. 61
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 70
Sensors...................................................... 53
Side Airbags .............................................. 64
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 67
AM/FM Radio .................................... 248, 285
Android Auto
TM
................................ 263, 313
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 581
Indicator.................................................... 96
Apple CarPlay ................................... 259, 308
Armrest ..................................................... 214
AT&T Hotspot ........................................... 306
Audio Remote Controls............................ 241
Audio System............................ 238, 245, 267
Adjusting the Sound........................ 246, 281
Alexa Built-In........................................... 284
AM/FM Radio.................................. 248, 285
Android Auto
TM
............................... 263, 313
Apple CarPlay.................................. 259, 308
Audio/Information Screen........................ 271
Bluetooth® Audio............................ 254, 295
Display Setup .................................. 247, 282
Error Messages........................................ 328
General Information ................................ 330
Google built-in ........................................ 318
Home Screen........................................... 275
How to Update Wirelessly ....................... 279
iPod ................................................ 250, 289
Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 377
MP3/WMA/AAC/FLAC/WAV............ 252, 292
Reactivating ............................................ 240
Recommended Devices............................ 330
Remote Controls ..................................... 241
Security Code.......................................... 240
Selecting an Audio Source....................... 283
Status Bar................................................ 278
System Updates....................................... 279
Theft Protection ...................................... 240
USB Flash Drives.............................. 292, 330
USB Port(s) .............................................. 239
Wallpaper Setup...................................... 273
Audio/Information Screen ....................... 271
Authorized Manuals ................................ 722
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 177
726
Index
Auto High-Beam ....................................... 196
Indicator.................................................... 99
Auto Idle Stop................................... 438, 444
OFF Button ...................................... 439, 445
Automatic Brake Hold.............................. 576
Indicator............................................ 93, 576
Automatic Brake Hold System
Indicator............................................ 93, 576
Average Fuel Economy..................... 118, 146
Average Speed.................................. 120, 148
B
Battery....................................................... 647
Charging System Indicator ................. 94, 690
If the Battery Is Dead ............................... 683
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ........ 647
Maintenance (Replacing).......................... 649
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 44
Beverage Holders...................................... 219
Blind Spot Information System ................ 467
Bluetooth® Audio ............................. 254, 295
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ........... 375, 394
Booster Seats (For Children)....................... 86
Brake System............................................. 571
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 581
Automatic Brake Hold.............................. 576
Brake Assist System ................................. 582
Fluid ........................................................ 628
Foot Brake ............................................... 575
Indicator (Amber)............................... 93, 692
Indicator (Red)........................... 92, 691, 692
Parking Brake .......................................... 571
Braking Pressure Meter............................ 152
Brightness Control
(Instrument Panel).......................... 202, 203
Built-in Key ............................................... 163
Bulb Replacement .................................... 630
Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light,
and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs............ 631
Front Side Marker Lights.......................... 630
Front Turn Signal Lights........................... 630
Headlights............................................... 630
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 634
Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. 630
Rear License Plate Light ........................... 633
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights .................................................... 630
Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs............. 633
Bulb Specifications ........................... 710, 712
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 87
Cargo Floor Box........................................ 221
Carrying Cargo ................................. 413, 415
Certification Label.................................... 714
Changing Bulbs ........................................ 630
Charging System Indicator................. 94, 690
Child Safety................................................. 73
Childproof Door Locks............................. 176
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 180
Child Seat ................................................... 73
Booster Seats ............................................ 86
Child Seat for Infants ................................ 75
Child Seat for Small Children .................... 76
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 81
Larger Children ......................................... 85
Rear-facing Child Seat............................... 75
Selecting a Child Seat ............................... 77
Using a Tether .......................................... 83
Childproof Door Locks............................. 176
Cleaning the Exterior............................... 653
Cleaning the Interior ............................... 651
Climate Control System ........................... 231
Changing the Mode........................ 231, 232
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 233
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 650
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 232
Sensors ................................................... 236
Synchronization Mode ............................ 235
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 231
CMBS
TM
(Collision Mitigation Braking
System
TM
) ................................................ 474
Coat Hook ................................................ 221
Collision Mitigation Braking System
TM
(CMBS
TM
) ................................................. 474
Compact Spare Tire.................. 661, 711, 713
Console Compartment............................. 218
727
Index
Continuously Variable Transmission
Creeping................................................. 426
Fluid ....................................................... 627
Kickdown ............................................... 426
Operating the Shift Lever .......... 28, 428, 430
Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 686
Shifting........................................... 427, 429
Controls .................................................... 159
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 625
Adding the Coolant ................................ 625
Overheating............................................ 687
Creeping (Continuously Variable
Transmission).......................................... 426
Cross Traffic Monitor ............................... 590
Cup Holders.............................................. 219
Customer Service Information ................ 723
Customize Display.................... 127, 141, 157
Customized Features ............... 128, 349, 354
D
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 195
Dead Battery ............................................ 683
Defaulting All the Settings.............. 353, 374
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows................................................. 233
Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 715
Dimming
Headlights .............................................. 192
Rearview Mirror ...................................... 205
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 619
Display Setup ............................................ 247
Door Mirrors ............................................. 206
Doors ......................................................... 162
Auto Door Locking .................................. 177
Auto Door Unlocking............................... 177
Door Open Message.................................. 43
Keys ........................................................ 162
Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Inside ...................................... 174
Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Outside ................................... 165
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 640
Drive Mode Switch ........................... 449, 452
Driver Attention Monitor ................ 121, 149
Driver Information Interface ... 115, 138, 143
Switching the Display ...................... 115, 143
Driving....................................................... 411
Braking.................................................... 571
Continuously Variable Transmission ......... 426
Shifting Gear ........................................... 433
Shifting Position .............................. 427, 429
Starting the Engine .................................. 418
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 650
E
Eco Assist® System ...................................... 15
ECON Button............................................. 437
Elapsed Time..................................... 120, 148
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator............................................ 97, 693
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 457
Emergency ................................................ 701
Emergency Engine Stop ........................... 682
Emergency Trunk Opener................ 180, 703
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 717
Engine
Coolant................................................... 625
If the Battery Is Dead ............................... 683
Oil........................................................... 618
Starting................................................... 418
Engine Coolant......................................... 625
Adding the Coolant................................. 625
Overheating ............................................ 687
Temperature Gauge ................................ 112
Engine Oil ................................................. 618
Adding.................................................... 621
Checking................................................. 619
Displaying Oil Life.................................... 606
Engine oil pressure low Warning ............. 689
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 618
Engine oil pressure low Warning ............ 689
ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 188
Exhaust Gas Hazard
(Carbon Monoxide) .................................. 87
Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 653
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 206
728
Index
F
Features..................................................... 237
Filters
Dust and Pollen ....................................... 650
Oil ........................................................... 622
FLAC................................................... 252, 292
Flat Tire ..................................................... 661
Floor Mats ................................................. 652
Fluids
Brake/Clutch............................................ 628
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) ..................................................... 627
Engine Coolant........................................ 625
Manual Transmission ............................... 627
Windshield Washer.................................. 629
FM/AM Radio .................................... 248, 285
Folding Down the Rear Seats................... 209
Foot Brake................................................. 575
Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 56
Front Head Restraints............................... 212
Front Seat Heaters.................................... 229
Front Seats
Adjusting................................................. 207
Front Wide View Camera......................... 568
Fuel...................................................... 30, 596
Average Fuel Economy..................... 118, 146
Economy ................................................. 599
Gauge ..................................................... 111
Instant Fuel Economy....................... 118, 146
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 96
Range.............................................. 118, 146
Recommendation .................................... 596
Refueling......................................... 596, 704
Fuel Economy ........................................... 599
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 30, 597
Fuses.......................................................... 695
Inspecting and Changing......................... 699
Locations......................................... 695, 697
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Average Fuel Economy .................... 118, 146
Economy ................................................. 599
Gauge..................................................... 111
Information ............................................. 596
Instant Fuel Economy ...................... 118, 146
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 96
Refueling......................................... 596, 704
Gauges ...................................................... 110
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Manual Transmission............................... 433
Glass (care)........................................ 651, 654
Glove Box.................................................. 217
G-Meter..................................................... 153
Google built-in ......................................... 318
H
Handling of the Jack................................ 678
Handling the Unexpected ....................... 659
HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ...................... 375, 394
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Call History ................................... 387, 403
Automatic Transferring ................... 385, 402
Favorite Contacts ............................ 388, 404
HFL Buttons .................................... 375, 394
HFL Menus...................................... 378, 397
HFL Status Display........................... 377, 396
Limitations for Manual Operation.... 377, 396
Making a Call ................................. 390, 406
Options During a Call...................... 393, 410
Phone Setup ................................... 380, 399
Receiving a Call............................... 392, 409
Ringtone......................................... 385, 402
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 8
HD Radio
TM
............................................... 288
Headlights ................................................ 192
Aiming.................................................... 630
Auto High-Beam ..................................... 196
Dimming................................................. 192
Operating ............................................... 192
Heated Steering Wheel ........................... 228
Heaters (Front Seat)................................. 229
Heaters (Rear Seat) .................................. 230
HFL (HandsFreeLink®) ...................... 375, 394
High Beam Indicator.................................. 99
Hill Start Assist System............................. 423
Honda App License Agreement .............. 331
729
Index
Honda Sensing® ................................ 31, 471
HondaLink® ............................................ 298
I
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification............................... 714
Illumination Control
Dial................................................. 202, 203
Immobilizer System.................................. 181
Indicator ................................................. 102
Indicators.................................................... 90
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)........ 105, 522
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Interval ... 106
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow........................................... 105, 501
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 96
Auto High-Beam ....................................... 99
Auto Idle Stop (Green) ............................ 103
Auto Idle Stop OFF.................................. 103
Auto Idle Stop Suspend........................... 104
Auto Idle Stop System (Amber) ............... 103
Automatic Brake Hold....................... 93, 576
Automatic Brake Hold System ........... 93, 576
Charging System............................... 94, 690
Cruise Mode ........................................... 106
ECON Mode ........................... 101, 437, 449
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System ............................................ 97, 693
High Beam................................................ 99
Immobilizer System ................................. 102
INDIVIDUAL Mode ........................... 101, 452
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .......... 106
Lights On................................................... 99
Low Fuel.................................................... 96
Low Temperature .................................... 101
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ..... 98, 460, 465, 694
M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/
Shift ........................................................ 94
Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 94, 690
NORMAL Mode ....................... 101, 449, 452
Parking Brake and Brake System
(Amber) ........................................... 93, 692
Parking Brake and Brake System
(Red)........................................ 92, 691, 692
Safety Support................................. 107, 109
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 46, 95
Security System Alarm ............................. 102
Shift Position ............................................. 94
Shift Up/Down................................... 95, 435
SPORT Mode ........................... 101, 449, 452
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 69, 96
System Message ...................................... 100
Transmission System.................................. 95
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 99
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) OFF... 97, 458
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®)
System............................................. 97, 457
Information............................................... 709
Instant Fuel Economy ....................... 118, 146
Instrument Panel ........................................ 89
Brightness Control........................... 202, 203
Interior Lights........................................... 215
Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 205
iPod ................................................... 250, 289
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 664
Jump Starting ........................................... 683
K
Key Number Tag....................................... 163
Keyless Access System .............................. 165
Keys........................................................... 162
Number Tag............................................ 163
Rear Door Won’t Open............................ 176
Remote Transmitter................................. 170
Types and Functions................................ 162
Kickdown (Continuously Variable
Transmission) .......................................... 426
Knee Airbags .............................................. 61
730
Index
L
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ......... 541
LATCH (Child Seats) .................................... 78
Lights ................................................. 192, 630
Auto High-Beam...................................... 196
Bulb Replacement.................................... 630
Daytime Running Lights........................... 195
High Beam Indicator .................................. 99
Interior .................................................... 215
Light Switches ......................................... 192
Lights On Indicator .................................... 99
Parking Lights .......................................... 192
Limited Slip Differential (LSD) ................. 459
Load Limits................................................ 415
Locking/Unlocking .................................... 162
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 177
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 176
From Inside.............................................. 174
From Outside........................................... 165
Keys ........................................................ 162
Using a Key ............................................. 171
Low Battery Charge.................................. 690
Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 96
Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength ...... 164
Low Speed Braking Control ..................... 487
Lower Anchors............................................ 78
Lubricant Specifications Chart ......... 710, 712
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit).............. 415
M
Maintenance............................................. 601
Adding the Coolant................................. 625
Battery .................................................... 647
Brake/Clutch Fluid ................................... 628
Cleaning ......................................... 651, 653
Climate Control System........................... 650
Coolant................................................... 625
Maintenance Minder
TM
............................ 605
Oil........................................................... 619
Precautions ............................................. 602
Remote Transmitter................................. 649
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 630
Safety...................................................... 603
Service Items ........................................... 610
Tires ........................................................ 637
Transmission Fluid ................................... 627
Under the Hood ...................................... 615
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 94, 690
Manual Transmission ............................... 433
Map Lights................................................ 216
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 415
Meters, Gauges......................................... 110
Mirrors ...................................................... 205
Adjusting ................................................ 205
Door ....................................................... 206
Exterior ................................................... 206
Interior Rearview ..................................... 205
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 656
Moonroof ................................................. 187
MP3 ................................................... 252, 292
Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 594
N
Navigation................................................ 148
Numbers (Identification) ......................... 714
O
Odometer ................................................. 112
Oil (Engine) .............................................. 618
Adding ................................................... 621
Checking ................................................ 619
Displaying Oil Life ................................... 606
Engine oil pressure low Warning ............. 689
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 618
Viscosity.................................................. 618
Open Source Licenses .............................. 345
Opening
Hood ...................................................... 617
Trunk...................................................... 703
Opening/Closing
Moonroof ............................................... 187
Power Windows...................................... 184
Trunk...................................................... 178
Outside Temperature Display ................. 112
Overheating ............................................. 687
731
Index
P
Paddle Shifters
(7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) ............... 431
Panic Mode............................................... 183
Parking ..................................................... 583
Parking Brake........................................... 571
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
(Amber)............................................. 93, 692
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
(Red).......................................... 92, 691, 692
Parking Lights .......................................... 192
Parking Sensor System............................. 585
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator................. 70
Passing Indicators..................................... 192
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ............... 254, 295
Power Windows ....................................... 184
Precautions While Driving
Rain ........................................................ 425
Pregnant Women....................................... 51
Puncture (Tire) ......................................... 661
R
Radio (AM/FM) ................................. 248, 285
Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 249, 287
Range................................................ 118, 146
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 249, 287
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ...... 717
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button..................................................... 201
Rear Seat Heaters..................................... 230
Rear Seats (Folding Down)....................... 209
Rearview Mirror........................................ 205
Refueling................................................... 596
Fuel Gauge.............................................. 111
Gasoline .......................... 596, 704, 710, 712
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 96
Regulations ............................... 465, 640, 715
Remote Transmitter ................................. 170
Replacement
Battery .................................................... 649
Bulbs ....................................................... 630
Fuses ............................................... 695, 697
Tires ................................................ 643, 661
Wiper Blade Rubber................................. 635
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 716
Resetting a Trip Meter ..................... 118, 146
Rev Indicators ........................................... 114
Road Departure Mitigation ..................... 492
On and Off.............................................. 495
S
Safe Driving ................................................ 39
Safety Check ............................................... 43
Safety Labels ............................................... 88
Safety Message ............................................. 5
Safety Support .................................. 124, 155
Seat Belts .................................................... 44
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 50
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 48
Checking................................................... 52
Fastening .................................................. 49
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 81
Pregnant Women ...................................... 51
Reminder .................................................. 46
Warning Indicator ............................... 46, 95
Seat Heaters...................................... 229, 230
Seats .......................................................... 207
Adjusting ................................................ 207
Front Seat Heaters................................... 229
Front Seats .............................................. 207
Rear Seat Heaters .................................... 230
Rear Seats ............................................... 209
Security System......................................... 181
Security System Alarm Indicator............... 102
Selecting a Child Seat................................. 77
Selector Knob (Audio).............................. 245
Setting the Clock...................................... 160
Settings ..................................................... 128
Shift Lever........................... 28, 427, 429, 433
Releasing................................................. 686
Won’t Move............................................ 686
Shift Position Indicator .............. 94, 428, 430
Shifting (Transmission)............. 427, 429, 433
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 50
Side Airbags................................................ 64
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 67
732
Index
Siri Eyes Free ............................................. 257
Snow Tires ................................................. 645
Spare Tire .................................. 661, 711, 713
Spark Plugs........................................ 710, 712
Specifications ............................................ 710
Specified Fuel............................ 596, 710, 712
Speed/Distance Units ........................ 126, 156
Speedometer............................................. 110
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 56
Starting Assist Brake Function ................. 443
Starting the Engine .................................. 418
Does Not Start ......................................... 679
If the Battery Is Dead ............................... 683
Steering Wheel
Adjusting................................................. 204
Stopping.................................................... 583
Stopwatch ................................................. 139
Summer Tires ............................................ 646
Sunglasses Holder..................................... 222
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........ 56
Switches
(Around the Steering Wheel)......... 8, 9, 188
System Message Indicator........................ 100
System Updates......................................... 279
T
Tachometer............................................... 111
TCU Open Source Licence ........................ 724
Temperature
Gauge..................................................... 112
Outside Temperature Display................... 112
Temperature Sensor......................... 112, 236
Temporary Repair Kit (TRK)..................... 668
Time (Setting) ........................................... 160
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 460
Indicator............................................ 98, 694
Tires........................................................... 637
Air Pressure ............................. 638, 711, 713
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 637
Inspection ............................................... 637
Labeling .................................................. 638
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 661
Regulations ............................................. 640
Rotation .................................................. 644
Spare Tire................................ 661, 711, 713
Summer .................................................. 646
Temporary Repair Kit (TRK)...................... 668
Tire Chains .............................................. 645
Wear Indicators ....................................... 642
Winter..................................................... 645
Tools.......................................................... 660
Towing Your Vehicle................................ 417
Emergency .............................................. 701
TPMS
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ........ 460
Indicator ........................................... 98, 694
Traffic Jam Assist...................................... 553
Traffic Sign Recognition System ..... 113, 562
Transmission............................. 427, 429, 433
Fluid ....................................................... 627
Manual ................................................... 433
Shift Position Indicator .............. 94, 428, 430
Trip Meter ........................................ 118, 146
TRK (Temporary Repair Kit) .................... 668
Troubleshooting ...................................... 659
Blown Fuse ..................................... 695, 697
Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 35
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 36
Emergency Towing ................................. 701
Engine Won’t Start ................................. 679
Noise When Braking ................................. 38
Overheating............................................ 687
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 661
Rear Door Won’t Open ..................... 36, 176
Shift Lever Won’t Move .......................... 686
Warning Indicators............................ 90, 689
Trunk ........................................................ 178
Lid .......................................................... 178
Light Bulb ....................................... 710, 712
Release Cord........................................... 703
Unable to Open ...................................... 703
Turbo Engine Vehicle .............................. 600
Turbo Gauge ............................................ 152
733
Index
Turn Signals
Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 99
U
Unlocking the Doors................................ 165
USB Flash Drives ............... 238, 252, 292, 330
USB Port(s)................................................ 239
Using the Keyless Access System ............. 165
V
Vanity Mirrors ............................................ 11
Vehicle Identification Number................ 714
Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
(VSA®) .............. 457
Off Button .............................................. 458
Off Indicator ............................................. 97
System Indicator ....................................... 97
Viscosity (Oil)............................ 618, 711, 713
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist
TM
) .............. 457
W
Wallpaper................................................. 273
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 689
Warning Labels .......................................... 88
Warnings .......................................... 127, 156
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 719
Watts ................................................ 710, 712
WAV.................................................. 252, 292
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 642
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 664
Wi-Fi Connection ...................................... 304
Window Washers...................................... 199
Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 629
Switch ..................................................... 199
Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 184
Windshield ................................................ 199
Cleaning.......................................... 651, 654
Defrosting/Defogging .............................. 233
Washer Fluid ........................................... 629
Wiper Blades ........................................... 635
Wipers and Washers................................ 199
Winter Tires
Snow Tires............................................... 645
Tire Chains .............................................. 645
Wipers and Washers................................. 199
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 635
Wireless Charger....................................... 224
WMA ................................................. 252, 292
Worn Tires................................................. 637
© 2025 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved
Printed in the U.S.A.
MYGARAGE.HONDA.COM (U.S.A.)
HONDA.CA (CANADA)
31T20640
OM-27969
00X31-T20-6400
2026 Honda Civic Sedan Owner’s Manual
